Pastries Like a Pro

  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Apple Season
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Apple Season
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • Home
    • Recipes
    • About Helen
    • Apple Season
    • Subscribe
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home

    Apple Spiced Cupcakes with Maple Buttercream

    Modified: Oct 22, 2026 · Published: Oct 20, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    An Apple Spiced Cupcake with Maple Buttercream sits on a cream colored plate with a plate of more cupcakes behind it on a paisley cloth.

    If you love the flavors of apple cake and maple frosting, these Apple Spiced Cupcakes with Maple Buttercream bring them together in one delicious bite. Shredded Granny Smith apples keep the cupcakes moist, while dark brown sugar, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg and cloves build layers of warm spice. Walnuts add crunch, and optional cinnamon chips give every bite another burst of flavor.

    The finishing touch is a creamy, three ingredient maple buttercream made with real maple syrup. These cupcakes are easy to prepare in a food processor or mixer and you can make them regular or Jumbo sizes. Just follow along to get the best flavor, texture, and frosting from every batch.

    Looking for more cupcakes - try one of these: Amazing Boston Cream Cupcakes, Banana Split Cupcakes, Malted Milk Frosted Cupcakes or the intriguing Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What are the best apples for apple cupcakes?

    The best apples for these cupcakes are Granny Smith apples for two reasons. The first is they aren't overly juicy so they don't add much liquid to the batter. The second is they are more tart than sweet which is important to balance the brown sugar in the cupcakes and the maple buttercream.

    It takes about 2 large or 3 medium apples for the 2 cups of shredded apples needed.

    Why use Real Maple Syrup In Maple Buttercream

    Definitely use real maple syrup for the best and most intensely flavored maple buttercream. Pancake syrup and maple extract just doesn't do the buttercream justice.

    What makes these apple cupcakes so moist?

    Brown sugar adds a depth of flavor that granulated sugar cannot. Dark brown is especially good as it gives a caramel flavor to the cupcakes..

    What makes these cupcakes so very moist is the use of oil instead of butter in the batter. Because oil is a liquid and not a solid or semisolid such as butter, it doesn't set back up after baking.  Butter solidifies when it cools or when stored in the refrigerator, creating a firmer, denser texture. Oil stays liquid both at room temperature and when chilled, meaning oil-based recipes such as quick breads, muffins, cupcakes and snack cakes continue to feel soft and moist over time.

    Liquid oil spreads and coats flour proteins (gluten) more evenly and thoroughly than solid fat. This barrier blocks the flour from absorbing too much water or bonding too tightly, preventing a tough or dry crumb.

    How to Make Maple Buttercream

    The maple buttercream is of the easy American type with only 3 ingredients - powdered sugar, butter and real maple syrup replacing the usual cream so there is nothing else to get in the way of this marvelously flavored buttercream. Just be sure to beat it enough after the initial mix to bring it together to dissolve the powdered sugar and lighten the buttercream.

    Why you'll want to make these cupcakes

    • They stay moist. Oil and shredded apples help keep the cupcakes tender even after they cool.
    • There's more to the flavor beside cinnamon. Ginger, nutmeg and cloves complement the apples, while dark brown sugar adds a deeper caramel note.
    • The maple buttercream tastes like maple. Real maple syrup give this simple buttercream its distinctive flavor.
    • You can customize the texture. Walnuts add crunch, and cinnamon chips provide extra bursts of cinnamon flavor. the chips can be omitted if you prefer.
    • You can bake two sizes make regular cupcakes for individual treats or jumbo cupcakes when you want a more generous dessert.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Apple Spiced Cupcakes

    Ingredients for the Apple Spiced cupcakes include all-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, brown sugar, canola or vegetable oil, eggs, apples cinnamon, ginger, cloves, nutmeg walnuts and cinnamon chips.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg, cloves, Granny Smith apple

    SECOND ROW: Baking soda, baking powder, salt

    THIRD ROW: Walnuts, eggs, cinnamon chips, Granny Smith Apple

    BACK ROW: Dark brown sugar, all-purpose flour, canola oil

    Maple Buttercream

    Maple frosting ingredients are:  unsalted butter, pure maple syrup and powdered sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter, real maple syrup

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Key Ingredients for the best apple cupcakes

    • Dark Brown Sugar is used for it's deep caramel taste
    • Either canola or vegetable oil is used for it's neutral flavor, adding tenderness and moisture to the cupcake batter.
    • Walnuts are used but pecans may be substituted if desired.
    • Granny Smith apples are the best for this recipe.
    • Cinnamon chips reinforce the spices used for the cupcakes.
    • It is important when making the Maple Frosting to have the butter very soft but not melting so it can dissolve powdered sugar and make a light, creamy buttercream.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    how to make apple spiced cupcakes

    This first collages hows the flour and spices, salt, baking powder and baking soda in a bowl, whisked together, the eggs, brown sugar and oil added to the processor bowl, and processed.

    Step 1. Combine the flour, cinnamon, ginger, cloves, nutmeg, baking powder, baking soda and salt in a bowl. Step 2. Whisk together and set aside. Step 3. Place the brown sugar, eggs and oil in the bowl of a processor. Step 4. Process to mix completely.

    This collages shows the apples cut in, the contents of the processor moved to a bowl, the flour folded in and the walnuts and cinnamon chips added.

    Step 5. Peel the apples and shred them to make 2 cups. Add them to the processor bowl and pulses 2 or 3 quick times to mix them in. Step 6. Transfer the mixture to a large bowl. Step 7. Fold in the flour. Step 8. Add the walnuts and cinnamon chips.

    The last collage shows the finished batter the baked cupcakes, the frosting ingredients in the mixing bowl, and the frosted cupcakes on a cooling rack.

    Step 9. Stir the walnuts and cinnamon chips in to complete the batter. Step 10. Fill the cupcake liners 3/4 full. If using jumbo cups used a #8 disher/scooper or 1/2 cup per cupcake and bake for 20 to 25 minutes. If using the regular size cupcake, use a #16 disher/scooper or 1/4 cup per cupcake. Bake for 17 to 19 minutes. Step 11. Place all of the ingredients for the buttercream in the bowl of a mixer. Beat on low to combine and then move to medium high. Beat until very light and smooth with no grittiness. If it is too soft, add a bit more powdered sugar, if too stiff, add a tablespoon or so of maple to loosen it. Step 12. Using a #5 open star, pipe swirls of frosting on top of the cooled cupcakes.

    apple spiced cupcake FAQ's

    What spices go best with apples?

    Cinnamon is a classic choice for apple cupcakes, but nutmeg, ginger, and allspice also complement the fruit beautifully. Together, these warm spices bring out the natural sweetness of the apples and give the cupcakes their signature fall flavor.

    How do you keep the apple cupcakes moist?

    Using oil instead of butter and the apples keeps these cupcakes extra moist for days.

    Can Apple Spiced Cupcakes be frozen?

    Absolutely. They can be frozen completely finished with the Maple Buttercream. Leave the cupcakes in their paper liners and simply freeze the cupcakes until they are hard. Wrap each cupcake in foil. They will freeze well for several months. Unwrap them and thaw on a cooling rack at room temperature.

    What are the best apples for apple spiced cupcakes?

    Granny Smith apples are an excellent choice because their tart flavor balances the sweetness of the brown sugar and maple buttercream. They also tend to be less juicy than some other varieties so they don't add extra liquid to the batter. Use 2 large or 3 medium apples to make the 2 cups of shredded apples needed for this recipe.

    Can I make maple buttercream with pancake syrup instead of real maple syrup?

    Real maple syrup is the best choice for this recipe because it provides a distinctive maple flavor. Pancake syrup may produce a different flavor and consistency, so the results may not be the same.

    tips for moist cupcakes and smooth maple buttercream

    • Peel and shred the apples before adding them to the processor.
    • Pulse the apples in with 2 or 3 quick pulses. Do not over process and make them disappear.
    • Use dark brown sugar for the best taste.
    • While the cinnamon chips are optional, they add a lot of flavor to the cupcakes.
    • Make sure the butter is very soft but not melted or runny so the powder sugar can completely dissolve and the mixture become light.
    • Use real maple syrup for the best flavor and texture for the cupcake.
    This is avphoto of six cupcakes on a cream colored plate.

    More Easy Treats for Fall

    • Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.
      Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe
    • Apple Cake Doughnuts on a plate with a napkin in the background.
      Apple Cake Doughnuts
    • A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.
      Lemon Sugar Buns
    • Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,
      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    An Apple Spiced Cupcake with Maple Buttercream sits on a cream colored plate with a plate of more cupcakes behind it on a paisley cloth.

    Apple Spiced Cupcakes with Maple Buttercream

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These really moist Apple Spiced Cupcakes with Maple Buttercream are especially welcome during the fall when a fresh crop of apples is bountiful. Teamed up with all the warm spices of the fall and a rich maple buttercream they're perfect for fall baking.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16 small cupcakes
    Calories 370 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 Jumbo or regular cupcake tins
    • Food Processor
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Apple Spiced Cupcakes

    • 2 cups apples, shredded (2 large or 3 medium) Granny Smith's preferred
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 3/4 teaspoon baking soda
    • 3/4 teaspoon table salt
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 3/4 teaspoon ginger
    • 1/2 teaspoon nutmeg
    • 1/4 teaspoon cloves
    • 1 cup dark brown sugar, packed (200 grams)
    • 3/4 cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1/2 cup walnuts (60 grams)
    • 1/2 cup cinnamon chips, optional

    Maple Buttercream

    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter, very soft (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 3 cups powdered sugar (390 grams)
    • 1/3 cup +1 tablespoon real maple syrup

    Instructions
     

    Apple Spiced Cupcakes

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line 16 regular size cupcake or 8 jumbo wells with paper liners.
    • Shred the apples and set aside.
    • Sift together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg and cloves. Set aside.
    • Place the brown sugar, oil and eggs in the bowl of a processor. Process to mix completely. Add the shredded apples and pulse one or twice to mix in. Transfer to a large bowl.
    • Fold in the flour until there is none visible. Stir in the walnuts and cinnamon chips.
    • Fill the paper liners to within 3/4 of the top of the liners. Use a #8 disher/scooper or 1/2 cup for the jumbo muffins and a #16 or 1/4 cup for regular cups.
    • Bake for 20 to 25 minutes for the jumbo cupcakes or 17 to 19 for the regular size. Cool completely on a cooling rack before frosting.
    • TO MAKE IN A MIXER: Follow the same instructions but mix the flour mixture in on low, then add the walnuts and cinnamon chips, mixing briefly.

    Maple Buttercream

    • Place the softened butter, powdered sugar and 1/3 cup maple syrup in the bowl of a mixer. Mix on low to bring together. Raise the speed to medium and continue to whip until the powdered sugar has dissolved and the buttercream is not gritty. It should be smooth, very light and significantly increased in volume.
    • If the buttercream is too stiff, add the additional 1 tablespoon maple syrup. If too loose, add a bit more powdered sugar to stiffen up.
    • Pipe swirls on the cupcakes with a #8 open star.
    • To store: Keep under a cake cover at room temperature for 3 days. To freeze, leave the cupcakes in their cupcake liners and freeze until hard, wrap individually in foil and store for 2 months. To thaw, place on a cooling rack, unwrap and thaw at room temperature.
    • Yield: 16 regular size cupcakes or 8 jumbos.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _______________________________________
    Dark Brown Sugar is used for it's deep caramel taste
    Either canola or vegetable oil is used for it's neutral flavor, adding tenderness and moisture to the cupcake batter. 
    Walnuts are used but pecans may be substituted if desired. 
    Granny Smith apples are the best for this recipe.
    Cinnamon chips reinforce the spices used for the cupcakes. 
    It is important when making the Maple Frosting to have the butter very soft but not melting so it can dissolve powdered sugar and make a light, creamy buttercream.
    Peel and shred the apples before adding them to the processor.
    Pulse the apples in with 2 or 3 quick pulses. Do not over process and make them disappear. 
    Use dark brown sugar for the best taste.
    While the cinnamon chips are optional, they add a lot of flavor to the cupcakes.
     Use real maple syrup for the best flavor and texture for the cupcake.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 370kcalCarbohydrates: 49gProtein: 2gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 39mgSodium: 202mgPotassium: 85mgFiber: 1gSugar: 41gVitamin A: 221IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Beyond Pumpkin Pie: 8 Pumpkin Bakes Worth Making All Season Long

    Modified: Oct 12, 2026 · Published: Oct 13, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

    After more than 25 years of owning a bakery, I can tell you with certainty that pumpkin season brings out the best in a kitchen. The warm spices, the rich color, the way it makes everything just a little more tender and moist — there is so much more to pumpkin baking than the classic pie that shows up every November. And while I have nothing against pie, I do think it gets far more than its fair share of the spotlight.

    A slice of the pumpkin tart finished with a lattice design and whipped cream sits on a white plate with an orange and green gourd behind it as well as the pumpkin tart itself

    (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart

    These are the recipes I find myself turning to again and again — from a light-as-air pumpkin mousse torte that practically makes itself, to golden dinner rolls with a subtle spicing that will have everyone reaching for seconds. Some are perfect for a stress-free Thanksgiving morning, others are the kind of showstopping desserts that anchor a holiday table. All of them are made with the same philosophy I brought to the bakery every day: great flavor, honest technique, and nothing fussier than it needs to be. I hope you find a few new favorites here.

    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones

    More cake-like and moist than your average scone, these come together quickly and are packed with warm spices and toasted pecans. A bright orange glaze and a little sanding sugar finish them off beautifully. Want fresh scones for Thanksgiving morning without the fuss? Simply freeze them unbaked and pop them in the oven when you're ready. 

    Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones

    View post 

    (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart

    I don't know how to make an easier dessert than this one. A light-as-air pumpkin mousse — intensely flavored and perfectly spiced — sits in a pretzel crust that has more character than any graham cracker crust I've come across. If time is your problem during the holidays, this is your dessert. 

    (Almost) No Bake Pumpkin Tart

    View post 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    Two bowls, a whisk, and a rubber spatula — that is genuinely all you need here. Combine the dry ingredients, combine the wet, bring them together, and into the oven they go. Topped with a pecan streusel and perfectly not-too-sweet, these are ideal for a beginning baker or for making with a child. What memories that will create. 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    View post 

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways

    Golden, soft, and fluffy with a subtle warmth from the spices, these rolls are an easy make-ahead win for any holiday table. The foolproof dough freezes beautifully, so you can have fresh rolls without the last-minute stress. And with the addition of just one ingredient, the very same dough transforms from a dinner roll into a breakfast roll. 

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways

    View post 

    Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce

    This cheesecake is highlighted by a salted caramel sauce that is truly out of this world, and I've shared every bakery trick I know to ensure it comes out crack-free every time. All the flavors of the season come through beautifully — pumpkin, warm spice, and that lingering caramel finish. It is a proper centerpiece dessert that is easier to pull off than it looks. 

    Pumpkin Cheesecake with Salted Caramel Sauce

    View post 

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    These Pumpkin Cake Donuts are baked, not fried, and ready in no time — no yeast, no waiting, no fuss. They stay fresh for days, which means you can make a batch ahead and not give it another thought until company arrives. And if you don't own a cake donut pan, the recipe has a workaround for that too, so there's really no excuse not to make them. 

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    View post 

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart

    This Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart is the kind of recipe that looks far more impressive than the effort it asks of you — a graham cracker crust filled with ribbons of cream cheese and pumpkin swirled together, finished with a caramel rum sauce that you can make weeks ahead and pull from the refrigerator when you need it. That make-ahead sauce alone is worth the price of admission during a busy holiday season. Elegant on the table, honest in the kitchen. 

    Pumpkin Cheesecake Tart

    View post 

    Updated Pumpkin Mousse Torte

    This Pumpkin Mousse Torte was, hands down, the most popular dessert we made at the bakery every fall — and once you taste it, you'll understand why. A crumb crust, a cheesecake layer, and a light but intensely flavored pumpkin mousse on top make for something that feels genuinely special without being difficult. Best of all, it freezes beautifully, which is exactly how we sold it to customers and exactly how you should make it: ahead of time, so Thanksgiving takes care of itself. 

    Updated Pumpkin Mousse Torte

    View post

    Pumpkin rules for the next couple of months and I'm happy to share some of my favorites.

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake Is Pure Fall Indulgence

    Modified: Oct 7, 2026 · Published: Oct 8, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake sits on a white,laced edged plate on a gold and white plate with a brown napkin and fork in the background.

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake combines the best of two favorite holiday desserts - pecan pie and cheesecake in the creamiest cheesecake I have ever made or eaten. What's more, it's easy with a foolproof way of baking with no cracking and no water bath. The cheesecake comes together with only 4 ingredients in mere minutes and then a long, slow bake turns it into a silky, incredibly creamy base to be finished with an easy caramel topping.

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake sits on a white,laced edged plate on a gold and white plate with a brown napkin and fork in the background.

    Want to know more? It absolutely freezes so it's great for the busy holidays or anytime you need to get ahead. You can tell everyone you made it or tell them you got it from a bakery - you did --yours! Make it once and you'll make it again.

    These cheesecakes are made to keep you company - The Definitive Baileys Cheesecake, White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake, Unbelievable Cheesecake Update, and another fall favorite Apple Crisp Cheesecake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Processor vs. The Mixer for Cheesecakes

    Years ago while I was the pastry chef for the most esteemed restaurant in St.Louis, I needed to start the lemon cheesecakes but the mixer was in use. So I made it in the food processor. When the owner tasted it he exclaimed, "I don't know what you did to this, it was always good, but now it's phenomenal." The only change was I used the food processor instead of the mixer.

    And it made sense. The mixer will add air to the cheesecake, the processor doesn't so it makes an extraordinarily smooth, creamy cheesecake. It's how I make my cheesecakes now. Don't get me wrong, the mixer is still fine to use but the processor is better.

    Let's talk Cheesecake pans

    There are two basic types of pans into which a cheesecake is baked. A springform pan or a cheesecake pan. The former is used mostly by home bakers while the later is used by professionals.

    This collages shows a springform pan and a cheesecake pan.

    Springform pan 1. As you can see in the photo, there is a clasp that closes the rim of the pan. This is why professionals don't use these pans. If the pan is improperly stored or gets old that clasp can loosen and the side won't close. Springform pan 2. The bottom is a separate piece. Look at the edge of the pan, it has a lip on it which makes it difficult to get the cheesecake out. Cheesecake Pan 3. This is a cheesecake pan which professionals use because they last forever. I had about 100 at the bakery. They are easy to use and easy to clean. This one is 3" deep and we used it for both cheesecakes and to assemble cakes with wiggly fillings so the sides of the cake would be straight, As you can see the rim is solid. Cheesecake Pan 4. This has a removable bottom with no rim so it's easy to release the contents.

    Why the Slow Oven?

    Cheesecakes can be tricky. Many require the cheesecake to be baked in a water bath to slow the heat and keep it from cracking. The pan also has to be wrapped in foil to keep the water from seeping into the bottom of the pan. This is usually done with higher baking temperatures.

    With this recipe, all of this is avoided by simply baking at a much lower temperature for a longer time with no water bath or wrapping of the pan. As you will see in the photos below it is a perfect cheesecake.

    Why You'll Love This Cheesecake

    • It's unbelievably easy.
    • The cheesecake uses readily available ingredients and just a few of them.
    • It can be made over a few days.
    • Both the cheesecake and the caramel pecan topping take less than 20 minutes to make.
    • The baked cheesecake can be frozen for later.

    Recipe ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    The ingredients for the Caramel Pecan Cheesecake crust are graham crackers, brown sugar, and unsalted butter

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Graham crackers, brown sugar

    Caramel Pecan Cheesecake

    The cheesecake ingredients include  cream cheese, brown sugar, eggs, and heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Eggs, brown sugar

    BACK ROW: Cream cheese, heavy cream

    Caramel Pecan Topping

    The caramel pecan topping ingredients are brown sugar, unsalted butter, water, maple syrup, heavy cream and pecan

    FRONT ROW: Water, unsalted butter, maple syrup

    BACK ROW: Brown Sugar, heavy cream, toasted pecan pieces

    Key ingredients

    • Either light or dark brown sugar can be used but dark will give you a deeper caramel taste.
    • I used Honey Maid plain graham crackers and used all the butter. Different brands of crackers may take a little less or a little more butter as formulas are different. Start with about 5 tablespoons of butter. If the mixture doesn't hold together, add the rest. If it is still dry, add a bit more.
    • For the caramel pecan topping I used real maple syrup. However, regular corn syrup or golden syrup can also be used.
    • Be sure to take the temperature of the topping to 234°F so it sets up properly.
    • Trader Joe's has toasted pecan pieces in 8 ounce packages. No chopping, no toasting!

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by step instructions

    Graham Cracker Crust

    The first collage show the graham cracker crust being made with the crackers and brown sugar in the processor, processed, the butter added and the crumbs made.

    Step 1. Place the graham crackers and brown sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process into fine crumbs. Step 3. Add the melted butter. Step 4. Pulse with short bursts until the crumbs are formed. Do not over process.

    This collage shows the crumbs in the pan, pressed into place, the edges being spooned and a wiped out processor bowl.

    Step 5. Spray the cheesecake pan with a non-stick baking release and pour the crumbs into the pan. Step 6. Press them firmly into the bottom of the pan. Step 7. Spoon the crust by using a side of a spoon to press the crumbs around the edge of the pan firmly against the pan. Set aside. Step 8. Wipe the bowl clean with a paper towel.

    Caramel Pecan Cheesecake

    Spray a 9"x3" cheesecake or spring form pan with a non-stick baking release and set aside. Toast the pecan pieces at 350°F for about 5 to 7 minutes until fragrant and a little browner. Set aside.

    Place half of the cream cheese in the processor bowl, process until smooth, repeat with the other half.

    Step 9. Place half of the room temperature cream cheese in the bowl of a processor. Step 10. Process until smooth. Scrape down. Step 11. Place the remaining cream cheese in the processor bowl. Step 12. Process until all is completely smooth. Be sure to scrape down as needed until no lumps remain.

    This collage shows the brown sugar being added and processed followed by the eggs and cream which are processed until smooth.

    Step 13. Add the brown sugar. Step 14. Process until smooth. Step 15. Add the eggs and cream. Step 16. Process until smooth, making sure to scrape into the bottom of te processor to get a perfectly smooth filling

    This collage shows the cheesecake poured into the pan, baked, the brown sugar, butter, water, maple syrup and cream in a small saucepan then brought to a boil,

    Step 17. Pour the cheese cake into the prepared pan. Step 18. Bake as directed. Cool to room temperature. If the cheese cake is set and firm the caramel can be poured over it. If in doubt, refrigerate until cold and completely set or overnight. Step 19. Place the brown sugar, butter, water, maple syrup and cream in a small saucepan. Mine saucepan held 6 cups. Step 20. Place over medium high heat and bring to a boil. Wash the sides of the pan down with a brush dipped in cold water. This will remove any sugar crystals clinging to the sides of the pan which can cause the entire batch to granulate and become grainy. Boil to a temperature of 234°F.

    The last collage shows the syrup completely cooked, the cream and pecans stirred in and poured over the cheesecake.

    Step 21. Remove the caramel from the heat. Step 22. Add the remaining cream and pecans. Step 23. Stir everything together well. Step 24. Pour over the cheese cake and refrigerate overnight for the caramel to set up.

    Releasing a Cheesecake

    These photos are of a different cheesecake but the technique is the same.

    This collages shows a cheesecake being released from a cheesecake pan,

    Step 1. The easiest way for home bakers is to use a blow dryer on high to go around the edge of the cheesecake pan. Step 2. Place it on a 28 ounce can of anything, I have a crushed tomato can I use for this. Step 3. Slide the rim down. If it doesn't want to come down, go around it with the blow dryer again. Step 4. Insert a metal spatula between the bottom of the cake and the removable bottom. Go around the entire bottom to make sure it is free. With two pancake turners one on each side, lift the cake to a cake board or serving plate. We did this the exact same way at the bakery.

    Recipe FAQ's

    Why did my cheesecake crack?

    Most likely the baking temperature was too high or it was baked too long. It should jiggle slightly in the middle when done. In that case, a water bath would be helpful to slow down the baking. Another alternative is to lower the temperature and bake for a longer time. C

    Can cheesecakes be frozen?

    Cheesecakes freeze really well in most cases with the exception of those with a sour cream topping. It cracks when thawed.

    What do I do if my cheesecake cracks?

    Don't worry about it. It will still taste good. If it bothers you, cover it up. Depending upon what kind it is, cover it with a chocolate ganache, sour cream topping, fruit or whipped cream.

    Expert Tips

    • When scraping the bowl of the processor, make sure to use a hard plastic spatula and get all the way to the bottom so no unincorporated cream cheese ruins the creamy texture.
    • Either dark or light brown sugar can be used, but dark will give a more intense caramel taste,
    • It is important to take the caramel pecan topping to 234°F for it to set up properly,
    • Use toasted pecans for the best taste,
    • The test for a baked cheesecake is that it will jiggle slightly in the very middle. Over baking at this point can cause a cheesecake to crack, especially at higher temperatures.
    • Have the cream cheese at room temperature before processing to avoid lumps.
    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake sits on a white,laced edged plate on a gold and white plate with a brown napkin and fork in the background.

    Looking for a few More Cheesecakes?

    • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
      Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
    • A slice of the Rocky Road Cheesecake sits on a white plate on a rattan server.
      Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake
    • This Chocolate Coffee No Bake Cheesecake sits on a drizzle of caramel sauce
      Chocolate Coffee No-Bake Cheesecake
    • Finished slice
      Sour Cream Cheesecake

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake sits on a white,laced edged plate on a gold and white plate with a brown napkin and fork in the background.

    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake Is Pure Fall Indulgence

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Caramel Pecan Cheesecake combines the best of two favorite holiday desserts - pecan pie and cheesecake in the creamiest cheesecake I have ever made or eaten. What's more, it's easy with a foolproof way of baking with no cracking and no water bath.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 3 hours hrs
    Total Time 3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 667 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9"x2" or 3" cheesecake or springform pan
    • Food Processor
    • Food thermometer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • 1 1/3 cups graham cracker crumbs (190 grams)
    • 1/4 cup brown sugar, packed (50 grams)
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (90 grams or 3/4 stick)

    Caramel Pecan Cheesecake

    • 2 pounds cream cheese, room temperature (910 grams or four 8-ounce packages)
    • 1 cup brown sugar, packed (200 grams)
    • 5 large eggs
    • 1/3 cup heavy cream

    Caramel Pecan Topping

    • 1/2 cup brown sugar, packed (100 grams)
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter (90 grams or 3/4 stick)
    • 1/4 cup water
    • 2 tablespoons maple syrup, golden syrup or clear corn syrup
    • 1/4 cup heavy cream, divided
    • 1 cup pecan pieces (150 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • Spray a 9"X 2" or 3" cheesecake pan or springform mold with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Break up the graham crackers and add them to the food processor along with the brown sugar. Process to form fine crumbs.
    • Add the melted butter and pulse to form crumbs. Do not over process or it can become paste.
    • Pour them into the prepared pan and press them firmly onto the bottom. Spoon the crust by using the side of a spoon to press the crumbs around the edge of the pan firmly against the pan. Set aside.
    • Wipe the bowl and blade of the processor clean with paper towels. There is no need to wash it.

    Caramel Pecan Cheesecake

    • Preheat the oven to 200°F.
    • Place half of the cream cheese in the processor and process until it is smooth. Scrape down.
    • Add the remaining cream cheese and process again until smooth. Scrape down being sure to get to the bottom of the bowl.
    • Add the brown sugar and process again.
    • Add the eggs and cream and process until all is smooth without lumps. Scrape down as necessary.
    • Pour into the prepared pan. Place it on a parchment lined rimmed pan ( a sheet pan works well here). Bake for 2 1/2 to 3 hours until the cheesecake jiggles slightly in the middle.
    • Allow to come to room temperature. It should be firm enough to add the topping but if in doubt, refrigerate until firm.

    Caramel Pecan Topping

    • When the cheesecake is firm, combine the brown sugar, butter, water, maple syrup, and 2 tablespoons of cream in a 6 cup saucepan. Bring to a boil over medium heat.
    • Wash down the sides of the pan with a pastry brush dipped in cold water. This will prevent any sugar granules from crystallizing when cold making the caramel grainy.
    • Boil until it reaches 234°F on a food thermometer. Remove from the heat and add the remaining 2 tablespoons of cream and the pecans. Pour over the cheesecake and spread it out so the pecans are evenly distributed. Chill overnight or for a couple of days before serving.
    • To release the cheesecake if using a cheesecake pan, go around the outside of the pan with a blow dryer set on high. Set it on a 28 ounce can and slide the bottom down. Place a metal spatula between the crust and the bottom of the pan. Go around the entire removable bottom to make sure it is free. Lift if off with two pancake turners and place on a cake board or serving plate.
    • At this point it can be refrigerated or frozen, wrapped and kept for 2 months. Thaw, still wrapped, in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________
    Either light or dark brown sugar can be used but dark will give you a deeper caramel taste.
    I used Honey Maid plain graham crackers and used all the butter.  Different brands of crackers may take a little less or a little more butter as formulas are different. Start with about 5 tablespoons of butter. If the mixture doesn't hold together, add the rest. If it is still dry, add a bit more. 
    For the caramel pecan topping I used real maple syrup. However, regular corn syrup or golden syrup can also be used. 
    Be sure to take the temperature of the topping to 234°F so it sets up properly. 
    Trader Joe's has toasted pecan pieces in 8 ounce packages. No chopping, no toasting!
    When scraping the bowl of the processor, make sure to use a hard plastic spatula and get all the way to the bottom so no unincorporated cream cheese ruins the creamy texture.,
    Use toasted pecans for the best taste, 
    The test for a baked cheesecake is that it will jiggle slightly in the very middle. Over baking at this point can cause a cheesecake to crack, especially at higher temperatures.
    Have the cream cheese at room temperature before processing to avoid lumps.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 667kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 9gFat: 51gSaturated Fat: 26gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 16gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 197mgSodium: 343mgPotassium: 247mgFiber: 1gSugar: 39gVitamin A: 1653IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 140mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    15 Things Good Bakers Do Differently

    Modified: Oct 5, 2026 · Published: Oct 6, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.


    When I had my bakery, consistency was not optional. Cake layers had to be flat, crusts had to release cleanly and ingredients had to be measured correctly every time. Over the years, we found ways to make that happen without adding needless steps or relying on gadgets that took up space and did little else. Many of these techniques came from solving a problem in the bakery, where wasting a cake, a crust or a batch of dough was simply not an option.

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.

    Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies

    These are the baking tips and baking techniques I still rely on and share with home bakers because they work. Some are basic, such as using the tare/zero feature on a scale. Others, like spooning a crust before releasing it from the pan, may be new to you. There is also a quicker way to chop nuts and a much better way to roll cut out cookies. None of them are difficult. But each one can make your baking more accurate, less frustrating and, most importantly, give you a better finished product. They work well for seasoned bakers as well as for beginners including baking basics, how to avoid baking mistakes and baking troubleshooting.

    How to Bake a Flat Cake Layer

    Flat cake layers were essential at the bakery, especially when we were making wedding cakes. This simple pan prep gives you level layers without baking strips, leveling, or trimming. It is one of those techniques that makes a cake look better from the start. 

    How to Bake a Flat Cake or Cake Pan Prep

    View post 

    Food Processor Tips When Baking

    A food processor can be one of the most useful pieces of equipment in a baker's kitchen, but it needs to be used correctly. These tips show where it shines, from pastry to doughs and batters, and how it can save considerable time. I have used one throughout my career. 

    Food Processor Tips When Baking

    View post 

    How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter

    Curdled cake batter looks alarming when a beautifully creamed mixture suddenly separates into clumps. It is a common problem, particularly in butter cakes, but it is easily fixed. Understanding why it happens takes the mystery out of it and keeps the batter on track. 

    How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter

    View post 

    How to Make Lemon Curd

    Lemon curd is nectar for the gods and one of the easiest basic pastry techniques to make. This version is intensely flavored and firm enough to pipe or use in a tart that cuts cleanly. For a softer curd, simply omit the gelatin. 

    How to Make Lemon Curd

    View post 

    Spooning the Crust

    This is a small bakery technique that can save a cheesecake, lemon bar or other filled crust from a messy release. A filling can seep into the gap between the crust and pan, making it difficult to remove cleanly. Spooning the crust before or after baking or both solves that problem simply and effectively as it seals the crust to the side of the pan.

    Spooning the Crust

    View post 

    Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique

    Cut out cookies can be time consuming, especially when a soft dough sticks or distorts during transfer. This wax paper technique avoids excess flour on the cookies and makes rolling and cutting much easier. It is particularly helpful when you want neat, well-defined shapes. 

    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.

    View post 

    Weighing Ingredients Using the Tare/Zero on a Scale

    Weighing ingredients is key to getting the best outcome when baking, and the tare/zero feature makes it especially easy. You can add ingredients one after another to the same bowl accurately. It is a practical habit that saves dishes while keeping the measurements precise. 

    Weighing Ingredients Using the Tare/Zero on a Scale

    View post 

    Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

    Chopping nuts has never been one of my favorite baking chores. Buying them already chopped can be expensive, while a food processor can quickly turn them into powder. This quicker method gives you more control over the size and gets the job done with much less fuss. 

    Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

    View post 

    Three Easy Sugar Fixes

    I never want a recipe to stall because I am out of one particular sugar. In *Three Easy Sugar Fixes*, I share simple substitutions for common baking sugars, including how to make light or dark brown sugar with granulated sugar and molasses. These are practical fixes worth knowing when the pantry is not quite cooperating. 

    Three Easy Sugar Fixes

    View post 

    Freezing Heavy Cream On Tidbit Thursday

    Freezing Heavy Cream On Tidbit Thursday came out of a discussion in one of my Zoom classes about the difference between 40% cream and heavy cream. It is a simple, practical tip that can save leftover cream from going to waste and make it easier to keep on hand when you need it for baking. 

    Freezing Heavy Cream On Tidbit Thursday

    View post 

    Glazes For Baked Goods Pillowy Soft Dinner Rolls

    Glazes for Baked Goods shows how simple washes—milk, egg or water—change the color, shine and texture of breads, rolls and other baked goods. I break down what each glaze does before baking, so you can choose the finish you want instead of guessing at that beautiful, bakery-style crust. 

    Glazes For Baked Goods Pillowy Soft Dinner Rolls

    View post 

    Modern Meringue Made Easy

    In Modern Meringue Made Easy, I share the bakery method that eliminates the slow, fussy process of adding sugar a spoonful at a time. It is a thorough guide to making meringue for everything from cookies and cake layers to pie toppings, decorations and frosting, with the why behind each step so you can use it confidently. 

    Modern Meringue Made Easy

    View post 

    American Pie Crust Tutorial 2

    In my American Pie Crust From Scratch Tutorial, I walk through every step of making a flaky, dependable crust, from choosing ingredients to rolling, fitting and baking it. I explain the reasons behind the method so you can avoid common problems such as a crust that shrinks, slides down the pan or turns soggy under a juicy filling. It is a thorough guide with step-by-step photos for anyone who wants to feel more confident making pie dough. 

    American Pie Crust Tutorial 2

    View post 

    Pastry Cream

    Pastry Cream is one of the French pastry basics I rely on again and again, and it comes together on the stove in less than 30 minutes. This deep dive shows how milk, sugar, egg yolks and a thickener become a smooth, glossy vanilla filling for everything from éclairs and cream puffs to fruit tarts, Boston Cream Pie and more. But what thickener is used makes one that can be frozen and the most popular method not. We used it every time at the bakery.

    Pastry Cream

    View post 

    Double Panning Preventing Over Browning In The Oven

    Double Panning Preventing Over Browning In The Oven is one of the simplest fixes I know for protecting the bottoms of cookies, croissants and other buttery baked goods. By stacking one baking sheet on top of another, you create a little insulation that helps prevent overbrowning without changing the bake time or requiring special equipment. 

    Double Panning Preventing Over Browning In The Oven

    View post 

    I wanted to share these techniques as baking season is upon us because they will make baking easier and better for you.

    12 Bakery Bars and Brownies From My Shop to your Kitchen

    Modified: Oct 1, 2026 · Published: Oct 2, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    Spritz bars are easier than the cookies and every bit as good.

    Bars and brownies were always some of the most popular items at the bakery. They are easy to make, easy to cut, and can be dressed up or kept simple depending upon the occasion. Best of all, one pan makes enough to share, take to a picnic, serve for dessert, or keep on hand for when something sweet is needed. There is a little bit of everything here.

    Spritz bars are easier than the cookies and every bit as good.

    Spritz Bars - Easier than the Cookies

    The Spritz Bars are every bit as good as the cookies they just go together a lot faster.. For something quick, the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars fall into the ridiculously easy category. The Snickers Brownies are perfect for getting kids into the kitchen, and the Millionaires Shortbread are an old-fashioned favorite that never goes out of style. Love Samoa Cookies? I have a Samoa Bar- so simple!. Whether you like your brownies fudgy, spiced, swirled with cream cheese, or topped with a glaze, there is a recipe here for you. Make one once and I’m sure it will find its way onto your favorites list.

    Simple Samoa Bar Cookies

    Simple Samoa Bar Cookies give you all the flavor of the classic Girl Scout cookie without the fuss of shaping and assembling individual cookies. I love the melt-in-your-mouth shortbread crust, foolproof caramel loaded with toasted coconut, and chocolate-dipped bottoms—and each bar is the equivalent of at least two cookies. 

    Simple Samoa Bar Cookies

    View post

    Santa Fe Brownies

    These are one of the finest brownies I have ever made. We sold so many of these at the bakery that we often made 12 pans at a time, and sometimes had to do it twice in one day. The swirled brownie and cream cheese layers make them stand-out brownies indeed. 

    Santa Fe Brownies

    View post 

    Strawberry Brownies

    Looking for something a bit different in a brownie? These Strawberry Brownies are chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and packed with strawberry flavor from the buttercream and chocolate glaze. They slice cleanly, travel well, and are ideal for parties or just because. 

    Strawberry Brownies

    View post 

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews are an old-fashioned, peanut-lover’s treat that come together in minutes and disappear just as quickly. Whether you call them candy, bars, or cookies, their sweet-and-salty crunch makes them an easy choice when you need something homemade without spending all day in the kitchen. 

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    View post

    Mexican Chocolate Brownies

    These irresistible Mexican Chocolate Brownies are easy enough to make on the spur of the moment. Cinnamon and cayenne pepper add warmth and a kick of flavor to the deep chocolate brownie. Top them with the Hot Honey Ganache to take them to another level. 

    Mexican Chocolate Brownies

    View post 

    Updating Millionaires Shortbread

    Millionaire’s Shortbread is my updated take on the classic, indulgent combination of buttery shortbread, rich caramel, and chocolate. I added a crunchy element to the caramel, along with a touch of heat and salt in the chocolate, for a bar that feels familiar but tastes especially memorable. 

    Updating Millionaires Shortbread

    View post 

    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars

    These No Bake Peanut Butter Bars fall into the ridiculously easy category. A chocolatey crust, smooth and creamy peanut butter filling, and just-right chocolate top make these one of the best bars around. If you love Reese’s Peanut Butter Cups, this is a much better version you'll love. 

    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars

    View post 

    Spritz Bars Easier Than The Cookies

    Spritz Bars are my faster, easier take on classic Spritz cookies, with the same buttery flavor in a simple bar form. I dress them up with crunchy Swedish pearl sugar that stays bright white in the oven, then finish them with a drizzle of chocolate for a bakery-worthy treat. 

    Spritz Bars Easier Than The Cookies

    View post


    Cocoa Brownies In No Time Or A Little Time

    Cocoa Brownies In No Time Or A Little Time changed my mind about baking brownies with cocoa instead of melted chocolate. Instead of butter, the oil keeps the brownies moist and they go together in a snap!

    Cocoa Brownies In No Time Or A Little Time

    View post

    Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars

    These Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars deliver all the flavor of the classic cookie in a much simpler, slice-and-share form. I sandwich a jam, walnut, cinnamon, and sugar filling between two easy-to-roll pastry layers, and the filling can be changed up with any smooth jam and nut you like. 

    Quick Easy Versatile Rugelach Bars

    View post

    Spice Bars A Gift From Bourke Street Bakery Down Under


    These Spice Bars have a buttery, toffee-flavored base topped with a tender, moist spice cake that is surprisingly easy to make. I love that one mixture does double duty—press some into the pan, stir a few additional ingredients into the rest, and pour it over the top. Don’t let the generous pepper and spices scare you; they’re beautifully balanced in every bite. 

    Love Bars A Gift From Bourke Street Bakery Down Under

    View post

    Snickers Brownies

    Although really easy, these fudgy Snickers Brownies are sure to become a favorite. A whisk, a bowl, and a few measuring utensils yield a bonanza of brownies, making them great for getting kids into the kitchen. If you don't have a food processor, simply chop the candy bars by hand. 

    Snickers Brownies

    View post

    One last note. Cut the bars in half and the squares on the diagonal to have bite size treats or petit fours. We did it all the time at the bakery!

    Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake – Moist & Easy Fall Recipe

    Modified: Sep 27, 2026 · Published: Sep 29, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    A piece of the Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake sists on a white plate with a fork and a cup next to it and more pieces on a cooling rack behind it.

    This Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake is exactly what I would make at the bakery if I still had the bakery. Dark with pumpkin and streusel this deeply flavored, moist, easy, pumpkin coffee cake is loaded with the warm spices of fall with rivers of streusel running through it and on top. A maple glaze pulsl it all together.

    A piece of the Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake sists on a white plate with a fork and a cup next to it and more pieces on a cooling rack behind it.

    The idea came to me when I was thinking about posting just the pumpkin bread that one of my boys brought home from school over 40 years ago. The pumpkin bread is the basis for this very tall coffee cake that is sure to become one of your go to recipes for the fall. And it's actually even better the next day after all the flavors have a chance to meld together.

    Here are a few other coffee cakes perfect for breakfast, brunch or anytime of the day: Easily Made Raspberry Ripple Coffee Cake, Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake, Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake, and the Easier "Danish Pastry" Recipe

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why YOu'll Love This Coffee Cake

    • It's easy to make.
    • The reward is great.
    • Since it can be made the day ahead or frozen for longer storage, it's perfect for that something special to serve when you don't have time.
    • It screams "Fall" and make me.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Streusel

    Ingredients for the streusel are brown sugar, all-purpose flour, old fashioned oats, cinnamon and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, unsalted butter, old fashioned oats

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, brown sugar

    Pumpkin Coffee Cake

    The Pumpkin Coffee Cake ingredients are granulated sugar, canola oil, eggs, canned pumpkin, salt, baking soda, baking powder, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, all-purpose flour, and chopped pecans

    FRONT ROW: Salt, nutmeg, baking soda

    SECCOND ROW: Cloves, baking powder, cinnamon

    THIRD ROW: Granulated sugar, chopped pecans

    BACK ROW: Canola or vegetable oil, pumpkin, all-purpose flour

    Maple Glaze

    The ingredients for the maple glaze are powdered sugar, pure maple syrup, and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW; Powdered sugar, pure maple syrup

    Key Ingredients

    • For the streusel I use cake flour to keep the streusel soft. All-purpose flour flour can be substituted but the texture will not be the same.
    • Either dark or light brown sugar can be used.
    • Old Fashioned Oats have more flavor and hold together better than the quick oats.
    • Either canola or vegetable oil can be used.
    • Look for cans that say pure pumpkin .
    • All-purpose flour is used for the coffee cake.
    • Pure maple syrup is called for. It is not the same as pancake syrup.

    HOw to get a shiny glaze

    When making a powdered sugar based glaze for cookies, cakes, coffee cakes, etc. the liquid to dilute it determines how shiny the glaze will dry. There are 4 basic liquids to add to the powdered sugar. Let's take a look at them.

    Water will produce the dullest glaze when dried. It's flat and not attractive.

    Milk is better and usually dries with a shine.

    Cream will give you the shiniest glaze hands down.

    Fruit juice is hit or miss. I use straight lemon juice for the best flavor in some of my glazes. I have no idea why it sometimes shines and sometimes doesn't. But it always tastes good.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Streusel

    This collage shows the streusel being made with the dry ingredients combined in a mixing bowl, mixed together, the cold butter added and the crumbs made

    Step 1. Combine the brown sugar, all-purpose flour, old fashioned oats, and cinnamon in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Mix briefly to blend the ingredients. Step 3. Add the cold, cut up butter to the mixing bowl. Step 4. Mix on low to medium until crumbs form. This may take 3 to 4 minutes. Towards the end the speed can be raised higher but be careful not to over-beat and make a paste. Refrigerate while making the coffee cake.

    The Pumpkin coffee Cake

    This collage shows the coffee cake being made by combining the  oil and sugar in a mixing bowl, mixed briefly, the eggs added and everything combined.

    Step 5. Add the granulated sugar and oil to a mixing bowl. Step 6. Mix briefly the blend. It may not blend completely but it will in the next step. Step 7. Add the eggs. Step 8. Beat on medium to bring it all together.

    This collages shows the spices, baking powder and baking soda added to the egg mixture.

    Step 9. Add the spices, baking powder, baking soda and salt to the egg mixture. Step 10. Mix to thoroughly combine everything. Step 11. Add the flour and mix completely. Step 12. Add the pumpkin mixing well.

    After the pumpkin has been added, add the nut, pour it into the prepared pan and bake as directed.

    Step 13. Add the nuts. Step 14. Beat briefly to mix the nuts into the batter. Step 15. Pour half the batter (about 650 grams) into the prepared pan and distribute half of the streusel (about 230 grams) over the batter. Top with the remaining batter and add the rest of the streusel on top. Step 16. Bake as directed.

    Maple Glaze

    The last collages shows a jug of pure maple, all  the ingredients for the maple lage in a bowl, mixed and drizzled onto the baked Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake.

    Step 17. This is a jug of pure maple syrup. It can be found in grocery stores as well as Aldi's. Step 18. Place all of the ingredients in a medium size bowl stir with a spoon to bring it together. Don't use a whisk as air bubbles may form. If it is too thick, thin it with a teaspoon of milk at a time. Step 20. Drizzle it over the coffee cake.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can I make this Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake ahead of time?

    Yes, the flavors are even better after a day or it can be frozen up to a couple of months.

    Why are pumpkin coffee cakes so moist?

    It's all about the pumpkin and oil. The pumpkin adds moisture as does any puree in a cake or coffee cake and the oil keeps any cake moist because it is a liquid. Butter cakes or coffee cakes tend to dry out much faster since it is semisolid at room temperature.

    Why is pumpkin coffee cake dense?

    Like most recipes made with a puree and oil as its fat, it will be more dense. Oil and sugar do no cream so no air is added to the mixture. Dense is not a problem as long as it is moist.

    Expert tips

    • Make sure to use real pumpkin and not pumpkin pie filling.
    • Pure maple syrup has a different taste and texture than pancake syrup so don't confuse the two.
    • There is a lot of streusel in this coffee cake It can be reduced by half if you wish
    • Use old fashioned oats and not quick oats which have a different texture and are softer.
    • This is a tall, rich coffee cake so i cut mine it into 12 pieces.
    • Making this a day ahead, cooling and covering as it helps the flavors blend.
    A piece of the Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake sists on a white plate with a fork and a cup next to it and more pieces on a cooling rack behind it.

    More bake Worthy Coffee Cakes

    • Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake with cranberries and cinnamon sticks
      Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
    • Cuccidati Coffeecake
      Cuccidati Coffeecake
    • Pina Colada Coffeecake
    • A piece of the New York Crumb cake on a plate with a stack in the background.
      New York Style Crumb Cake

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A piece of the Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake sists on a white plate with a fork and a cup next to it and more pieces on a cooling rack behind it.

    Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake – Moist Easy Fall Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Pumpkin Streusel Coffee Cake is exactly what I would make at the bakery. Dark with pumpkin and streusel this deeply flavored, moist easy, pumpkin coffee cake is loaded with the warm spices of fall with rivers of streusel running through it and on top. A maple glaze pulls it all together.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
    Course Coffee Cake, Pumpkin Coffee Cake, Streusel Coffee Cake
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 641 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9"x 9"x 2" baking pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Streusel

    • 1 cup brown sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 cup cake flour (125 grams)
    • 1/2 cup old fashioned oats (40 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter, cold (114 grams or 1 stick)

    Pumpkin Coffee Cake

    • 1 1/2 cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
    • 3/4 cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 3 large eggs
    • 1 1/2 cups canned pumpkin (340 grams)
    • 3/4 teaspoon salt
    • 3/4 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/2 teaspoon baking powder
    • 3/4 teaspoon cloves
    • 3/4 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 3/4 teaspoon nutmeg
    • 2 1/4 cups all-purpose flour (315 grams)
    • 1/2 cups chopped pecans (60 grams), optional

    Maple Glaze

    • 1 cup powdered sugar (130 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons pure maple syrup
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (58 grams)
    • milk as needed

    Instructions
     

    Streusel

    • Place the brown sugar, all-purpose flour, oats and cinnamon in the bowl of a mixer. Mix together briefly to combine.
    • Cut the cold butter into pieces and add to the dry ingredients. Mix on medium until crumbs form. This may take 3 or 4 minutes. Refrigerate while preparing the coffee cake.

    Pumpkin Coffee Cake

    • Line a 9"x9"x2" square pan with parchment paper leaving an overhang on two sides. Spray the paper and sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Preheat the oven to 325°F.
    • Beat the sugar and oil until combined. There may be some oil unincorporated - that's fine.
    • Add the eggs and mix until everything is blended.
    • Add the spices, salt, baking soda and baking powder to the egg mixture, Mix on low to incorporate everything.
    • Mix in the flour and then the pumpkin, scraping down as necessary.
    • Add the nuts, and finish mixing everything together.
    • Place half of the batter (about 650 grams) in the prepared pan. Top with half the streusel (about 230 grams). Repeat with the remaining batter and streusel.
    • Bake for 60 to 70 minutes until a tester comes out clean. Cool completely on a rack. Lift out of the pan with the aid of the overhanging parchment.

    Maple Glaze

    • Combine all of the ingredients in a bowl. Stir them together vigorously until smooth. The glaze will probably be too thick. Thin with milk a teaspoon at a time until thin enough for a thick drizzle.
    • Drizzle over the coffee cake and allow to set up if serving the same day. If holding for a day for the flavors to meld, cover the coffee cake without the glaze. Glaze the next day.
    • The finished coffee cake can be stored, covered, for several days or frozen for longer storage. If freezing, freeze until hard, then wrap well in foil and freeze for up to 2 months. To thaw: unwrap and thaw in the refrigerator, then serve at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________
    For the streusel I use cake flour to keep the streusel soft. All-purpose flour flour can be substituted but the texture will not be the same.
    Either dark or light brown sugar can be used.
    Old Fashioned Oats have more flavor and hold together better than the quick oats. 
    Either canola or vegetable oil can be used..
    All-purpose flour is used for the coffee cake
    Make sure to use real pumpkin and not pumpkin pie filling.
    Pure maple syrup has a different taste and texture than pancake syrup so don't confuse the two.
    There is a lot of streusel in this coffee cake It can be reduced by half if you wish
    This is a tall, rich coffee cake so i cut mine it into 12 pieces.
    Making this a day ahead, cooling and covering it helps the flavors blend.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 641kcalCarbohydrates: 88gProtein: 6gFat: 31gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 259mgPotassium: 189mgFiber: 3gSugar: 57gVitamin A: 5190IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 62mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Traditional German Chocolate Cake

    Modified: Sep 21, 2026 · Published: Sep 22, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    A slice of the Traditional German Chocolate Cake sits on a white lace edged plate with the whole cake behind it and a server on the side.

    Some things shouldn't be changed or at least not dramatically. This Traditional German Chocolate Cake is one of them. It's one of the original naked cakes. A simple old fashioned cake with an irresistible custard filling chock full of pecans and coconut. This tall, elegant, perfect cake is just begging to be in your rotation.

    A slice of the Traditional German Chocolate Cake sits on a white lace edged plate with the whole cake behind it and a server on the side.

    And you can't make just any chocolate cake. This cake has a particular recipe for both the cake and the filling and anything else isn't a true German Chocolate Cake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    So What Makes it a German Chocolate Cake?

    The short answer is the chocolate. It's a special semisweet chocolate that bakes up into a light chocolate cake. The second thing is the filling. A simple, not too sweet combination of eggs, evaporated milk, sugar, vanilla, lots of pecans and coconut. It's important to use evaporated milk not condensed milk.

    What's the difference between evaporated and condensed Milk?

    They are both condensed. in other words, they have been heated to evaporate about 40% to 60% of the water. Then their paths diverge.

    Evaporated Milk is finished after it has been heated and the water reduced by about 60% resulting in a beige milk that is slightly thickened. It has no added sugar. Evaporated milk is usually used in savory dishes but can be found in sweet recipes as well as seen in this filling.

    Condensed Milk which is usually labeled sweetened condensed milk, contains about 40 to 45% sugar which sweetens the milk and also acts as a natural preservative. The color is also a lighter beige, it's syrupy and much thicker. Condensed milk is used mostly in rich desserts, baked goods, fudge, pie fillings (like key lime pie), and sweet drinks like iced coffee or Vietnamese coffee. This milk can also be used to make homemade dulce de leche.

    Are they interchangeable? No they are not. Both the texture and taste will be radically different in whatever recipe is used. Savory dishes become sweet and sweet dishes become savory. Neither is very appetizing sounding.

    All Nuts don't weigh the same

    In the fall when fresh nuts come on the market, I buy several bags and freeze them. They are usually in halves or large pieces.

    When it comes to measuring nuts, weighing is definitely the best option. If a recipe calls for "nuts chopped" or "chopped nuts" there can be a big discrepancy between the weight of halves and chopped. Nut halves or whole nuts will weigh less in a cup than "chopped nuts" or "nut pieces" because not as many fit in a cup due to their size as do chopped nuts which are smaller. It's a distinction worth noting.

    For instance, in the filling recipe it calls for 1 1/2 cups chopped pecans. If you weigh 1 1/2 cups of pecan halves they weigh 180 grams. 1 1/2 cups of chopped pecans weigh 255 grams So you can see there is a plus 75 gram difference when chopping the nuts.

    Is This cake from Germany?

    Nope! It is very American. In 1852, Samuel German developed the sweet baking chocolate bar for the Baker's Chocolate Company. In order to honor him it was named Baker's German's Sweet Chocolate.

    However, the cake wasn't created until 1957 when Mrs. George Clay of Dallas, Texas made a cake using the German's Sweet Chocolate. It was submitted to the Dallas Morning News and it was published on June 13, 1957 as German's Chocolate Cake.

    If you don't use Baker's German's Chocolate (the semisweet version), it won't be the same. The chocolate is a tad sweeter than most semisweet chocolate and is easily found in grocery stores.

    Reasons to Love This Cake

    • It's a classic - so it has to be delicious or it wouldn't have lasted this long.
    • It's relatively easy to to make and the reward is great.
    • The light chocolate cake does require beaten egg whites but I'm going to show you an easy way to do that.
    • The pecan and coconut filling and topping is so easy to make.
    • To be really truthful, I can eat the filling by the spoonful which means I can't be around it as it cools.
    • Last but definitely not least, it isn't frosted in any way. How easy is that?

    Recipe Ingredients

    German Chocolate Cake

    Ingredients for the Traditional German Chocolate Cake are Baker's German's Chocolate, boiling water, unsalted butter, granulated sugar, eggs, vanilla, cake flour, baking soda, baking powder, salt, sour cream

    FRONT ROW; baking soda,baking powder, vanilla extract, salt

    SECOND ROW: Egg yolks, Baker's German's Chocolate

    THIRD ROW: Unsalted Butter, egg whites, water

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, sour cream, cake flour

    Pecan and Coconut Filling

    Filling ingredients include evaporated milk, granulated sugar, egg yolks, unsalted butter, vanilla, coconut, and pecans.

    FRONT ROW: Egg yolks, vanilla extract

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, toasted pecans

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, evaporated milk, coconut

    Important Ingredients

    • Cake Flour is used for the tenderness it brings to cakes.
    • Sour Cream is used in this recipe although buttermilk can be substituted as it was originally used.
    • Baker's German's Chocolate is important for the lightly chocolate cake which doesn't overpower the coconut pecan filling.
    • Evaporated Milk is used in the filling not to be confused with sweetened condensed milk which is a different product.
    • Toasting the pecans deepens the flavor of the nuts.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step instructions

    The first collage for the German Chocolate Cake includes the wrapper for the Baker's German's Chocolate, the chocolate cut up, then melted and lumps of cake flour in a strainer.

    Step 1. The Baker's German's Semisweet Chocolate wrapper. This can be found in most grocery stores. Step 2. Chop the chocolate to make it easier to melt. Step 3. Combine the water and chocolate. Microwave on half power or place over low heat to melt the chocolate, stirring constantly and being careful not to burn it. Step 4. Sift the cake flour, baking powder and baking soda together. Sifting the cake flour ensures there will be no lumps which often go unmixed in the batter.

    This collages shows the sifted flour, the butter, sugar and vanilla in the mixing bowl,, then mixed and the egg yolks added.

    Step 5. Sift the flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt together over waxed paper or parchment paper and set aside. Step 6. Place the granulated sugar, softened butter and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 7. Beat until light in color and texture. Step 8. Add the egg yolks.

    This collage shows the butter/sugar mixture creamed, the chocolate added and the first addition of flour.

    Step 9.Mix them together until blended. If they curdle don't worry. See my post on How to Avoid Crudled Cake Batter. Step 10. Add the melted and cooled chocolate. Step 11. Mix until everything is completely combined. Step 12. Add the first addition of flour. Always start and end with flour. Three addiotns of flour and two of sour cream is fine.

    The first addition of flour is mixed in, the first addition of sour cream is in, the egg whites and sugar are shown in a mixing bowl and then they are beaten.

    Step 13. Beat the flour in, Step 14. Add the first addition of sour cream and mix. Continue with two more additions of flour and one more of sour cream. Step 15. Add the egg whites and all of the sugar into a clean mixing bowl. (This is one of the reasons I love my Breville - you get a glass bowl and a stainless steel bowl with the mixer.) Step 16. Start beating on low until the sugar and whites are blended, then move to medium and finally to high. The whites should be a medium texture - not so soft they don't hold together but not so tight they make stiff peaks. In the photo above, you can see the peaks falling over somewhat. If in doubt, stop before they hold straight up peaks as the meringue will be difficult to fold in smoothly.

    This collage shows the meringue added to the cake batter and completely folded in, the batter divided between the 3 pans and baked.

    Step 17. Add the meringue to the cake batter. Step 18. Fold in until the two are fully combined. Step 19. Divide between the prepared pans. Step 20. Bake as directed, cool and turn out of the pans. At this point, I suggest freezing them even if they are to be filled the same day. The layers are tender and filling them, partially or fully frozen makes it easier to fill them without damaging the tops.

    This collage shows the filling being made with the egg yolks, sugar, butter and evaporated milk in a saucepan whisked together, the butter added, the custard made and the coconut and pecans added.

    Step 25. Whisk together the evaporated milk, sugar, yolks and butter in a saucepan. Step 26. Cut the butter into about 8 pieces and add them to the saucepan. Step 27. Place over low to medium low heat and, stirring constantly, heat until it thickens. Do not bring it to a boil or the yolks may curdle. Step 28. Take the saucepan off the heat and add the vanilla, coconut and pecans. Cool. Place in a storage container and refrigerate if not using immediately.

    The final collage shows the final filling being used to top the cake and spread out, then the edge wrapped in plastic warp and the cake cut showing the left side cut straight down and the right sided cut with a sawing motion.

    Step 29. Place the last of the filling on the top layer of the cake. Step 30. Spread it evenly as was done on the two layer layers. Step 31. This is what is referred to as an afterthought. I forgot to show you how to wrap the cake edges before I cut it for the photos. Take a long piece of plastic wrap and wrap the edges of the cake to prevent them from drying out since the have no finish on them. Step 32. I hope you can see the difference in the two ways the cake was cut. On the left, the layers are raggy because I cut straight down on them. On the right side, they are smooth and prettier because I used a sawing motion which didn't tear the layers.

    A slice of the Traditional German Chocolate Cake sits on a white lace edged plate with the whole cake behind it and a server on the side.

    Recipe Faq's

    What makes German Chocolate Cake different from regular chocolate cake?

    Traditional German Chocolate Cake is made with sweet baking chocolate rather than cocoa powder and is known for its tender, lighter chocolate crumb. Its signature feature is the rich coconut-pecan frosting layered between and over the cake.

    Can a German Chocolate Cake be made ahead?

    Absolutely. The cake layers can me made, frozen, well wrapped in foil and frozen for up to 3 months. The filling can be made several days ahead and refrigerated. Partially thaw, fill and top with the coconut pecan filling.

    Can a German Chocolate Cake be frozen when completed?

    Yes it can. Freeze the cake until hard, then wrap it first in plastic wrap and then in foil. Store for up to 2 months in the freezer. Thaw, still wrapped in the fridge overnight. Serve at room temperature.

    Expert Tips

    • Sift the flour with the baking powder and baking soda and salt. Because the cake flour is so soft, it can lump up and these often don't want to mix well in the batter. Better to be safe than sorry.
    • Cake flour is important to the texture of the cake.
    • Baker's German's Chocolate is a sweetened semisweet chocolate that is sweeter than most and important to this old fashioned cake. It also differs as it is lower in cocoa butter than most semisweet chocolates.
    • Make sure the chocolate is cooled before adding it to the creamed mixture.
    • Don't over beat the egg whites. They can be difficult to fold in smoothly without deflating them. It is better to under beat slightly. While the ideal peaks are medium which are between soft and stiff, it is better to go with soft than stiff.
    • The initial mixture for the filling is more of a loose custard and as such, keep the heat no higher than medium low to medium. Stir constantly to avoid burning. The mixture should thicken just prior to boiling. If cooked too long the egg yolks can curdle.
    • I have used sour cream for the cake instead of the traditional buttermilk as it makes the cake layers less crumbly when cut. Either may be used.
    • I have also increased the amount of filling between the layers just because it's so very good.

    Looking for Special Cakes? They're Here!

    • A slice of Boston Cream Pie on a plate with cups of tea in the background,
      Boston Cream Pie - A Parts Cake
    • The finished Coconut Cream Cake sits on a gray plate with a flower vase in the background ready to be cut.
      Coconut Cream Cake - The Perfect Easter Dessert
    • Three layers of chocolate cake, white chocolate mousse,dark chocolate mousse and a chocolate glaze sit on an old fashioned cut glass tray.
      Exceptional Tuxedo Cake
    • Lemon Meringue Cake
      Lemon Meringue Cake

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Traditional German Chocolate Cake sits on a white lace edged plate with the whole cake behind it and a server on the side.

    Tradtional German Chocolate Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Some things shouldn't be changed or at least not dramatically. This Traditional German Chocolate Cake is one of them. A simple old fashioned cake with an irresistible custardy filling and topping of coconut and pecans.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 40 minutes mins
    Course German Chocolate Cake,, Old Fashioned Cake
    Servings 16 servings
    Calories 752 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 9"x2" round cake pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    German Chocolate Cake

    • 4 ounces Baker's German's Semisweet Chocolate (114 grams)
    • 1/2 cup water
    • 1 cup unsalted butter, softened (225 grams)
    • 2 cups granulated sugar, divided (400 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 4 large eggs, separated
    • 2 1/2 cups + 2 tablespoons cake flour (275 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/2 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)

    Pecan and Coconut Filling and Topping

    • 1 1/2 cups chopped pecans (255 grams)
    • 3/4 cup unsalted butter (170 grams or 1 1/2 sticks)
    • 1 1/2 cups evaporated milk (14 ounce can)
    • 1 1/2 cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
    • 5 large egg yolks
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 2 cups sweetened shredded coconut, lightly packed (170 grams)

    Instructions
     

    German Chocolate Cake

    • Spray the center of the 9"x2"pans only. Line them with parchment paper rounds. Spray only the center of the rounds. Do not spray the sides. See my post on How to Bake a Flat Cake or Cake Pan Prep.
    • Sift the flour along with the baking powder, baking soda and salt. Set aside.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Chop the chocolate coarsely and combine with the water. Microwave on half power to melt the chocolate. Cool completely.
    • Cream the butter, vanilla, and 1 1/2 cups granulated sugar (300 grams) until pale in color and fluffy.
    • Add the egg yolks and beating to mix in until blended and smooth.
    • Alternate adding three additions of flour and two of sour cream starting and ending with the flour.
    • In a clean bowl, beat the egg whites and the remaining 1/2 cup (100 grams) of sugar until medium stiff peaks form.
    • Gently fold these into the cake batter. Divide equally among the three prepared pans (about 450 grams per pan).
    • Bake for 22 to 25 minutes or until lightly browned and a cake tester comes out clean. Cool.
    • To release the cakes, use a small metal spatula and go around the inside edges of the cake pan. Make sure you can feel the side of the pan as you go around. Place a cake board on top of the cake pan, flip the cake out, remove the paper and flip it back over. See my How to Bake a Flat Cake or Cake Pan Prep for photos.
    • To make filling the layers easier, freeze the layers partially if filling immediately or they may be frozen, wrapped well and kept for 3 months. Partially thaw to fill.

    Pecan and Coconut Filling and Topping

    • Toast the pecans in a 350°F oven until fragrant and slightly brown. Cool. Set aside.
    • Cut the butter into smaller pieces. Combine the butter, evaporated milk, sugar, and egg yolks in a medium size saucepan. Cook and stir over medium heat until thickened. It will not be super thickened but definitely thicker - about 12 to 15 minutes. Do not let it boil or the egg yolks may curddle.
    • Remove from the heat and add the vanilla, coconut and pecans. Let come to room temperature and then chill until spreadable if using immediately or refrigerate for several days.

    Assembly

    • If the filling has been refrigerated it will be very stiff. Microwave it slightly until it is spreadable but not completely soft.or leave it at room temperature.
    • Place one layer on a cake board or serving plate and spread about 1 1/2 cups or about 335 grams of the filling evenly over the cake right up to the edge and just a little past. Repeat with the next to layers of cake and filling.
    • The cake can be served at once, refrigerated or frozen. If refrigerating or freezing, wrap the sides in a double thickness of plastic wrap so the sides don't dry out since there is no frosting or covering on them. If freezing, freeze the cake until hard and then wrap in foil and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight.
    • To serve: Room temperature to serve for the best flavor. Store leftovers in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________
    Cake Flour is used for the tenderness it brings to cakes.
    Evaporated Milk is used in the filling not to be confused with sweetened condensed milk which is a different product.
    Toasting the pecans deepens the flavor of the nuts.
    Sift the flour with the baking powder and baking soda. Because the cake flour is so soft, it can lump up and these often don't want to mix well in the batter. Better to be safe than sorry.
    Baker's German's Chocolate is a sweetened semisweet chocolate that is sweeter than most and important to this old fashioned cake. It also differs as it is lower in cocoa butter than most semisweet chocolates. It doesn’t overpower the pecan coconut filling.
    Make sure the chocolate is cooled before adding it to the creamed mixture. 
    Don't over beat the egg whites. They can be difficult to fold in smoothly without deflating them. It is better to under beat slightly. While the ideal peaks are medium which are between soft and stiff, it is better to go with soft than stiff..
    The initial mixture for the filling is more of a loose custard and as such, keep the heat no higher than medium low to medium. Stir constantly to avoid burning. The mixture should thicken just prior to boiling. If cooked too long the egg yolks can curdle. 
    I have used sour cream for the cake instead of the traditional buttermilk as it makes the cake layers less crumbly when cut. Either may be used.
    I have also increased the amount filling between the layers just because it's so very good.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16servingsCalories: 752kcalCarbohydrates: 86gProtein: 11gFat: 42gSaturated Fat: 22gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 173mgSodium: 239mgPotassium: 279mgFiber: 3gSugar: 55gVitamin A: 921IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 123mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Bake Once, Breakfast All Week: My Best Freezer-Friendly Muffins

    Modified: Sep 15, 2026 · Published: Sep 15, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    After more than 25 years of owning a professional bakery, I can tell you with complete confidence that truly spectacular muffins don't require fancy equipment or complicated techniques. A bowl, a whisk, and a few measuring utensils — that's really all it takes.

    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins

    What I love most about a great muffin, though, is how beautifully it freezes. Weekday mornings can be chaotic, and having a stash of bakery-style muffins at the ready is an absolute lifesaver. I always recommend baking a double batch on the weekend. Once they cool completely, freeze them hard then wrap them well and pop them in the freezer. A quick warm-up in the oven and you've got a warm, tender muffin that tastes like it just came out of the pan.

    Whether you're after something bursting with fresh fruit, swirled with jam, loaded with chocolate, or crowned with a crunchy streusel, there is something here for every craving imaginable. These are the muffins I make again and again in my own kitchen — and once you try them, I think you'll understand why.

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    If you're looking for soft, tender cinnamon muffins that taste like they came straight from a bakery case, there's no need to look any further. The pockets of melted cinnamon chips freeze perfectly, and a quick warm-up in the oven brings them right back to life. These are a weekend baking project that pays dividends all week long. 

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    View post 

    Blueberry Crumb Muffins

    Topped with a Brown Sugar Almond Crumb, these are easily one of the best muffins you'll ever make — and one of the easiest. I prefer wild blueberries here, and because they're mostly sold frozen, they go straight from the bag into the batter and into the freezer after baking without missing a beat. Pull one out on a busy Tuesday and it's like having a little slice of summer for breakfast. 

    Blueberry Crumb Muffins

    View post 

    Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

    This is my riff on the Olympic chocolate muffin that took Paris by storm, and it is deeply chocolatey with a truffle center that is nothing short of spectacular. No mixer is needed and it comes together in literally minutes, making a big freezer batch entirely realistic. Warm one up on a weekday morning when you need a little extra motivation to get going. 

    Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

    View post 

    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

    Lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping make this one of the best muffins around — and what makes it even more attractive is that the topping remains just as crisp and crunchy after freezing as when it came from the oven. That crunchy sugar topping alone is worth the entire muffin. I always keep a stash of these in the freezer for exactly that reason. 

    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

    View post 

    Best of All Strawberry Muffins

    Fresh strawberries are used two ways here — pureed into the batter to intensify the flavor and folded in as chunks for a burst of sweet-tart goodness. A full pound of this summertime fruit goes into each batch, so be sure to pick the ripest ones you can find. They freeze beautifully, locking in that vibrant flavor so you can enjoy a taste of summer even in the dead of winter. 

    Best of All Strawberry Muffins

    View post 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    Two bowls, a whisk, and a rubber spatula are all that are needed to pull these together — combine, plop them in the cups, and into the oven they go. Perfect for breakfast, brunch, or anytime of the day, and they freeze well. What more can you ask of a muffin? 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    View post 

    Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

    You don't have to be a kid to love peanut butter and jelly — no matter your age, these satisfy that craving completely. Use a thick jam so it stays put in the heat of the oven, and it will hold up just as well in the freezer. Simple pantry ingredients, no mixer, and a result that is hard to beat on a busy weekday morning. 

    Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

    View post 

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    Cranberries and orange are a natural team, and nowhere do they shine better than in these vibrant, flavor-packed muffins. One of my most favorite things about fall is cranberries arriving around the middle of October, and this is a perfect recipe to celebrate them. Freeze a big batch and you'll have a bright, zesty wake-up call ready for any weekday morning. 

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    View post 

    Best Banana Streusel Muffin Recipe

    Ok, I'm bragging a little — but these really are sure to become a favorite. A simple pecan and brown sugar streusel tops a tender banana muffin for a treat that feels far more special than the effort required. Bananas keep baked goods wonderfully moist, which means these hold up in the freezer without ever drying out. 

    Best Banana Streusel Muffin Recipe

    View post 

    Cranberry Muffins Recipe

    Quick to make and celebrating the season with their vibrant color and tart taste, these are an absolute staple in my kitchen. I use frozen cranberries to keep them in large pieces and prevent the batter from going gray — which also makes them ideal candidates for the freezer. Grab one on a busy morning and breakfast is handled. 

    Cranberry Muffins Recipe

    View post 

    Stay tuned for more Fall recipes sure to get you into the kitchen!

    From the Bakery to Your Kitchen: 9 Apple Pastries Worth the Season

    Modified: Sep 9, 2026 · Published: Sep 10, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    After more than 25 years of running a bakery, I can tell you that apple season is not just a moment on the calendar — it's a feeling, and it smells like brown sugar, warm spices, and buttery pastry.

    Apple Cake Doughnuts on a plate with a napkin in the background.

    Apple Cake Doughnuts

    Over the years, my clientele taught me what they loved most, and apples were always at the top of the list. Not just any apple dessert, mind you, but ones with a little something extra. A cinnamon bun topping where a plain crust used to be. A whiskey-spiked sauce where you'd least expect it. A hand pie that mimics puff pastry without a single butter block in sight.

    These nine recipes represent the very best of what apple season can be. Some are rustic and comforting, some are elegant enough for a dinner party, and all of them will make your home smell absolutely wonderful. I hope they find a permanent place in your fall baking rotation.

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    This Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake is a dream for anyone who secretly eats around the cake just to get to the crumbs — and here, you never have to. A river of cinnamon apples runs through a sour cream cake that stays tender for days, all under a crumb topping so generous it nearly matches the cake layer for layer. It is the kind of thing you pull out on a slow fall morning and feel very good about yourself for having made. 

    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake

    View post 

    Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie

    I first spotted this idea on King Arthur's site and was immediately intrigued by that cinnamon bun top crust. It is a wonderfully fun way to finish a classic apple pie, and the result is as impressive to look at as it is to eat. October and apple picking season could not ask for a better tribute. 

    Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie

    View post 

    Apple Caramel Hand Pies

    These feature my Amazing Pastry Dough, which mimics puff pastry without any of the fuss — no butter blocks, no breaking through, no worries. Sweet apples and chewy caramels tucked inside a shatteringly flaky pastry make for the most satisfying grab-and-go treat of the season. With apple season just around the corner, what could be better? 

    Apple Caramel Hand Pies

    View post 

    Irish Apple Cake

    This wonderfully moist cake is simplicity itself to make, and the reward is great. Packed with Granny Smith apples and topped with a streusel that adds one more layer of flavor, it is not too sweet and not too fussy. We especially loved it in the morning with a cup of tea — a perfect snack cake for any time of day. 

    Irish Apple Cake dusted with powdered sugar on a white and green tray

    View post 

    Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice

    Warm, crisp, and ready in about 30 minutes — these are sure to become a fall favorite. I use beer in the batter for a lighter fritter with a bit more lift, and the Speculaas spice gives them a depth that cinnamon alone simply cannot match. They come together with just a bowl, a whisk, and a few pantry staples. 

    Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice

    View post 

    Cake Doughnuts An Easy Treat

    These Apple Cake Doughnuts are baked, not fried, which means you get a light and airy treat with a lot less mess and a lot more likelihood of actually making them on a weekday morning. Applesauce and oil keep them tender for days — four days uncovered, according to the baker herself, which is the kind of staying power that makes a recipe worth keeping. A roll through cinnamon sugar at the end gives them just the right sparkle for apple season. 

    Cake Doughnuts An Easy Treat

    View post

    Apple Crisp Cheesecake

    This Apple Crisp Cheesecake is what happens when you refuse to choose between two of fall's greatest desserts and simply make both at once. A graham cracker crust, creamy cheesecake, and spiced apple filling are all crowned with an oat, walnut, brown sugar, and cinnamon crisp — and the whole thing comes together without a water bath, which alone makes it worth bookmarking. It freezes beautifully too, so you can get a head start before the holiday chaos begins. 

    Apple Crisp Cheesecake

    View post

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    What if I told you this cake comes together in about 20 minutes, with no apples to peel, core, or slice? A secret ingredient carries all that rich apple flavor, and warm fall spices do the rest. Finished with a Caramel Cream Cheese Frosting, this is sure to be your newest fall cake. 

    Apple Spice Bundt Cake

    View post

    Traditional Apple Strudel

    I grew up watching my mother and grandmother pull strudel dough so thin you could read a newspaper through it — my job was to sweep up the thin shards that flaked off as it was folded. These days I use frozen phyllo, and I honestly cannot see any advantage to doing otherwise. Filled with spiced apples and baked until golden, it is a nostalgic bake I return to every single fall. 

    Traditional Apple Strudel

    View post 

    I don't know about you but fall is my favorite time of year and I welcome the apples, pumpkin, spices and the upcoming holidays. I have a lot to share with you and look forward to doing so.

    Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Recipe

    Modified: Sep 7, 2026 · Published: Sep 8, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    The Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread sits on a cream colored tray with an apple, apple butter, and cinnamon sticks in the background.

    This Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Recipe comes to you thanks to a magazine article I saw. I loved the way it was put together in slices rather than balls. And the combination of a simple yeast dough, covered with apple butter, brown sugar and grated apples is the crowning touch.

    The Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread sits on a cream colored tray with an apple, apple butter, and cinnamon sticks in the background.

    I have to be really honest and tell you this is a mess to put together. But it is so worth it. Wait till you taste it. I substituted apple butter for the usual butter in these types of sweet breads then added grated apples to intensify the apple taste. The only caveats here is to make sure the apple butter is thick and just before adding the apples to squeeze all of the liquid from the apples. I used the Reinneck Ranch Apple Butter. My usual one hadn't hit the market yet.

    Looking for a few more sweet breads or rolls, well, here they are: Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls, 60 Second Brioche Anyone Can Make, Swedish Cardamom Sweet Rolls and Cinnamon Raisin Bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's Not to love about this recipe

    • It's actually easy to make as you will see in the photos below.
    • For the yeast dough you simply mix the dry ingredients, add the wet ones and beat for about 4 minutes.
    • While I already told you it is a bit messy to shape and finish, it's not difficult
    • The dough is a dream to work with if you refrigerate it overnight.
    • It doesn't spring back when you roll it out.
    • Spread the apple butter, then top with the brown sugar and spice followed by the grated apples
    • Cut and stack - that's it!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Dough

    Ingredients for the Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread are milk ,insant yeast, egg, unsalted butter, salt and all-purpose flour.

    FRONT ROW: Instant yeast, salt

    MIDDLER ROW: Honey, unsalted butter,egg

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, milk

    Apple Filling

    Ingredients for the apple filling are Granny Smith apples, brown sugar, apple butter, shredded apples, cardamom

    FRONT ROW: Cardamom (or cinnamon), apple butter

    BACK ROW: Granny Smith apples, brown sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the
Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread shows the milk, honey and butter in a small saucepan, heated to melt the butter and honey, the egg added and finally the instant yeast.

    Step 1. Place the milk, honey and butter in a small saucepan and heat just until the butter and honey are melted. Step 2. Remove from the heat. Cool to lukewarm.Step 3. Whisk in the egg. Step 4. Add the yeast and whisk to combine.

    This collage shows the dry ingredients in a mixing bowl, the wet ingredients added, the dough mixed and the put in a container to rise.

    Step 5. Place the all-purpose flour and salt in the bowl of a mixer. Step 6. Add the wet ingredients to the bowl. Step 7. Beat on medium or the speed your mixer suggests until the dough forms a ball. Beat for 3 minutes to activate the gluten. The dough should clean the sides of the bowl and be soft but not sticky. Step 8. Place the dough in a container that has been sprayed with a non-stick-baking release. Turn it over and cover with film. Place the top on or cover with a towel and mark the time. Let it rise until doubled. Deflate and refrigerate overnight or up to 3 days,

    This collages shows the apples being shredded, the dough being dented to male it easier to roll out, the dough rolled out and spread with apple butter.

    Step 9. Shred the apples with a box grater on the largest hole. Shred one side, turn the apple 90°, shred another side and continue turning and shredding until the appleis done. Repeat to make 1 1/2 cups after the liquid has been squeezed out. Step 10. Remove the dough from the fridge and place it in front of you on a lightly floured surface Shape it into a rectangle and dent the dough several times to make it easier to roll out . Step11. Roll it out into a 20" x 12" rectangle. Step 12. Spread it with the apple butter.

    This collage shows the brown sugar and cardamom being mixed, the shredded apples on top of the apple butter, then all of the apples distributed, the dough cut in half lengthwise with one stack of cut pieces and both stacks cut in thirds.

    Step 13. Combine the cardamom or cinnamon and brown sugar. Sprinkle it evenly over the apple butter. Press it down lightly Step 14. Sprinkle the apples over the brown sugar covering the dough completely. Step 15. Cut the dough in half from top to bottom. Cut each half into 5 6"x 4" strips. Stack in to 2 piles. Step 16. Cut each of these stacks into three 4"x2". stacks.

    The last collage shows the first 2 stacks, staggered in the loaf pan, then all of the stacks in the pan, the pan covered loosely with plastic wrap and the baked bread turn out upside down on a rack.

    Step 17. Stagger the sections in the loaf pan. Step 18. Add the remainder in the same manner. If all of them won't fit, just push those in the pan together. Step 19. Cover loosely with plastic wrap and allow to double. Bake as directed. Step 20. After cooling in the pan for about 15 minutes, go around the edges and turn out onto a rack upside down. The apple butter and brown sugar will have made a glaze for the cake.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    What does cardamom taste like in apple bread?

    Cardamom has a warm, fragrant flavor with subtle citrus and floral notes. It pairs especially well with sweet-tart apples and gives this pull-apart bread a distinctive Scandinavian-inspired flavor.

    What are the best apples to use for Apple Cardamom Pull-Apart Bread?

    Granny Smith apples are the best hands down. They don't add sweetness and with the apple butter and brown sugar no more is needed. They also don't become mushy even when grated.

    What if I don't have cardamom?

    Substitute cinnamon. It's always a good choice with apples.

    Expert Tips

    • After shredding the apples squeeze all the liquid from them to make 1 1/2 cups
    • Squeeze them again just before spreading them over the brown sugar.
    • Light or brown sugar can be used.
    • The apple butter needs to be thick. If yours it a bit loose, place it in a strainer over a bowl while you prep the rest of the ingredients.
    • Always form doughs in shape you want them rolled into. If they are thick, dent them 3 or 4 time with a rolling pin.
    • The dough can be made and held in the fridge up to 3 days.
    • I definitely suggest refrigerating it overnight. It will be much easier to roll out without a lot of spring back.
    • It may appear all of the stacks will not fit in the pan. Just push them together as necessary.
    The Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread sits on a cream colored tray with an apple, apple butter, and cinnamon sticks in the background.

    Four More great Sweet Breads

    • Several slices of the swirly Chocolate Babka is shown along with the whole in the background.
      Chocolate Babka Recipe
    • A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.
      Lemon Sugar Buns
    • Rum Raisin Rolls on a plate with a cup of tea and an iced roll in the background
      Rum Raisin Rolls - A Long Ago Memory
    • Five Mexican sweet rolls, Conchas with different toppings.
      Conchas - A Mexican Sweet Bread

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    The Apple Cardamom Pull Apart Bread sits on a cream colored tray with an apple, apple butter, and cinnamon sticks in the background.

    Double Apple Pull Apart Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Recipe begins with a simple yeast dough, covered with apple butter, brown sugar and grated apples. I love the way is put together in slices rather than balls.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    rising time 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course Apple Sweet Bread, Sweet Bread
    Cuisine Sweet Bread
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 282 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x2" loaf pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Dough

    • 3/4 cup milk, whole or 2%
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, (58 grams or 1/2 stick)
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 1/4 teaspoons instant yeast (7 grams)
    • 3 cups all-purpose flour (420 grams)
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt

    Double Apple Filling

    • 1 1/2 cups shredded apples, squeezed dry
    • 1 cuo thick apple butter
    • 2/3 cup brown sugar (135 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon cardamom or cinnamon

    Instructions
     

    Double Apple Pull Apart Bread Dough

    • Combine the milk, cut up butter and honey in a small saucepan. Heat over medium just until the butter is melted. Stir everything together and let cool to lukewarm.
    • Whisk in the egg. Sprinkle the yeast on top and whisk it in.
    • Combine the all-purpose flour and salt in the bowl of a mixer. Pour the wet ingredients over and beat for 3 to 4 minutes to develop the gluten and it comes together in a ball.
    • Spray a container at least twice as big as the dough with a non-stick baking release. Shape the dough into a ball and add it to the container, turning it over so both sides are coated with the release. Cover directly with plastic wrap. Put the top on the container or cover with a towel.
    • Let double at room temperature or put in in the oven with the oven light on and the door closed. Check the temperature of the oven abut 30 minutes in and make sure it does no exceed 90°F. If it does, prop the door open with a wooden spoon.
    • While the dough can be used immediately, it is infinitely easier to roll out if it is refrigerated overnight or up to 3 days.

    Double Apple Filling

    • Peel the apples and grate them on the largest hole of a box grater. Squeeze all the liquid from them. Measure 1 1/2 cups after the water is squeezed out. Set aside.
    • Measure the remaining ingredients and sst them aside also.

    Assembly - all of the cutting can seem confusing. Look at the pictures where it will be clear.

    • Line the bottom of a 9"x5" loaf pan with parcment paper. Spray the whole pan with a non-stick baking release.
    • Remove the dough from the fridge. On a lightly floured surface, shape it into a rectangle. Dent the dough several times with your roling pin to make it easier to roll out . Roll the dough into a 20" x 12" rectangle.
    • Spread the apple butter over the dough.
    • Combine the brown sugar and cardamom or cinnamon and sprinkle over the apple butter.
    • Squeeze the apples again to extract as much water as possible and sprinkle them over the brown sugar.
    • Cut the dough in half to make 2 pieces 20"x6".
    • Cut each 20"x6" piece into 5 6"x4" strips. Stack the 5 pieces up together.
    • Cut each 6"x4" stack into 3 4'x2' strrips.
    • Stagger the strips in the pan, cut side up. You will most likely have to push them together to get them all in.
    • Cover lightly with plastic wrap. if you follow me, you know I don't usually like to use plastic wrap, but these are a bit messy and a towel is not a good idea. Allow to almost double. If the ends rise above the rest, push them down to even the loaf up.
    • About 15 minutes before the Double Apple Pull Apart Bread is to go into the oven preheat the oven to 350°F. Bake for 30 to 35 minutes until nicely browned and 200°F inside.
      Be sure to tent it lightly with foil as it starts browning. The combination of the apple butter and brown sugar will burn easily.
    • If the ends have risen higher than the middle, immediately push the even with middle using a pancake turner.
    • Let it rest for 15 to 20 minutes. Go around the edges with a metal spatula and turn it out. Cool on a rack. Serve it upside down as it makes it own glaze.
    • Any yeast dough is best the day it is made but it will keep, covered, for a couple of days at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________
    After shredding the apples squeeze all the liquid from them to make 1 1/2 cups. 
    Squeeze them again just before spreading them over the brown sugar.
    Light or brown sugar can be used.
    The apple butter needs to be thick. If yours it a bit loose, place it in a strainer over a bowl while you prep the rest of the ingredients.
    Always form doughs in the shape you want them rolled into before starting. If they are thick, dent them 3 or 4 time with a rolling pin.
    The dough can be made and held in the fridge up to 3 days.
    I definitely suggest refrigerating it overnight. It will be much easier to roll out without a lot of spring back.
    It may appear all of the stacks will not fit in the pan. Just push them together as necessary.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 282kcalCarbohydrates: 51gProtein: 6gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 33mgSodium: 138mgPotassium: 144mgFiber: 2gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 207IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 49mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia

    Modified: Aug 30, 2026 · Published: Sep 1, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A stick of Lemon Pepper focaccia sits on a cutting board with a napkin and knife.

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia combines lemon pepper pesto and a zippy garlic oil baked right into the bread....no need to dip into a flavored oil. It's one of the easiest breads to make with the pesto and zippy garlic oil made ahead of time.

    A stick of Lemon Pepper focaccia sits on a cutting board with a napkin and knife.

    This bread is ideal to snack on, great as an accompaniment to a meal or soup and perfect for sandwiches when sliced.

    Be sure to check out these recipes for more scrumptious breads: Stuffed Focaccia, Rye Raisin Bread with Bakery Style Flavor, Outback Steakhouse Bread, Homemade Pizza Dough, and The Story of No Knead Bread and Me.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Want To Make This Bread

    • Although this takes 3 component parts, 2 can be made a week ahead. In fact they should be made before making the bread.
    • The Lemon Pepper Focaccia takes literally minutes to mix.
    • It's a fast riser - no long waits.
    • It can be shaped immediately but is better if it is refrigerated overnight.
    • It's one of the more unusual breads you'll make.
    • Easy, delicious and different - let's get started!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Lemon Pepper Pesto

    Ingredients for the Lemon Pepper Focaccia are garlic, basil, walnuts, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, olive oil and lemon zest.

    FRONT ROW: Cayenne pepper, garlic, salt

    MIDDLE ROW: Canola oil, walnuts, black pepper

    BACK ROW: Lemon zest, fresh basil, parmesan cheese

    Zippy Garlic Oil

    The zippy garlic oil ingredients include olive oil, red pepper flakes, garlic cloves and lemon rind.

    FRONT ROW: Lemon peel

    MIDDLE ROW: Red pepper flakes, garlic cloves

    BACK ROW: Olive oil

    Lemon pesto Focaccia

    Ingredients for the Lemon Pepper Focaccia are bread flour, instanat yeast, salt, zippy olive oil, water, lemon pepper pesto.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, olive oil, instant yeast

    MIDDLE ROW: Lemon pepper pesto

    BACK ROW: Bread flour, water

    key ingredients

    • Toast the walnuts to bring out the most flavor.
    • Parmesan or Sharp Asiago can be used
    • Extra virgin or virgin olive oil is recommended for the best taste.
    • The garlic cloves should be large. If not use an extra one or two.
    • Bread flour is best with yeast. All-purpose can be used but the results won't be as high or as light.
    • I add my instant yeast to the wet ingredients to soften it as I have seen little bumps in some yeast breads where the yeast has not dissolved.

    Why Overnight Yeast Doughs

    When working with yeast I overnight my finished dough in the fridge and often up to 3 days. This applies to both lean doughs and rich doughs. This allows for more flavor and equally important, the dough doesn't spring back when rolled out as it does if used immediately. The gluten has a chance to relax and makes it much easier to shape. The fact that the dough is cold also makes it much easier to work. It will take a bit longer to rise but an oven proofer takes care of that problem.

    What is a Lean or rich dough

    A lean dough is one that is basically water, flour, salt, and yeast. It can be milk or part milk, part water. But basically it doesn't have fat or very little in it.

    A rich dough or enriched dough is just that. It can have butter, egg, sour cream, etc. that makes the dough richer. Sweet doughs are usually rich doughs. These often take more time to rise than leaner doughs.

    How to Make an oven proofer

    Professional bread makers use proofers that are nothing more than large enclosed, temperature, and humidity controlled rooms where their yeast products rise. They can control the time by adjusting the temps.

    I have seen several versions of home proofers. But they are usually very small and expensive. There is no need to buy one as you have a proofer in your kitchen. I have used this technique forever and it works like a charm.

    The Hot water method: Place a pan of very hot water on the bottom rung of your oven. Place the yeast product which is covered on a rung above it and close the door. Check the temperature after 20 to 30 minutes to make sure it doesn't exceed 75°F to 85°F, If it does, prop the door of the oven open with a wooden spoon or remove the water, close the door and let it rise.

    The oven light method: This is the one I use all the time. While you are shaping the dough, turn the oven light on. Leave the light on and place the product on the middle rung of the oven. Monitor the oven after 30 minutes to regulate the temperature as above. If it gets too hot prop the door open.

    One thing to watch: If the dough is a laminated dough such as croissants or a butter heavy dough such as brioche watch it so the butter does not melt and ooze out. Definitely keep the oven temperature around 70°F and no more than 75°F. If the temperature gets too hot, pull the product out until the oven cools and then put it back in or let it finish rising at room temperature since it will have a good start.

    an Important note about the garlic

    It's important to simmer the zippy garlic for at least 5 minutes. Along with onions, garlic grows in the ground and can pick up botulism spores. Simmering for 5 minutes will kill anything as long as the garlic is strained out along with the other ingredients. Straining out all solid garlic bits removes the water and organic matter the bacteria need to thrive.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step instructions

    Lemon Pepper Pesto

    The Lemon Pepper Pesto collage shows all of the ingredints in the processor bowl, processed, the oil added and the finished pesto portioned out in one tablespoon balls.

    Step 1. Place all of the ingredients except the oil in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process until every thing is finely cut together. Step 3. Add the oil and process to blend in. Step 4. With a #100 disher/scoooper drop balls of pesto on a parchment line sheet pan. Freeze until hard and then transfer to a freezer proof container. I dropped mine with a #100 disher/scooper which is 2 teaspoons. If I need 2 tablespoons, I know that is 3 balls. See my Numbers and Sizes of Dishers/Scoopers for a list that includes all the sizes and how much is in each size.

    Zippy Garlic Oil

    The zippy garlic oil collages shows the garlic, pepper flakes and lemon rind in a saucepan, oil added and garlic browned, the mixture strained and the clear oil.

    Step 1a. Place the coarsely chopped garlic, lemon strips and hot pepper flakes in a small saucepan. Step 2a. Simmer over low heat until the garlic is light to medium brown. Remove from the heat. Step 3a. Strain the solids out. Step 4a. Only the clear oil should remain. Cool and refrigerate if not using immediately.

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia

    The first collage for the bread shows the flour, and salt in the mixing bowl, then whisked ttogether, the liquids added and the finished dough,

    Step 1c. Add the bread flour and salt to a mixing bowl. Step 2c. Whisk them together. STep 3c. Combine the water, pesto and yeast. Whisk together to mix. Let sit for a couple of minutes Add it to the dry ingredients. Step 4c.

    This collage shows the clean bowl after beating the dough, the dough in a container to rise, covered with film and the time on the lid of the container.

    Step 5. After mixing the dough, but bowl should be clean before washing. Step 6. Place the dough into a container sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Step 7. Cover the dough by placing plastic wrap directly on top of the dough. Step 8. Cover the container with the lid and mark the time on it.

    Thew last collage shows the zippy oil in the bottom of the baking dish, the lemon pepper focaccia patted out before placing in the dish, placed in the dish and dimpled then baked and brushed with zippy garlic oil.

    Step 9. Pour 2 tablespoons of zippy garlic oil in the bottom of a 9"x 9" baking dish. Step 10. Remove the lemon pepper focaccia from the fridge and very lightly flour the work surface. Place the dough in the dish and let it rise until it doubles. Step 11. When it has doubled, dimple the focaccia by pressing your fingers to the bottom of the dish. Step 12. Bake as directed. Immediately upon removing from the oven, brush with the remainder of the oil. Cool and turn out.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can store-bought pesto be used for the focaccia?

    It can. Be sure to choose a thick on rather than a very oily one as it will put too much oil into the bread when mixing it.

    Why isn't my focaccia crisp on the bottom?

    A metal pan and enough oil on the bottom produces a crisper crust than a glass or ceramic dish.

    What goes well with pesto focaccia?

    Pesto focaccia is delicious served with soups, salads, pasta, grilled vegetables, or Italian-inspired meals. It also makes an excellent sandwich bread when sliced horizontally and filled with mozzarella, tomatoes, or grilled chicken.

    Make ahead, STorage and Freezing

    The pesto and zippy garlic oil can be made a week ahead and stored, covered in the fridge. The pesto can be made and frozen up to a couple of months.

    The dough can be made and held in the fridge for 3 days but it will get darker the longer it's in there. However, it should be refrigerated at least overnight for the flavor and to make it easier to shape.

    The lemon pesto focaccia dough can be frozen after mixing. Thaw it in the fridge overnight and continue as it was just made.

    It can also be frozen after baking for a month. Thaw it on a cooling rack and then wrap it in foil, leaving a vent hole in the top and refresh in a preheated 350°F oven for about 15 minutes.

    While yeast doughs are generally best the day they are baked, this will hold several days, lightly covered.

    Expert Tips

    • If store bought pesto is used, add the zest of a lemon. If it is very oily, place it in a strainer to remove some of the oil.
    • Beat the dough for about 4 minutes to activate the gluten.
    • Refrigerate overnight to increase the flavor and make it easier to shape.
    • Dimple the dough to the bottom of the dish. The holes should not close in. If they do, let it rise a bit more. Test it with on or two holes.
    • Extra virgin olive oil which is cold pressed or Virgin olive oil is best because it contributes a lot to the taste of the finished product.
    • At the end of the basil season and before it goes to seed, make pesto, shape into balls and freeze for a taste of summer during the off months.
    • This Lemon Pepper Pesto is excellent when used to finish pasta.
    A stick of Lemon Pepper focaccia sits on a cutting board with a napkin and knife.

    Special Breads you'll want to make

    • Slices of English Muffin Bread on a white plate with orange juice, honey and jam with a blue and white napkin in the background.
      Easy English Muffin Bread
    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Stuffed Italian Bread - Pane Bianco
    • Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread
      Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread

    If you love this recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    A stick of Lemon Pepper focaccia sits on a cutting board with a napkin and knife.

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Lemon Pesto Focaccia combines lemon pepper pesto and a zippy garlic oil baked right into the bread....no need to dip into a flavored oil.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 489 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9"x9" oven proof dish or pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Lemon Pepper Focaccia

    • 1/4 cup walnuts or pine nuts (25 grams)
    • 3/4 cup basil leaves, packed (28 grams)
    • 3 large garlic cloves
    • 1/2 cup parmesan or sharp asiago cheese (40 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons lemon zest
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
    • 1/8 teaspoon cayenne pepper
    • 4 to 5 tablespoons olive oil

    Zippy Garlic Oil

    • 3/4 cup olive oil (Extra Virgin or Virgin)
    • 3/4 teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • 4 large garlic cloves
    • 1/2 rind of large lemon

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia Dough

    • 3 1/2 cups bread flour (490 grams)
    • 1 1/2 teaspoons salt
    • 1 1/3 cups water
    • 1/3 cup lemon pepper pesto
    • 3 tablespoon zippy olive oil
    • 2 1/4 teaspoons instant yeast (7 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia

    • Toast the walnuts at 350°F for 5 to 7 minutes until ligltly browned and fragrant. Cool before using.
    • Pull the leaves off the stems of the basil stems. Rinse and dry them well.
    • Place all the ingredients except the oil in the bowl of a processor and process until finely cut together.
    • Add the smaller amount of oil first and see if it makes a paste. if not, add the remainder of the oil. You want more of a paste than it swimming in oil
    • Using a disher/scoooper or a spoon, drop the pesto on a sheet of parchmenet and freeze. When they are hard, place them in a freezer proof bag. Thaw as many as needed.
    • I dropped mine with a #100 disher/scooper which is 2 teaspoons. If I need 2 tablespoons, I know that is 3 balls. See my Numbers and Sizes of Dishers/Scoopers for a list that includes all the sizes and how much is in each size.
    • Yield: 10 to 11 balls of pesto.

    Zippy Garlic Oil

    • Place all the ingredients in a small saucepan.
    • Bring to a simmer and simmer for 5 minutes.
    • Immediately, strain out the solids and cool the oil. Store in the fridge.
    • Yields: About 3/4 cup

    Lemon Pesto Focaccia

    • Combine the flour and aalt in the bowl of a mixer. Whisk to mix. Fit the bowl with a dough hook if possible.
    • Combine the water, lemon pepper pesto, zippy garlic oil, and instant yeast. Whisk to blend completely.
    • Pour over the flour mixture and mix on low initially to combine the ingredients Raise the speed to medium or whatever your mixer suggests and beat for 3 to 4 minutes. The dough will come together and clean the bowl. It will be soft and slightly sticky. If it is not, add another tablespoon of water at a time until it gets to that consistency,
    • Spray a container at least twice as big as the dough with a non-stick baking release and transfer the dough to the container. Turn it over so the top is coated. Cover directly with plastic wrap, put the top on the container and mark the time on it. Let it double in bulk.
    • At this point I suggest you refrigerate it overnight to make it easier to shape and deepen the taste.
    • The next day, spray the sides of the baking dish as above. Add 2 to 3 tablespoons of zippy garlic oil. Rotate the dish to coat the bottom.
    • Remove the focaccia from the fridge and lightly flour your work surface. Pat the into a slightly larger than 9" x 9" square. Lift it into the dish and let it rise until doubled either at room temperature or in the oven proofer. See the notes in the header of the post if you are not familiar with this technique.
    • Preheat the oven to 425°F. While the oven is preheating, dimple the dough using your four fingers. The holes should stay open if the dough is properly risen.
    • Bake for 30 to 35 minutes until the top is deeply browned. Immediately upon removing from the oven, brush the top with the remaining oil Cool completely
    • While most yeast products are best the same day they are made, this bread can be held loosely covered for several days.
    • Freezing the bread. It can be baked and stored in the freezer, well wrapped for a couple of months. Thaw at room temperature and then freshen in a preheated 350F oven for 15 to 20 minutes.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________
    Toast the walnuts to bring out the most flavor.
    Parmesan or Sharp Asiago can be used
    Extra virgin or virgin olive oil is recommended for the best taste.
    The garlic cloves should be large. If not use an extra one or two.
    Bread flour is best with yeast. All-purpose can be used but the results won't be as high or as light.
    I add my instant yeast to the wet ingredients to soften it as I have seen little bumps in some yeast breads where the yeast has not dissolved.
    If store bought pesto is used, add the zest of a lemon. If it is very oily, place it in a strainer to remove some of the oil.
    Beat the dough for about 4 minutes to activate the gluten.
    Refrigerate overnight to increase the flavor and make it easier to shape.
    Dimple the dough to the bottom of the dish. The holes should not close in. If they do, let it rise a bit more. Test it with on or two holes.
    Extra virgin olive oil which is cold pressed or Virgin olive oil is best because it contributes a lot to the taste of the finished product. 
    At the end of the basil season and before it goes to seed, make pesto, shape into balls and freeze for a taste of summer during the off months. 
    This Lemon Pepper Pesto is excellent when used to finish pasta.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 9servingsCalories: 489kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 10gFat: 34gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 5gMonounsaturated Fat: 22gCholesterol: 4mgSodium: 614mgPotassium: 120mgFiber: 3gSugar: 0.4gVitamin A: 213IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 89mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    13 Savory Recipes Made for Summer

    Modified: Aug 22, 2026 · Published: Aug 25, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

    If you've followed along here for any length of time, you know that pastry isn't just about dessert in my world. When I had my take-out shop, the savory side of the case was just as beloved as anything sweet — and summer was when it really shone. Tomatoes falling off the vine, fresh basil, peppers at their peak — it's the season that practically does the cooking for you.

    A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

    I've pulled together twelve of my very favorite savory recipes that are perfectly suited to these warm months. Whether you're hosting a patio lunch, heading to a potluck supper, or just looking for something light and satisfying on a weeknight, there is something here for you. Many of these can be made a day or two ahead — or even frozen — which is exactly the kind of flexibility summer entertaining demands. These are the recipes my students asked for, my customers came back for, and the ones I still turn to again and again. I hope they earn a permanent spot in your repertoire too.

    Mediterranean Orzo Salad

    This was one of the best sellers at my take-out shop, and I can't tell you how much of it we made. Light, refreshing, and not a drop of mayonnaise in sight — just crunchy vegetables, calamata olives, a bit of feta, and a simple dressing that is packed with flavor. Make it ahead and let it sit; it only gets better. 

    Mediterranean Orzo Salad

    Summer Vegetable Tart

    This tart is everything summer produce was meant to be. An easy parmesan herb crust — no rolling required, just press it right into the pan — holds whatever beautiful vegetables you happen to bring home from the farmers market. It's the kind of recipe you'll find yourself making all season long, altering it endlessly with whatever looks best. 

    A slice of the Summer Vegetable Tart sits on a white plate with a fork on a green background.

    View post

    View post 

    Goat Cheese Pesto Tart

    This tart came directly from my love of summer peppers and basil — in this case, pesto. I cut the goat cheese with cream cheese to mellow its astringency, and the result is a filling that is creamy, vibrant, and holds its shape beautifully. It can be made ahead and frozen, which makes it an ideal choice for entertaining. 

    Goat Cheese Pesto Tart

    View post 

    French Onion Tart

    With tomatoes practically falling off the vines, this is exactly the right time to make this tart. At the shop we baked them in half sheet pans, trimmed the edges, and cut them into squares for appetizers — and they disappeared every single time. Fresh basil is essential here; it truly brings the whole thing to life. 

    French Onion Tart

    View post 

    Greek Tomato Salad

    When summer tomatoes are at their peak, this is the salad I reach for first. Feta cheese and calamata olives give it a distinct Greek influence, and the simple dressing doesn't overtake the other ingredients — it just ties them together. It accompanies everything and is absolutely perfect alongside anything coming off the grill. 

    Greek Tomato Salad

    View post 

    Southwestern Seafood Tart

    This was a favorite from the take-out shop and remains one of my go-to summer tarts to this day. Good warm, at room temperature, or cold, it is an impressive but genuinely easy dinner that works beautifully for a patio lunch or a casual summer supper. Pair it with a simple black bean salad and you have a meal worth repeating. 

    Southwestern Seafood Tart

    View post 

    Asparagus Tart

    An easy cream cheese pastry holds a full pound of roasted asparagus brightened with lemon in a low-fat quiche mixture, finished with a generous top of parmesan. It's a perfect brunch, lunch, or dinner choice — and the fact that it can be made a couple of days ahead makes it exactly the kind of recipe summer weekends call for. 

    Asparagus Tart

    View post 

    Muffaletta Bread

    This is the recipe for when you want to actually enjoy being with your guests rather than being stuck in the kitchen. The bread itself takes just five ingredients and comes together in minutes in the food processor. I strongly suggest refrigerating the dough for up to three days before baking — the flavor that develops is absolutely worth it. 

    Muffaletta Bread

    View post 

    Brie and Bacon Tart

    The combination of brie, bacon, and caramelized onions is simply hard to beat. Instead of the usual cream, I use a blend of low-fat cottage cheese and plain yogurt, which reduces the calories and — more importantly — lets the flavors come through without coating your tongue. This was a consistent seller at the shop, and it's easy to see why. 

    Brie and Bacon Tart

    View post 

    Torta Rustica

    This belongs in your repertoire. Layers of spinach, red peppers, artichokes, and provolone are enclosed in an Italian butter pastry — Pasta Frolla — that browns beautifully and holds the substantial filling without buckling or becoming soggy. It can be served hot, warm, or at room temperature, which makes it endlessly accommodating for summer entertaining. 

    Torta Rustica

    View post 

    International Flatbreads

    I love flatbreads even more than pizza, because the absence of a sauce lets the toppings come through with a power they simply can't achieve otherwise. Fresh summer tomatoes, good olive oil, and your favorite ingredients are all you need. The dough can be made well ahead, making this one of the most relaxed and satisfying things you can put on a summer table. 

    International Flatbreads

    View post 

    These are especially good at the end of summer as it's the last chance to use those ripe tomatoes and vegetables. See if you don't agree!

    Smoked Turkey Salad

    This Smoked Turkey Salad is exactly what I reach for when the heat has me wanting something satisfying without turning on the oven. It came straight from my take-out shop, and the secret is starting with good smoked turkey — I skip the deli counter and buy mine from a local smokehouse, which makes all the difference. Serve it alongside cold cantaloupe or watermelon and a slice of good bread, and dinner is done. 

    Smoked Turkey Salad

    View post 

    Simple Black Bean Salad

    This Simple Black Bean Salad was another staple at the take-out shop, and it earned its place there for good reason. High in protein, low in fat, and ready in under thirty minutes — it's the kind of recipe that asks almost nothing of you and delivers every time. It travels beautifully without refrigeration, which makes it exactly right for a picnic, a potluck, or anything coming off the grill. 

    Simple Black Bean Salad

    View post

    Peach and Plum Fruit Cobbler Recipe

    Modified: Aug 17, 2025 · Published: Aug 18, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    This photo for the Peach and Plum Cobbler shows the fruit in a bowl with a biscuit on top swimming in cream.

    Peach and Plum Fruit Cobbler is a perfect combination for an easy summer dessert. The fresh fruit is at its peak during the summer months and after prepping the fruit, the rest goes together in a matter of minutes. Making this even easier, the biscuit for this treat is a cream biscuit that requires no cutting in of butter or rolling out.

    This photo for the Peach and Plum Cobbler shows the  fruit in a bowl with a biscuit on top swimming in cream.

    The fruit should be just ripe for flavor but not overly ripe as it will be baked. After preparing the fruit the rest goes together in a matter of minutes. It doesn't get any easier than this. While ice cream is the traditional accompaniment, I suggest you try cold half and half on the warm cobbler.

    For more fruit desserts perfect for summer I'd like to suggest the Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp, the Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble, Chocolate Raspberry Curd Tart, or the Meringue Shells filled with Fresh Fruit. Looking for more peach recipes, check out Fresh Peach Desserts That Taste Like Summer.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Crisp vs. Cobbler: What’s the Difference?

    Crisp

    The crisp has a crumbly mixture of butter, flour, sugar sometimes nuts and oats. It's crunchy and crisp on top with soft, juicy fruit underneath. Almost any fruit can be used including apples, berries, peaches, and rhubarb.

    Cobbler

    The topping for a cobbler traditionally has a biscuit topping that is dropped on top before baking. Depending upon where you are in the country, a cakey top may also be used. Both have a soft texture with a golden crust. While peaches are a classic fruit to be used, berries, cherries, apples and mixed fruits work well also.

    Easy way to Remember

    • Crisp = crunchy crumb topping.
    • Cobbler = biscuit or cakey topping

    Recipe Ingredients

    Fruit Filling

    This fruit filling for the Peach and Plum Cobbler includes, peaches, plums, granulated sugar, 
all-purpose flour, salt and vanilla and almond extracts and white balsamic vinegar.

    FRONT ROW: White Balsamic Vinegar, almond extract, vanilla extract

    MIDDLE ROW: Granulated sugar, all-purpose flour

    BACK ROW: Peaches, plums

    Cream Biscuit topping

    Ingredients for the cream biscuits are cake flour, baking powder, salt, sugar, heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Baking power, salt, granulated sugar, egg

    BACK ROW: Sanding sugar, cake flour, heavy cream

    Key Ingredients

    • White Balsamic Vinegar is used for its sharpness. Over the years I have preferred to use balsamic vinegars in my fruit preparations as opposed to the usual lemon juice which isn't as strong. I don't like to use the regular balsamic as it dulls the look of the fruit.
    • Cake flour is important for the soft texture of this biscuit.
    • Sanding sugar is a coarse, finishing sugar for the top of the biscuits
    • Heavy cream replaces the butter most often used in biscuits. Since butter is made from cream it is an easy swap that makes the biscuits really easy to make since there is no cutting in of butter or, in this case, rolling out.
    • The egg is an optional finish for the top of the biscuits.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step instructions

    The first collage for the Peach and Plum Fruit Cobbler shows a plum cut with the seed, without the seed and a serrated spoon, the plum cut in half and then slicdd into pieces.

    Step 1. Cut the peach in half along its equator and twist to separate it. The pit will be on one side. Step 2. The easiest way to remove the pits is to use a serrated spoon and go around the put and lift it out. Step 3. Turn the plum cut side down. Step 4. Slice the plum in about 1/4" slices and then cross cut them to make it easier to eat.

    This collage shows the peaches in boiling water, the skin being pulled off, the peach being sliced on the equator and pulled open.

    Step 5. Bring a large pot of water to a boil and immerse the peaches in it for several minutes until the skins loosen. The riper the peach the faster the skin releases. Step 6. Test a peach to see if the skin has loosened. If they have, remove them from the boiling water and run cold water over them. Start at the stem end and just pull the skin off. Step 7. Cut the peach along the equator. Step 8. Pull the peach apart and remove the stone. See my post All About Peaches.

    This collage shows the fruit cut in a large bowl, the flour, sugar, vanilla and almond extracts and white balsamic vinegar on  top of the fruit,  then mixed together and the 8x8 inch glass dish.

    Step 9. After the fruit is sliced, cross cut into smaller pieces for easier eating. Step 10. Add the flour, sugar, vanilla and almond extracts and white balsamic vinegar. Step 11. Stir in to completely combine. Set aside. Step 12. Lightly spray an 8x8x2 inch oven proof dish with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.

    The biscuit top collage shows the cake flour, baking powder, salt and sugar in the bowl of a mixer, then whisked together, the cream being poured in and the final dough.

    Step 13.Place the cake flour, sugar, baking powder and salt in the bowl of a mixer. Step 14. Whisk together to mix. Step 15. With the machine on medium low, pour in the cream. Step 15. Raise the speed to medium to medium high and beat until the dough comes together. The dough should be soft and slightly sticky. If it is not, add a tablespoon more of cream.

    The last collage shows the fruit in the 8x8 inch pan, the biscuits dropped on top of the filling, the dish put in a  half sheet pan and the baked cobbler.

    Step 17. Pour the prepared fruit into the baking dish. Step 18. Drop the biscuits on top of the fruit. I used a #20 disher/scooper to do this. Alternatively, a scant 1/4 cup works also. Flatten the biscuits slightly. Sprinkle with sanding sugar. Step 19. For safety and ease of movement in and out of the oven, place the filled dish in a parchment lined sheet pan. Step 20. Bake as directed. Cool on a wire rack until warm. Serve with half and half or ice cream if desired or eat it plain.

    REcipe FAQ's

    Do the peaches need to be peeled?

    While there has been a move to not peel the peaches, i disagree. Leaving the skins on peaches makes them more rubbery than other fruits like the plums. I believe in speeding up recipes but some steps are necessary for the best outcome.

    How ripe should the fruit be for the cobbler?

    Because the fruit will be cooked, the fruit should be ripe but semi-firm. That will allow the fruit to stay intact when baked without becoming mushy for both looks and taste. Really ripe fruit has a tendency to get mushy.

    Can cobblers be made with other fruit?

    It sure can. Almost any fruit or combination goes for this easy dessert - mixed berries, strawberry-rhubarb, peaches, cherries are all good.

    Expert Tips

    • Use cake flour for the most tender biscuits. It's low protein count keeps the gluten from being active. All-purpose can be subbed but the texture won't be as good.
    • Heavy cream has more fat than whipping cream and is used for the best outcome. Since butter is basically overwhipped cream it just makes an easier biscuit.
    • Between the cake flour and cream it is hard to over mix these biscuits.
    • By adding a bit more cream and making the dough softer, the biscuits can be just dropped on top of the filling with no need to roll and cut them.
    • I like to use balsamic vinegar instead of lemon juice in many of my fruit recipes because it has a sharper taste and goes well with fruit. Balsamic vinegar is not as sharp as white or cider vinegar but sharper than lemon juice.
    • While ice cream is the normal accompaniment, cold half and half is better!
    This photo of the Peach and Plum Cobbler shows the dessert in a yellow rimmed bowl swimming in half and half.

    Perfectly Wonderful Fruit Desserts

    • Peach Curd Tart
      Peach Curd Tart - A Summer Treat
    • Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.
      Plum Crisp
    • A slice of No Bake Strawberry Pie finished with whipped cream, sits on a white plate with a yellow gingham background.
      (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie
    • A lone Banana Split Cupcake with its vibrant pink strawberry buttercream and drizzled with chocolate sits on a pink rimmed plate.
      Banana Split Cupcakes

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    This photo for the Peach and Plum Cobbler shows the fruit in a bowl with a biscuit on top swimming in cream.

    Peach and Plum Fruit Cobbler Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Peach and Plum Fruit Cobbler is a perfect combination for an easy summer dessert. Making this even easier, the biscuit for this treat is a cream biscuit that requires no cutting in of butter or rolling out.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 342 kcal

    Equipment

    • 8x8x2 inch oven proof dish
    • Mixer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Fruit Filling

    • 1 1/4 pounds peaches (570 grams)
    • 1 1/4 pounds plums, black or red (570 grams)
    • 1/2 to 3/4 cup granulated sugar (100 to 150 grams)
    • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour ( 35 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon white balsamic vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract

    Cream Biscuit Topping

    • 1 2/3 cup cake flour (210 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 3/4 teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 1 egg, optional
    • sanding sugar as needed

    Instructions
     

    Fruit Filling

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Lightly spray an 8x8x2" oven proof dish with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • The fruit should be ripe with some give to it but not soft. If it is really ripe and soft, it can become mushy when baked.
    • Wash the plums. Cut them in half on the diagonal. Twist them to open them and remove the seed. This is easiest done with a serrated spoon. Just go around the seed and lift it out.
    • Turn the plums cut side down and cut into about 1/4" slices. Cross cut them in half to make them easier to eat. Place in a large bowl.
    • To skin the peaches without peeling, bring a medium size pot of water to a rolling boil. Add the peaches. Boil for 1to 3 minutes depending upon how ripe the peaches are. The skins should slip off easily. Test one and if the skin is not coming off cleanly, boil a bit longer. Remove them from the water and run under cold water. Remove the skins.
    • Cut the peaches on their equators and pull apart. Remove the seed. Turn cut side down and cut into about 1/4" slices. Cross cut as above. Place in the bowl with the plums. Mix them.
    • Add the granulated sugar, flour, balsamic vinegar, vanilla and almond extracts. Stir well to make sure all the fruit is covered. Set aside while preparing the biscuits.

    Cream Biscuits

    • Place the cake flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt in the bowl of a mixer. Whisk together to combine.
    • With the paddle attached, turn the mixer to medium low and pour the cream in while the machine is running. The dough should be soft and a bit sticky.
    • Using a #20 disher/scooper or a scant 1/4 cup measure, drop 9 biscuits to cover the top with a bit of room between them. Press the down slightly to flatten them a little.
    • If using the egg wash, beat the egg to combine the white and the yolk. Brush the tops of the biscuits with the egg wash and sprinkle with sanding sugar.
    • If omitting the egg (I did), simply sprinkle the tops of the biscuits with sanding sugar.
    • Place the cobbler on a parchment lined half sheet to make it easier to get in and out of the oven.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes until the fruit is soft and bubbly and the biscuits are lightly browned. If they get too brown, tent them with foil.
    • Serve warm with half and half or ice cream.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________
    • White Balsamic Vinegar is used for its sharpness. Over the years I have preferred to use balsamic vinegars in my fruit preparations as opposed to the usual lemon juice which isn't as strong. I don't like to use the regular balsamic as it dulls the look of the fruit.
    • Use cake flour for the most tender biscuits. It's low protein count keeps the gluten from being active. All-purpose can be subbed but the texture won’t be as good.
    • Sanding sugar is a coarse, finishing sugar for the top of the biscuits
    • Heavy cream replaces the butter most often used in biscuits. Since butter is made from cream it is an easy swap that makes the biscuits really easy to make since there is no cutting in of butter or, in this case, rolling out. 
    • The egg is an optional finish for the top of the biscuits.
    • Between the cake flour and cream it is hard to over mix these biscuits. 
    • By adding a bit more cream and making the dough softer, the biscuits can be just dropped on top of the filling with no need to roll and cut them.
    • While ice cream is the normal accompaniment, cold half and half is better!
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servingsCalories: 342kcalCarbohydrates: 56gProtein: 6gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 34mgSodium: 343mgPotassium: 260mgFiber: 3gSugar: 31gVitamin A: 913IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 91mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream

    Modified: Aug 10, 2025 · Published: Aug 11, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A bowl of No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream shows the ice cream and a few chocolate pretzels.

    This no churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream is unbelievably creamy, easy to make and even easier to eat. Five ingredients and 30 minutes or less and it's ready for the freezer. First you taste the incredibly smooth texture. As that begins to melt away you taste the crunchy, salty chocolate pretzel and finally the intense flavor of the homemade caramel. An throughout all you're thinking is, "this is a keeper for sure"!

    A bowl of No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream shows the ice cream and a few chocolate pretzels.

    The caramel can be made weeks ahead and tucked away in the fridge. So there is no last minute rush to get it done. The remainder is super easy. The hardest part is waiting for it to freeze!

    For more no churn ice creams you'll want to try these: Nutella Ice Cream Squares, Ultimate Hot Fudge Marshmallow Sundae, Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie, and the Truly Amazing S'Mores Ice Cream Cake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Difference between Condensed Milk and Evaporated Milk

    Unsweetened condensed milk is known as evaporated milk. There is an important difference between these two varieties. Sweetened condensed milk has a thicker, syrupy texture with added sugar. All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is simply thickened milk without added sugar and therefore has a less sweet flavor. Evaporated Milk is used in the filling and frosting for a German Chocolate Cake among other recipes.

    Ways to use Leftover Condensed Milk

    • There will be about 1/2 cup condensed milk left over.
    • Chocolate Fudge can easily be made by combining 1/2 cup condensed milk, 1 1/2 cups finely chopped chocolate (dark is best here) and 1 teaspoon vanilla. Line a 9x5 loaf pan with foil or parchment overlapping the top edges to lift it out. Place all the ingredients in a saucepan and, stirring constantly over low heat melt the chocolate until everything is completely blended and shiny. Pour into the pan and let set at room temperature. Remove from the pan using the overhang and cut as desired.
    • Coconut macaroons - Add about 7 ounces of shredded coconut to the leftover condensed milk and 1 teaspoon vanilla. Do not add all of the coconut at once. You want the coconut to be sticky and coated. It may take a bit more or a bit less. Bake at 325°F on parchment paper sprayed with a non-stick baking release for 10 to 12 minutes just until the edges turn golden. The bottoms may be dipped in chocolate after they have cooled.
    • Store opened sweetened condensed milk in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 weeks, or freeze it for up to 3 months. Use leftovers to easily sweeten coffee or tea, drizzle over fresh fruit.

    REcipe Ingredients

    Caramel

    Ingredients for the caramel are water, granulated sugar, heavy cream, unsalted butter, vanilla and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla and corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

    No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream

    Ingredients for the Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Icen Cream are heavy cream, caramel, condensed milk, chocolate covered pretzels and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, chocolate covered pretzels

    BACK ROW: Heavy cream, caramel, condensed milk

    Key Ingredients

    • Heavy cream should be used. Do not substitute whipping cream or half and half. Heavy cream whips up thicker and is more stable.
    • Corn Syrup is used in the caramel to prevent the sugar from crystalizing and becoming grainy. Consumer corn syrup is not high fructose. The caramel can be made without it but extreme care must be taken to make sure all of the sugar, including that which sticks to the sides of the pan must be washed down so not one grain is left or it can crystalize the entire batch.
    • Sweetened condensed milk - All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is also condensed but it is unsweetened and a completely different product. It is much more liquid and cannot be substituted for the sweetened condensed milk.
    • Chocolate covered pretzels can be found in milk chocolate or dark chocolate. I chose the milk chocolate to better balance the flavors. Trader Joe's has both in a big bag.
    • When making the caramel the darker the initial sugar syrup the stronger the taste. Be careful not to take it too far or it can become bitter.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step instructions

    Caramel

    This should be made at least a day ahead or up to a couple of weeks ahead. If made more than a couple of days ahead, store in the fridge.

    The first collage shows the caramel - sugar and water in saucepan, the saucepan covered, the syrup at a rolling boil and the bronze color of the sugar syrup.

    Step 1. Water, granulated sugar and corn syrup in pan before boiling. Step 2. Granulated sugar, water and corn syrup boiling over high heat. Step 3. A lid is placed on the pan for 3 to 4 minutes to wash down the sides so no sugar granules remain to make the caramel grainy. Alternatively, the sides can be washed down with a pastry brush and cold water. Step 4. The sugar is boiled until it reaches a deep golden color. Remove from the heat.

    The second caramel collage shows the butter added to the bronze syrup, the cream and vanilla added, the caramel brought to a hard boil again and the finished caramel in a bowl.

    Step 5.  Butter is melted in the hot, golden syrup before adding the cream. Step 6.  Cream and vanilla is added before returning the caramel to the heat. Clip a thermometer onto the pan if possible. Step 7.  The caramel in the last stages of boiling. At this point it just has to be taken to the degree called for in the recipe. Step 8. Cooked caramel cooking in the pot before storing in a container.

    No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream

    This collage shows the vanilla added to the whipped cream, the cream whipped stiffly, the condensed milk added and mixed in.

    Step 1. Place the cream in a mixing bowl and whip until medium peaks. Add the vanilla. Step 2. Beat until very stiff. Step 3. Add the condensed milk. Step 4. Fold the two together until completely blended.

    The broken pretzels are added, half of the ice cream is spread in a 9x9" pan, half of the caramel is dolloped on, the remainder of the ingredients are added and the mixture is swirled together.

    Step 5. Chop the pretzels into bite size pieces and add to the mixture in the mixing bowl. Step 6. Spread half of it in a 9x9x2" pan. Step 7. Warm the caramel if stiff but do not make it liquid. It should be cool when spooning it onto the ice cream in a random pattern. Step 8. Add the remainder of the ice cream and the caramel as before. Swirl the ice cream and caramel together, reaching down to include the bottom layer. Freeze at least 6 hours or overnight. To serve, let it sit at room temperature for 5 or 10 minutes to make it easier to scoop.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can I make Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream without an ice cream maker?

    Absolutely! A no-churn version can be made with whipped heavy cream and sweetened condensed milk, then layered or swirled with caramel and chocolate-covered pretzels before freezing.

    How do I keep the pretzels crunchy in ice cream?

    For the best crunch, use larger pieces of pretzel and add them toward the end of the process rather than allowing them to sit in the ice cream mixture for too long. Chocolate-covered pretzels are another great option because the chocolate helps protect the pretzel from moisture.

    Why does chocolate and caramel taste so good with pretzels?

    The combination works because it brings together creamy, rich chocolate and caramel with the salty crunch of pretzels. The salt helps balance the sweetness, creating that irresistible sweet-and-salty flavor.

    This photo shows 2 scoops of the Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream in a dish with a few chocolate prezels and a bag of them in the background.

    More Incredible Frozen Desserts

    • Double Chocolate No Machine Ice Cream
      Double Chocolate No Machine Ice Cream
    • The S'Mores Ice Cream Cake sits on a gold rimmed cake plate with shards of graham cracker crumbs and chocolate around it,
      Truly Amazing S'Mores Ice Cream Cake
    • Three Ice Cream Sandwiches on a white plate with multi colored glasses and napkins behind.
      Homemade Ice Cream Sandwiches
    • Individual Island Baked Alaska
      Individual Island Baked Alaska

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A bowl of No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream shows the ice cream and a few chocolate pretzels.

    Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This no churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream is unbelievably creamy, easy to make and even easier to eat. Five ingredients and 30 minutes or less and it's ready for the freezer.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Ice Cream
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 340 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x9x2" square pan
    • Stand or hand held mixer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Caramel

    • 1/2 cup water
    • 1/4 cup corn syrup
    • 2/3 cup granulated sugar (130 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter (30 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Ice Cream

    • 1 1/3 cups heavy cream
    • 2/3 cup condensed milk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 to 1 1/2 cups chocolate covered pretzels (100 to 150 grams)
    • Caramel from above

    Instructions
     

    Caramel

    • In a heavy saucepan that is at least 4 times as big as the ingredients, place the water, sugar and corn syrup, stirring until combined.  
      When it begins to boil, wash down the sides of the pan with a brush dipped in cold waterBoil until it becomes a deep golden color, swirling the pan so the color is even.
      Remove from the heat immediately and add the butter, stirring until it is melted.  Stir in the cream and vanilla carefully as it may boil up.  
      Return the pan to the heat and boil, without stirring, to 218°F. This will happen very quickly after returning to the heat. It will be very thin but thicken as it cools.
      Pour into a container and let it come to room temperature undisturbed.  

      Store at room temperature for several days or refrigerate if holding longer.   

      Yields: 1 cup 

    No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream

    • Lightly spray a 9x9x2" square pan with a non-stick baking release. Set side.
    • In the bowl of a mixer fitted with the whisk attachment, whip the heavy cream to medium peaks. Add the vanilla and then beat until stiff.
    • Pour the condensed milk over the whipped cream and fold together by hand so you don't knock the air out of the cream.
    • Coarsely chop the chocolate pretzels into bite size pieces. 1 cup is fine but I used 1 1/2 cups for maximum effect. Fold them into the cream mixture.
    • Pour half of this mixture into the prepared pan. Briefly microwave the caramel if it too set to drizzle off of a spoon. Using a large serving spoon, drizzle as much or as little of the caramel as shown in the photo around the edges and center of the ice cream.
    • Add the remainder of the ice cream to the pan and repeat the drizzling. Using a skewer swirl everything together reaching to the bottom layer.
    • Freeze at least 6 hours until hard or overnight. To serve, let it sit at room temperature for 5 to 10 minutes to make it easier to scoop.
    • Store, covered, in the freezer for 2 months.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________
    • Heavy cream should be used. Do not substitute whipping cream or half and half. Heavy cream whips up thicker and is more stable.
    • Corn Syrup is used in the caramel to prevent the sugar from crystalizing and becoming grainy. Consumer corn syrup is not high fructose. The caramel can be made without it but extreme care must be taken to make sure all of the sugar, including that which sticks to the sides of the pan must be washed down so not one grain is left or it can crystalize the entire batch.
    • Sweetened condensed milk - All condensed milk is sweetened. Evaporated milk is also condensed but it is unsweetened and a completely different product. It is much more liquid and cannot be substituted for the sweetened condensed milk.
    • Chocolate covered pretzels can be found in milk chocolate or dark chocolate. I chose the milk chocolate to better balance the flavors. Trader Joe's has both in a big bag.
    • When making the caramel the darker the initial sugar syrup the stronger the taste. Be careful not to take it too far or it can become bitter.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servingsCalories: 340kcalCarbohydrates: 40gProtein: 3gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 61mgSodium: 51mgPotassium: 136mgSugar: 40gVitamin A: 739IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 102mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake

    Modified: Aug 6, 2025 · Published: Aug 7, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    A slice of the No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake with a mixed berry topping sets on a white plate with a green charger and color flowered napkin.

    This No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake with its mixed berry topping is not only easy to make, there's absolutely no baking involved. You don't have to tell anyone how easy it is. Let them think you worked all day in the kitchen just for them.

    A slice of the No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake with a mixed berry topping sets on a white plate with a green charger and color flowered napkin.

    Add a ribbon of raspberry jam to the cheesecake and it is the perfect finish to any dinner. The vanilla wafer crust is chilled while the cheesecake is finished. The abundant berry topping requires no cooking since it is set with instant clear gel. I'm telling you, this doesn't get any easier.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    WHITE CHOCOLATE VS. WHITE COATING CHOCOLATE

    White chocolate is made of cocoa butter, sugar, milk solids, vanilla, and a fatty food additive called lecithin. That's it! 

    White melting wafers or coating chocolate are made by several companies and can include:  Sugar, Palm And Palm Kernel Oil, Nonfat Dry Milk, Whole Milk Powder, Sorbitan Tristearate, Soy Lecithin, Salt, Natural Flavor.  

    As you can see there is no cocoa butter.  While they melt, they are not white chocolate and they don't taste like white chocolate.

    The processor or mixer for mixing cheesecakes

    Several years ago I found a better way to mix cheesecakes.....the processor. It was quite accidental. I was making them for the restaurant and I had something in the bowl of the mixer. The particular cheesecake I was making takes a long time to bake and cool in the oven so I made it in the processor. When the owner of the restaurant tasted the newly made cheesecakes he said, "I don't know what you did, they were always good but these are outstanding".

    But why are they better? When mixed in a mixer, air is whipped into the cream cheese even when using the paddle attachment. This makes for a fluffier cheesecake. For the ultimate smooth, creamy cheesecake using a processor which doesn't add air to the mixture is the answer. They are simply better this way whether they are baked or a no bake cheesecake. While some of my older posts still use the mixer (at least till I get to updating them) I make all my cheesecake in the processor now. See if you can't see a difference.

    Cheesecake Pan or Springform Pans

    When I had my bakery we used cheesecake pans for cheesecakes as well as to assemble cakes with soft fillings that could slide before setting up.

    A cheesecake pan has a solid outer ring and a flat bottom that fits in it. On the other hand the springform pans have an outer ring that opens and closes with a spring. The bottom also usually has a lip on it to fit within the ring when it is closed. The problem with that is two fold. Over time or sooner depending upon how it is stored, the spring no longer closes tightly.

    The cheesecake in the cheesecake pan can be easily released by dropping the side and then using a metal spatula to go between the crust and the bottom plate it is easily released and moved to a serving plate or cake board. We did this thousands of times at the bakery.

    With the springform pan the lip on the bottom makes it much more difficult to release cleanly as it is more difficult to get the spatula under the crust. The cheesecake pan is also a snap to wash and dry. Not so much the springform pan.

    Releasing the Cheesecake from its pan

    Have a fat can at the ready. A 28 ounce can of tomatoes is perfect. Go around the outside of the cheesecake pan with a hair blower set on high.  Place the cheesecake on the can and slide the side of the pan down. Smooth the side of the cheesecake with a spatula.

    After the side has been removed, place the cheesecake on a flat surface.  With a flat metal spatula, go under the crust to release it.  Place two pancake turners under the crust on either side and, lift up the cheesecake,  placing it on a board or serving plate.

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • The most important reason is it tastes incredible.
    • The cheesecake uses simple ingredients that are easy to get.
    • It's easy to make yet has a bakery worthy in presentation.
    • The berry topping needs no cooking.
    • It's quick to make.
    • It can be made ahead.
    • Lemon juice in the Berry Topping offsets the sweetness of the cheesecake.

    Variations

    Any fruit can be used. Peaches, strawberries, blueberries can all be used alone or in a grouping.

    The red raspberry jam can be omitted if desired.

    Ingredients

    Vanilla Wafer Crust

    Ingredients for the crust of the No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake include vanilla wafers, powdered sugar, vanilla, and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter, vanilla

    BACK ROW: Vanilla wafers, powdered sugar

    White Chocolate Cheesecake

    The ingredients for the cheesecake are: white chocolate, cream cheese, heavy cream, condensed milk, raspberry jam, and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, water, gelatin

    SECOND ROW: White chocolate, cream cheese

    BACK ROW: Seedless Red Raspberry Jam, heavy cream, sweetened condensed milk

    Berry Topping

    The berry  topping consists of blackberries, blueberries, strawberries and red raspberries, sugar, instant clear jel and water.

    FRONT ROW: Lemon juice, sugar, instant clear jel, and water

    BACK ROW: Blackbereries, red raspberries, blueberries and strawberries

    Key Ingredients

    • While I used Nabisco Nilla wafers any vanilla wafers can be used. However, they may require more or less butter. So start with 4 ounces or 1/2 cup and increase as needed. If they still seem dry, add another tablespoon or so of butter.
    • Make sure to use white chocolate and not the compound or coating as they are a different product. I used Ghirardelli White Chocolate but another brand can be used.
    • The seedless red raspberry jam is optional but delicious. Jams have no fruit pieces and are smooth and you definitely want seedless.
    • Heavy Cream should be used not only for flavor but the instant clearjel used is based on this. Lighter creams such as whipping cream will not set up as firm.
    • Cream Cheese - I used full fat but 1/3 less fat can be substituted.
    • Be sure to used sweetened condensed milk which should not be mistaken as evaporated milk.
    • Any fruit may be substituted for the mixed berries.
    • Be sure to use instant clearjel. . It can be found on online as well as in many grocery stores. Please see my post, Thickeners as used in baking.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Vanilla Wafer Crust

    The collage for the Vanilla Wafer Crust shows the wafers and powdered sugar processed to crumbs, the butter added and placed in the cheesecake pan, then pressed in.

    Step 1. Spray a 9x2 or 3 inch round cheesecake or springform pan with a non stick baking release. Break the wafers up and place them in the bowl of a food processor along with the powdered sugar. Process until fine crumbs form. Step 2. Add 1/2 cup of the melted butter and pulse to mix. Take some of the crumbs between your fingers and press together. If they stay together well, that all you need. If not, pulse in the rest of the butter. I found the Nabisco Nilla wafers took all of the butter. Pour them into the prepared pan. Step 3. Distribute the crumbs evenly over the bottom of the pan. Press the crumbs firmly into the pan. I do this with my hand but a small measuring cup can help tamp them down. Step 4. When the crumb crust if finished, place it in the fridge while you make the rest of the cheesecake.

    This collage shows the gelatin in the water and bloomed, the white chocolate melted as well as the red raspberry jam.

    Step 5. Add the clearjel to the water in a small bowl. Step 6. Immediately stir so the it's completely mixed in. Set aside. Step 7. Place the white chocolate and 1/4 cup of the cream in a medium bowl and microwave at half power for 1 1/2 minutes. If it looks melty and shiny, stir to melt the rest. If it doesn't melt all the way, return it to the microwave and give it a few seconds more. What you need to know about white chocolate is it burns and lumps up (siezes) very quickly. So low and slow is the mantra. This can also be done over a double boiler. If you are new to melting white chocolate, I would suggest you place the chocolate in a bowl and place that over another pan so the white chocolate bowl does not touch the water. Bring the water to a simmer (do not boil) and stir it when it looks melty. In any case remove it from the heat or microwave and let it cool to room temperature. Step 8. Place the red raspberry jam in a small bowl and microwave briefly about 40 to 50 seconds - stir to smooth out completely. Set aside.

    This collage shows the cream being whipped in the processor, followed by the cream cheese being beaten.

    Step 9. Add the heavy cream to the processor and process until it is very stiff around the edges of the bowl. There will be some unincorporated cream left in the middle of the bowl. Step 10. Transfer the whipped cream and the unincorporated cream to a bowl. Whisk the two together to a medium firm consistency. Set aside. Step 11. Without cleaning the processor bowl, place the softened cream cheese in the processor bowl. Step 12. Process the cream until smooth.

    This collage shows the gelatin has bloomed, the cheesecake bing mixed in the processor, the whipped cream being folded in and the cheesecake in the pan.

    Step 13. Add the gelatin to the cold water. Stir to make sure all of it is incorporated. Let it sit for a few minutes until it is firm. Step 14. Place the gelatin in the microwave for about 5 to 7 seconds to liquify it, It should be liquid but not hot. If it is, cool it before adding it with the other ingredients. Add it along with the melted white chocolate, condensed milk, and vanilla. Scrape down the processor bowl as needed so everything is smooth. Step 15. Fold the whipped cream into the cheesecake. Step 16. Remove the crust from the fridge. Pour half of the cheesecake over the crust.

    This colage shows half of the filling in the pan and half of the raspberry jam swirled over the cheesecake, the rest of the cheesecake poured over and the remainder of the jam randomly poured over the cheesecake and then everything swirled togethr.

    Step 17. Randomly spoon half of the jam over the cheesecake. Step 18. Add the remaining cheesecake filling to the pan. Step 19. Again, spoon the remaining jam over the cheesecake, Step 20. Swirl everything together reaching down to incorporate the bottom layering. Refrigerate overnight to set up.

    The berry topping collage shows the berries in a bowl, the sugar and clear jelly mixed and added to the water and lemon juice, then poured over the berries.

    Step 21. Cut the strawberries and half the blackberries if they are big. Combine in a big bowl. Step 22. Whisk together the sugar and instant clear jel. Step 23. Combine the water and lemon juice. Add the sugar and clear jel mixture, whisking well. Step 24. Add to the berries stirring well but gently so the fruit isn't broken up. Wait a few minutes until everything is thickened and pour over the cheesecake after it is released from the pan. Serve immediately or refrigerate several hours. The berry topping can be made a day ahead, refrigerated and added later to the cheesecake.

    Recipe faq's

    Can I freeze this no-bake white chocolate cheesecake?

    Yes. Freeze the cheesecake only without the topping until hard. Tightly wrap it and freeze up to 2 months. Thaw it overnight in the refrigerator and top it with the fruit before serving.

    What toppings go best with white chocolate cheesecake?

    White chocolate pairs beautifully with fresh raspberries, strawberries, blueberries, cherries, lemon curd, caramel sauce, chocolate curls, toasted coconut, or crushed pistachios. A tart fruit topping provides the perfect balance to the rich, creamy filling.

    Can I make this cheesecake ahead of time?

    Absolutely! In fact, this dessert is even better when made a day ahead. Preparing it 24 hours in advance gives the filling plenty of time to firm up and allows the flavors to develop, making it perfect for entertaining. Both the cheesecake and the filling can be made ahead. It is best to add the topping just before serving.

    Expert Tips

    • Have the cream cheese at room temperature or softened before processing.
    • Use real white chocolate not chips with no cocoa butter in the ingredients. The chips taste and melt differently,
    • Be sure to use very low heat when melting white chocolate as it tends to seize quickly under medium or high heat.
    • It is best to refrigerate the cheesecake overnight to allow it to set up properly,
    • Whip the cream to medium peaks. It will be difficult to fold in if beaten really stiff. See the photo as a guide.
    • I don't suggest a graham cracker crust because of it can overtake the delicate flavor of the white chocolate.
    • The red raspberry jam may be omitted if desired but it adds a lot of flavor.
    A whole cheesecake with the berry topping on a marble table.

    Other cheesecakes you may fancy

    • A slice of Pina Colada cheesecake with caramelized pineapple sits on a tan plate.
      Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake
    • Unbelievable Cheesecake
      Unbelievable Cheesecake Update!
    • A slice of the Apple Crisp Cheesecake sits on a tan oplate with a fork on the plate and a napkin in the background.
      Apple Crisp Cheesecake
    • A slice of the White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake sits on a china plate.
      White Chocolate Mocha Cheesecake

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake with a mixed berry topping sets on a white plate with a green charger and color flowered napkin.

    No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This No Bake White Chocolate Cheesecake with its mixed berry topping is easy to make and there's no baking - it's the perfect to ending to any meal.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Cheesecake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 378 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor
    • 9x 2 or 3" Cheesecake Pan or Springform mold
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Vanilla Wafer Crust

    • 1 1/3 cups vanilla wafer crumbs (170 grams)
    • 1/4 cup powdered sugar (35 grams)
    • 8 to 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (114 to 150 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    White Chocolate Cheesecake

    • 4 ounces white chocolate (114 grams)
    • 1/3 cup seedless red raspberry jam, optional
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 16 ounces cream cheese, softened (2 - 8 ounce pkg)
    • 1 14 ounce can sweetened condensed milk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 1/2 te teaspoon gelatin
    • 2 tablespoon water

    Berry Topping

    • 5 ounces blueberries (140 grams)
    • 5 ounces red raspberries (140 grams)
    • 5 ounces blackberries (140 grams)
    • 5 ounces strawberries (140 grams)
    • 2 + 1 tablespoons + 1 teaspoon Instant clear gel
    • 1/2 cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • 1/2 cup lemon juice, freshly squeezed
    • 1/3 cup water

    Instructions
     

    Vanilla Wafer Crusst

    • Spray a 9x2 or 3 inch cheesecake pan or springform mold with a non-stick baking release. Set aside,
    • Break the wafers up and place them in the bowl of a food processor, along with the powdered sugar. Process until finely ground.
    • Add 8 tablespoons of the melted butter and pulse to make crumbs. Take a little between you fingers. If it hold together an isn't dry, you're done. If it's at all crumbly or doesn't hold together, add the remainder of the butter.
    • Pour the crumbs into the prepared pan and even them out. Press the firmly into place. I use my hand to do this but a measuring cup is fine also. Refrigerate while preparing the cheesecake.

    White Chocolate Cheesecake

    • Place the white chocolate and 1/4 cup of the cream in a medium bowl and microwave at half power for a minute. If it looks melty and shiny, stir to melt the rest. If it doesn't melt all the way, return it to the microwave and give it a few seconds more.
      What you need to know about white chocolate is it burns and lumps up (siezes) very quickly. So low and slow is the mantra. Adding another liquid can also help. This can also be done over a double boiler. If you are new to melting white chocolate, I would suggest you place the chocolate in a bowl and place that over a pan so the white chocolate bowl does not touch the water. Bring the water to a simmer (do not boil) and stir it when it looks melty. In any case remove it from the heat or microwave and let it cool to room temperature.
    • Microwave the jam briefly and whisk it smooth. Set aside to cool.
    • Stir the instant clearjel into the water making sure they are completely combined. Set aside.
    • Wipe the bowl of the processor clean (no need to wash), Add the heavy cream and process until it is very stiff around the edges, There will be some unincorporated cream in the middle of the bowl.
    • Remove the cream and the unincorporated cream to a bowl. Whisk to combine the two. The cream should be medium stiff. If it isn't, whisk it a few times. Se aside.
    • Without wiping the bowl, add the softened cream cheese and process until smooth.
    • Microwave the clearjel until liquid - about 5 to 7 seconds. Do not get it hot but it has to be liquid. If it is hot, wait until it has cooled before continuing.
    • Add the cooled melted chocolate and clearjel, condensed milk, and vanilla. Process until smooth, scraping down as necessary.
      Fold the whipped cream into the cheesecake mixture.
    • Remove the crust from the fridge. Pour half of the mixture over the crust. With a spoon, randomly drop half of the jam over the filling in a circular pattern.
    • Pour the remainder of the cheesecake over the jam and repeat the with the remainder of the jam. Using a skewer, swirl the mixture together reaching to the bottom of the cheesecake.
    • Refrigerate overnight.

    Berry topping

    • Rinse all the fruit and dry with paper towels.
    • Cut the strawberries into bite size pieces. If the blackberries are large, cut them in half. Combine all the fruit in a large bowl and set aside.
    • Mix the sugar and the instant clearjel in a bowl. In a separate bowl, whisk together the water and lemon juice.
    • Whisk the sugar/clearjel mixture into the liquid until completely blended. Pour it over the fresh fruit and gently mix everything together. This can be made the day ahead, covered and refrigerated.

    Releasing the Cheesecake and Assembly

    • Have a fat can at the ready. A 28 ounce can is perfect. Go around the outside of the cheesecake pan with a hair blower set on high.  Place the cheesecake on the can and slide the side of the pan down. Smooth the side of the cheesecake with a spatula.
      After the side has been removed, place the cheesecake on a flat surface.  With a flat metal spatula, go under the crust to release it.  Place two pancake turners under the crust on either side and, lift up the cheesecake,  placing it on a board or serving plate.
    • Arrange the berries on top of the cheesecake to within about 1" of the edge. This can be done several hours ahead.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ____________________________________________
    Have the cream cheese at room temperature or softened before processing.
    Use real white chocolate not chips with no cocoa butter in the ingredients. The chips taste and melt differently,
    Be sure to use very low heat when melting white chocolate as it tends to seize quickly under medium or high heat. 
    It is best to refrigerate the cheesecake overnight to allow it to set up properly, 
    Whip the cream to medium peaks. It will be difficult to fold in if beaten really stiff. See the photo as a guide 
    I don't suggest a graham cracker crust because of it can overtake the delicate flavor of the white chocolate. 
    The red raspberry jam may be omitted if desired but it adds a lot of flavor.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 378kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 9gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 49mgSodium: 335mgPotassium: 247mgFiber: 2gSugar: 31gVitamin A: 585IUVitamin C: 19mgCalcium: 179mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Fresh Peach Desserts That Taste Like Summer

    Modified: Aug 2, 2025 · Published: Aug 2, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A parfait glass is filled with mascarpone filling, amaretti cookies, and fresh peaches with a fresh peach i the backgrond.

    Peaches are, without question, my favorite fruit. The moment I spot those first Georgia peaches in the market, I can barely contain my excitement — and every year when the last of the local crop disappears, I'm a little heartbroken. Over decades of baking, I've learned that the real secret isn't just adding sugar and calling it a day. It's about letting the peach be the star — reducing the sweetness so that fresh, straight-from-the-orchard flavor comes through in every single bite.

    A parfait glass is filled with mascarpone filling, amaretti cookies, and fresh peaches with a fresh peach i the backgrond.

    The recipes I'm sharing here run the full range, from a no-churn ice cream that comes together in ten minutes to a caramelized tart with enough wow factor to silence a table. You'll notice I reach for Amaretto often — it has a natural affinity with peaches that is simply hard to beat. I also rely on Instant ClearJel to keep fillings fresh-tasting without cooking the life out of the fruit. Whether you have an afternoon to spend or just an hour, there is something here for you. Don't let peach season slip by without making at least one of these.

    Dutch Peach Pie

    This is one of the most sensational tasting pies around, and I mean that sincerely. A flaky crust, ripe peaches lightly sweetened, and an easy crumb topping come together for the perfect bite every time. I've deliberately reduced the sugar so the full flavor of the peaches can shine through — because sometimes less really is more. 

    Dutch Peach Pie

    View post 

    Peach Crumb Coffee Cake

    A simple sour cream coffee cake topped with an uncooked peach filling and finished with loads of brown sugar crumbs — this is great any time of the day. The thick layer of peach filling requires no cooking because it's set with Instant ClearJel, which thickens without heat and keeps the fruit tasting exactly as it should. The crumbs alone are worth making this. 

    Peach Crumb Coffee Cake

    View post 

    Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp

    Roasted Peaches with Amaretti Crisp is one of those recipes where the topping is so good you'll want to put it on everything — and I mean that literally, because it works beautifully over other fruit and ice cream too. The amaretti cookies bring a sweet, crunchy contrast to the soft roasted peaches that is simply irresistible. A quick dip in boiling water makes peeling the peaches effortless, so nothing stands between you and getting this in the oven. 

    Roasted Peaches Ama

    View post 

    Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble

    Don't be put off by the several component parts — all of them can be made ahead and the tart assembled on the day of serving. From the press-in cookie crust to the creamy pastry cream to the intensely flavored caramelized peaches, every element earns its place. The brown sugar crumble made with almond paste is worth everything all by itself, and I've been told it's quite addictive as a snack. 

    Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble

    View post 

    Peach Amaretto Jam

    If you've never made jam before, this is the perfect place to start — no large pot of boiling water, no fussy canning process. I've reduced the sugar to let the peach flavor come through and added a bit of amaretto to enhance it beautifully. It's so versatile: swirl it into no-churn ice cream, spoon it over cream biscuits, or simply eat it by the spoonful. 

    Peach Amaretto Jam

    View post 

    Peach Pizza

    What a fantastic, eye-catching dessert this is for a summer dinner. Juicy peaches paired with a rich, buttery French pâte brisée crust and a tangy goat cheese filling — you are sure to be on the receiving end of some very happy kudos. It can be served warm or at room temperature, which makes it wonderfully easy to plan around. 

    Peach Pizza

    View post 

    Chilled Peach Soup

    Peaches have a natural affinity with white wine, and together they make this chilled soup a very interesting and elegant end to a summer meal. Blended with amaretto, honey, and vanilla, it is a make-ahead dessert that couldn't be simpler. Because peaches vary so much in sweetness, I always recommend starting with less sugar and tasting before you add more. 

    Chilled Peach Soup

    View post 

    No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream

    I'm an ice cream lover of the first degree, and this one takes all of ten minutes to put together. My homemade Peach Amaretto Jam gets swirled through a simple no-churn vanilla base for a frozen treat that needs no ice cream maker whatsoever. I've seen confirmed peach skeptics go back for several helpings — consider yourself warned. 

    No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream

    View post 

    Peachy Keen Mascarpone Parfait

    Peachy Keen Mascarpone Parfait is the kind of effortless summer dessert that looks far more impressive than the work it requires — and since it can be assembled the day before, you can spend your time actually enjoying the meal. Ripe peaches paired with creamy mascarpone and those wonderful amaretti cookies with their bitter almond edge make for a combination that is quietly spectacular. This one is a perfect way to close out a warm evening without turning on the oven. 

    Peachy Keen Mascarpone Parfait

    View post 

    Peach Sauce

    This Peach Sauce made with white wine and Amaretto is the kind of thing you'll want to keep in your refrigerator all summer long — ready to pour over ice cream, cake, or anything else that needs a little something extra. The wine and Amaretto give it a depth of flavor that plain sugared peaches simply can't match, and both Chardonnay and Pinot Grigio work beautifully here. It comes together quickly, which means more time enjoying peach season and less time standing over the stove. 

    Peach Sauce

    View post 

    All About Peaches Summers Sweet Spot

    All About Peaches: Summer's Sweet Spot is the post I wish I'd had when I first started working with this fruit — it covers everything from the difference between freestone and clingstone varieties to the best way to remove the skin without sacrificing any of that precious flesh. I'm particular about my peaches (Red Havens are my favorite, full stop), and knowing what you're actually buying at the market makes a real difference in how your recipes turn out. Consider this your essential guide before you start baking your way through the season. 

    All About Peaches Summers Sweet Spot

    View post 

    Enjoy one or more of these easy summer desserts as we go into the fall. Thanks for sharing the summer with me.

    No Oven? No Problem!

    Modified: Jul 16, 2025 · Published: Jul 17, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 3 Comments

    A slice of the Lemonade cake sits on a whit plate with a blueberry sauce.

    Ummmmm no bake desserts! After more than 25 years running a wholesale bakery, supplying hotels, caterers, and restaurants with desserts that had to be absolutely perfect every single time, I can tell you this: some of the most spectacular things ever to come out of my kitchen never saw the inside of an oven. Not once. The refrigerator and the food processor are wildly underestimated tools, and these recipes prove it.

    A slice of the Lemonade cake sits on a whit plate with a blueberry sauce.

    Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    From velvety cheesecakes that set up flawlessly without a water bath to creamy ice cream pies with crusts that stay pliable straight from the freezer, every one of these desserts delivers maximum flavor with minimal fuss. Whether you're trying to beat the summer heat, racing against the clock during the holidays, or just don't feel like turning on the oven — these are your recipes. And the compliments you'll get? Bask in their glory. Nobody needs to know how easy it really was.

    Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

    While it looks complex, this cheesecake is actually as easy as it gets. Peanuts, chocolate, and mini-marshmallows are stirred into a rich chocolate base made entirely in the processor — no water bath, no cracking, no fussing. Bask in the compliments and share the recipe if you feel like it. 

    Easy No Bake Rocky Road Cheesecake

    View post 

    Chocolate Coconut Tart

    Think Mounds Bar, but make it elegant. This Chocolate Coconut Tart layers cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream, and plenty of coconut into a chocolate crust — and not a single minute of oven time is required. The optional white chocolate swirl on top is the kind of finishing touch that makes people think you spent hours on it. 

    Chocolate Coconut Tart

    View post 

    Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake

    What if I told you this cool, creamy cheesecake comes together with no water bath, no eggs, and no condensed milk? Well, it can! The caramelized pineapple sauce that goes along with it is the final touch — though truth be told, you could eat that sauce by the spoonful all on its own. 

    Easy Pina Colada No Bake Cheesecake

    View post 

    Hazelnut Crunch Bars

    These Hazelnut Crunch Bars have a genuinely impressive backstory — born from a request by the Hyatt hotel and refined over decades into something truly spectacular. Milk chocolate, toasted hazelnuts, and rice krispies form the crunch base, which gets layered with caramel, a cloud-light homemade marshmallow, and a dark satin ganache finish. Not a single layer requires an oven, and yet the end result looks like it came straight out of a five-star pastry kitchen. 

    Hazelnut Crunch Bars

    View post 

    Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe

    Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie is exactly the kind of showstopper you want in your back pocket for summer — a no-churn peanut butter ice cream that's impossibly smooth, all packed into a chocolate rice crispy crust that stays pliable straight from the freezer. That texture contrast alone — crunchy crust against silky ice cream — is enough to make people think you really outdid yourself. Make it ahead, pull it out at the end of a BBQ, and watch it disappear. 

    Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe

    View post 

    Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe

    Banoffee Pie is one of those desserts that sounds impressive the moment you say it out loud — and this Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe absolutely delivers on that promise. We're talking a vanilla wafer crust, a quick toffee filling made from condensed milk, fresh bananas, chocolate mousse, Heath bar bits, and coffee whipped cream — all stacked up with zero oven time required. The toffee alone is worth the click, because I've figured out a much faster method than boiling a can for hours or waiting on the oven to do the work. 

    Amazing Banoffee Pie Recipe

    View post 

    No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts

    You won't believe how easy these are to make. A press-in chocolate crumb crust, homemade caramel, and the same truffle filling that was wildly popular at the bakery come together in six elegant little tarts that can be made ahead. Everyone will think you bought them at an upscale bakery — and you don't need to correct them. 

    No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts

    View post 

    Lemonade Cake With Blueberry Sauce

    Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce is the kind of showstopper that makes people stop mid-bite and ask for the recipe — tart lemon curd folded into whipped cream and meringue, poured over a vanilla wafer crust, with a deep purple blueberry sauce cascading down the pale yellow sides. Every component can be made ahead and assembled when you're ready, which means you can pull this off even on a busy day without breaking a sweat. And that blueberry sauce? You'll be making extra batches to spoon over pancakes and ice cream long after summer is over. 

    Lemonade Cake With Blueberry Sauce

    View post 

    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars

    These No Bake Peanut Butter Bars are exactly what they sound like: a chocolatey crust, a smooth, creamy peanut butter filling, and a chocolate top — layered up fast and gone even faster. If you're a Reese's fan, consider this the upgraded version you didn't know you needed. Easy enough to make with the kids, impressive enough to bring to an outdoor dinner — they really do work anywhere, anytime. 

    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars

    View post 

    Baileys Pi Day Pie

    Baileys Pi Day Pie is the kind of dessert that earns its own occasion — a deeply chocolatey crust, a creamy chocolate layer, and a white chocolate coffee Baileys mousse all piled high with billows of whipped cream. The whole thing can be made ahead and frozen, which means you're basically just pulling perfection out of the freezer when the time comes. If you're a Baileys fan, this one is absolutely calling your name. 

    Baileys Pi Day Pie

    View post 

    Macadamia And Coconut Tart

    This Macadamia and Coconut Tart has a backstory I love — it started as a white chocolate truffle recipe developed for a client during the truffle craze of the late '80s, and it was so good I turned it into a tart. Toasted macadamia nuts, toasted coconut, cream of coconut, and a whisper of dark rum all folded into a white chocolate truffle filling in a simple graham cracker crust — no oven required. The only thing standing between you and this dessert is making sure you don't overheat the white chocolate, and I'll walk you through exactly how to handle that. 

    Macadamia And Coconut Tart

    View post

    Modern Meringue Made Easy

    Modified: Jul 13, 2025 · Published: Jul 14, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 19 Comments

    A whisk is upside down holding stiffly beaten meringue in a sharp peak.

    While I have titled this Modern Meringue Made Easy, this method has been around for a while but no one seems to be picking up on it. We used this at the bakery with great success. No more standing patiently waiting (or not) spooning sugar in by the dribbles.

    This is going to be a deep, deep dive into meringue - all kinds of meringues for cookies, cake layers, to fold into other ingredients, decorations, topping pies and as a frosting for cakes. Once you have a thorough understanding of making meringues success is at your doorstep.

    "Practical, usable advice/recipe! As always, Helen is a wonderful teacher! Thank you for the confidence to try hard things. :) — Chris"

    A whisk is upside down holding stiffly beaten meringue in a sharp peak.

    I'm including some tips that will help ensure a successful outcome with a few simple ingredients.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Meringue

    A basic meringue consists of 3 ingredients. Egg whites, fresh or fresh whites that have been frozen and thawed in the fridge. Do not use egg whites in cartons. They are pasteurized and the meringue will not beat up as high or be as stable.

    Baker's sugar or granulated sugar. More on that below.

    An acid which will help stabilize the mixture. Cream of Tartar is usually recommend but lemon juice or even white vinegar will work. Cream of tartar is preferred as it doesn't add liquid to the whites. The acid helps the coagulate and helps the proteins from tightening too much. A meringue can be made without any acid but adding acid ensures that it will be successful.

    Other add ins can be finely ground nuts, cocoa, ground up freeze dried fruit, vanilla, almond or other extracts.

    Nutted Meringue

    Dacquoise is a type of meringue that has finely ground nuts folded into it. It is also the name of a dessert. Broyage, Japonaise, and Nutted Meringues are all the same thing.  Broyage is the Swiss name for nutted meringue and Japonaise is the French word for Japan – I have no idea how this came about.  What I do know is they are all delicious.

    The nuts should be toasted and cooled. Placing them in the processor with a little sugar to prevent a paste from forming makes easy work out of finely chopping them.

    If piping, use a larger, open star tip to prevent the nuts from getting clogged in a type B tip.

    Baker's Sugar vs. Granulated Sugar

    Granulated sugar takes longer and does not always dissolve completely in the egg whites. This is crucial to the successful out come of meringue.

    Baker’s Sugar is a staple in bakeries.  It is a professional-grade ingredient featuring smaller, uniform granules that dissolve quickly. It is highly prized and used in baking because it improves the creaming process with with butter or when combining eggs or yolks with sugar. It creates stable air bubbles for higher volume, and yields a moist, finer cake. Egg whites in particular, especially for meringues, call for superfine or baker’s sugar.  

    As a super-fine granulated sugar, the tiny crystals blend quickly and seamlessly into batters, mousses, and meringues, ensuring a consistent caramelization and a smoother texture.

    It is simply granulated sugar that has been ground very, very fine so it dissolves quicker and easier.  While it can be hard to find in grocery stores and is expensive, it's a cinch to make at home. 

    Just place granulated sugar in a processor bowl and process 10 to 20 seconds until very, very fine.  I process a 4 pound bag of sugar (not all at once) and keep it in a container so I have it whenever I need it. That's so much easier than doing it every time.

    Baker's sugar weighs 200 grams per cup or 7 ounces, the same as granulated sugar.

    Separating the Eggs

    One of the most revered rules for meringues is that not a spec of egg yolk must be present in the whites. While this is preferable, a spec is fine. It might take longer for the meringue to reach a stiff peak but it will get there.

    When separating eggs, it is easiest done when they are cold. Divide each egg into a separate bowl before adding it to the mixing bowl. That way, if the egg doesn't separate well, you haven't ruined the entire batch. While on the subject of separating eggs, I know recipes tout separating eggs using your hand. I don't adhere to this method because there is often natural oil on hands that can affect the outcome. And it seems unhygienic to me.

    Room Temperature or Cold Egg Whites

    There is some controversy over whether egg whites should be room temperature or cold when whipping. Either way works but there are differences.

    Room temperature egg whites whip up a bit faster but with bigger air bubbles which can break more easily when folding in ingredients. If the egg whites are cold, the air bubbles are smaller making for a firmer meringue in which the air bubbles stay intact better, everything else being equal. At the bakery and for home cooking, I am in the beat them cold camp.

    Flavoring and Coloring Meringue

    Extracts, oils and powders can all be used for flavoring. However when they are added is important.

    Extracts and powders can be added initially. However, oils must be added at the end of beating the meringues when they are high and stable or the oil will prevent the egg whites from expanding.

    Coloring should always be added at the last. Gel colors should be used as liquid colorings, particularly dark ones, can add too much liquid into the beaten whites, deflating them and make them too soft to hold an edge.

    Drying the Meringues

    Meringues are always dried on very low heat (200°F to 225°F) as they are being dried out not baked. Some recipes call for leaving the meringues in the oven overnight but with the proper proportions of sugar to egg white, I haven't found that to be necessary.

    Where and How to use Meringue

    • A crisp meringue can be used for cookies or cake layers such as the Marjolaine, Daquoise with Raspberry Mousse. and Meringue Shells. This is also the meringue used for one of Australia's most famous desserts, the Pavlova.
    • A soft meringue can top a Lemon Meringue Pie, or Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie with billows of toasted meringue.
    • Medium meringues are most often used to fold into other mixtures such as cakes or mousses. Think of sponges, such as my Lemon Butter Sponge, Orange Chiffon Cake, Coconut Cream Cake featuring the white chiffon, and the Double Chocolate Mousse Cake featuring a chocolate chiffon cake
    • Marshmallow Cream which is a form of meringue can be used multiple ways including as a finish on the How to Make a S'mores tart and Chocolate Marshmallow Cream Horns
    • A stiff meringue can be used to finish a cake as in the Triple Lemon Cake - Revised, the Lemon Meringue Cake and the Individual Island Baked Alaska.
    • Marshmallows are another form of Meringue and are featured in the Simple Salted Peanut Chews and Hazelnut Crunch Bars
    • Marshmallow Fondant which combines marshmallow cream and powdered sugar.
    • The classic Buche de Noel features meringue piped into the shape of mushrooms as an important part of the decoration.

    Types of Meringues

    French Meringue

    This is considered the easiest to make as it combines egg whites, sugar and cream of tartar. Depending upon the stiffness of the meringue being used it can make cookies, top pies and tarts and be used for meringue shells or pavlova.

    Italian Meringue

    This meringue is considered to be the most stable of all. A sugar syrup is brought to 250°F then is slowly poured into the egg whites that have been beaten to the soft peak state. The meringue is then beaten to cool it and used as directed.

    After it is beaten until cooled, if butter is added a bit at a time it becomes Italian Buttercream. This the buttercream we used for the majority of our wedding cakes as it can hold crisp edges when piped and, in my opinion, the best there is.

    Swiss Meringue

    For this meringue the egg whites and sugar are placed in a mixing bowl. The mixing bowl is placed over simmering water and the mixture is brought to 160°F. At this point the sugar has liquified into the egg whites. The bowl is place on the mixer and then beaten until cooled and onto whatever stiffness is desired.

    Swiss Meringue becomes Swiss Buttercream by adding softened butter a little at a time until it is a smooth, light and can easily be piped.

    Can Meringue be Over beaten

    While I've seen many articles saying it can't, it indeed can be over beaten resulting in a a grainy, dull mixture that loses its glossy sheen. Properly whipped meringue should have stiff peaks but remain shiny, moist, and smooth.

    How to Tell When Crisp Meringues are Done

    Crisp meringues such as cookies and cake layers will be light in color. In addition, they will be airy and very light in weight. In addition, they can be lifted easily from the parchment paper. If they don't remove cleanly, bake a little longer and test until they do.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The three ingredients for meringue are baker's sugar, egg whites and cream of tartar

    FRONT ROW: Cream of tartar

    BACK ROW: Baker's sugar, egg whites

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for Modern Meringue Made EAsy shows the granulated sugar in the processor, then processed into Baker's sugar as well as the egg whites, baker' sugar and cream of tartar in a mxing bowl and finally being whipped .

    Step 1. Place granulated sugar in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process for 20 to 30 seconds until noticeably ground smaller into baker's sugar. Step 3. Place the egg whites, baker's sugar and cream of tartar in the bowl of a mixer. Step 4. Start whipping on medium low and as the volume increases raise the speed until it is maxed out.

    he last collages shows the meringue beaten to soft, medium an d stiff peaks as well as being added to another mixture ready to be folded in.

    Step 5. This meringue has been beaten to soft peaks. The peak will droop or curl under. Step 6. This has been whipped to medium peaks where they are stiffer . Step 7 This meringue has been beaten to stiff peaks where the peaks are noticeably stiffer and stand straight up. Step 8. The medium stiff peaks are added to a cake batter to be folded in.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why are there drops of liquid on my baked meringues?

    This happens when the sugar isn’t fully dissolved before the meringue kisses are baked. This is called “weeping”. The sugar grains melt in the oven and draw moisture from the meringue, forming beads of liquid.

    Why are my meringue cookies chewy?

    There are 2 main reasons. The first is they have been underbaked. To correct this, test one when you think they should be done. If they are not perfectly dry inside, give them ore time in the oven.

    The second reason is humidity. Meringues need to be made on dry days with very little humidity. Sugar is hydroscopic which means it attracts water which will prevent the meringue from whipping up properly and drying in the oven.

    Of the three meringues, French, Swiss and Italian which is the easiest to make?

    The French meringue which uses just egg whites, granulated or preferably baker's sugar and cream of tartar is the easiest by far. There is no heating the egg whites and sugar as in the Swiss meringue or using a hot sugar syrup as for the Italian meringue.

    Storage

    After drying the meringues, cool them and then store them in an airtight container where they can last for weeks.

    Expert Tips

    • Always use a clean, grease free, glass or stainless steel bowl. If in doubt wash it with warm. soapy water, dry it and your. ready to go. Do not use plastic bowls as they may have nicks in them that houses oil or grease.
    • Avoid humid days. Humidity ruins meringue because sugar is hygroscopic On rainy or muggy days, the meringue acts like a sponge, drawing in airborne water. This extra moisture prevents stiff peaks from forming, makes the texture sticky, and causes the finished meringue to soften, collapse, or "weep". 
    • If you still want to bake on a damp day, consider these tips
    • Add a stabilizer: Mix 1 teaspoon of cornstarch into your sugar to absorb excess moisture.
    • Use baker's sugar: It dissolves faster, creating a stronger, more stable structure before the humidity interferes.
    • Bake low and slow: You may need to dry the meringue out in the oven for longer at a low temperature to counteract the moisture in the air.
    • Store properly: Once cool, store the meringues in an airtight container immediately. 
    • There is myth that you can't over beat egg whites including meringue.Yes you can. The meringue will then be dull and grainy instead of glossy and smooth
    • Contrary to popular belief, a spec of egg yolk in the whites will not doom the meringue. I am not talking about a quarter of a teaspoon - just a spec. it may take a bit longer to reach it's volume but it will get there.
    • The sugar must be dissolved completely for a meringue to be successful which is why baker's sugar is your best friend here.
    • Although every recipe I have looked at online or in a book, tells you to use room temperature egg whites. I prefer to use cold egg whites because they beat up with smaller, tighter bubbles which are less prone to breaking when folding into another mixture.
    • The Triple Lemon Cake consisting of a yellow crumb coated single layer cake finished with white meringue in the middle
      Triple Lemon Cake - Revised
    • A meringue topped coconut cream pie in a glass pie pan with plates and forks beside it.
      Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference
    • Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie
      Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie
    • A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.
      HASELNUSSMAKRONEN -German Hazelnut Macaroons

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A whisk is upside down holding stiffly beaten meringue in a sharp peak.

    Modern Meringue Made Easy

    Helen S. Fletcher
    We used this method at the bakery with great success. No more standing patiently waiting (or not) spooning sugar in by the dribbles.
    5 from 6 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Baker's Sugar

    • granulated sugar, any amount

    Basic Meringue

    • 4 large egg whites (128 grams)
    • 1 cup baker's sugar (200 grams)
    • 1/2 teaspoon cream of tartar

    Instructions
     

    Baker's Sugar

    • Place granulated sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process for 20 to 30 seconds until noticeably ground smaller into baker's sugar.

    Basic Meringue

    • Combine the egg whites, cream of tartar and all of the sugar in the bowl of a mixer. I prefer a stand mixer but a hand mixer will also work. It will just take longer.
    • Start beating on medium low. When they become foamy, raise the medium high and then to high, beating until they are stiff.
    • This can be used to pipe cookies, top a pie, marshmallows or marshmallow cream or wherever a recipe calls for a stiff meringue.
    • Follow the directions in the individual recipes.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    __________________________________________________
    Always use a clean, grease free, glass or stainless steel bowl. If in doubt wash it with warm. soapy water, dry it and your. ready to go. Do not use plastic bowls as they may have nicks in them that houses oil or grease.
    Avoid humid days. Humidity ruins meringue because sugar is hygroscopic On rainy or muggy days, the meringue acts like a sponge, drawing in airborne water. This extra moisture prevents stiff peaks from forming, makes the texture sticky, and causes the finished meringue to soften, collapse, or "weep". 
    If you still want to bake on a damp day, consider these tips
    Add a stabilizer: Mix 1 teaspoon of cornstarch into your sugar to absorb excess moisture.
    Use baker's sugar: It dissolves faster, creating a stronger, more stable structure before the humidity interferes. 
    Bake low and slow: You may need to dry the meringue out in the oven for longer at a low temperature to counteract the moisture in the air.
    Store properly: Once cool, store the meringues in an airtight container immediately. 
    There is myth that you can't over beat egg whites including meringue.Yes you can. The meringue will then be dull and grainy instead of glossy and smooth
    Contrary to popular belief, a spec of egg yolk in the whites will not doom the meringue. I am not talking about a quarter of a teaspoon - just a spec. it may take a bit longer to reach it's volume but it will get there.
    The sugar must be dissolved completely for a meringue to be successful which is why baker's sugar is your best friend here. 
    Although every recipe I have looked at online or in a book, tells you to use room temperature egg whites. I prefer to use cold egg whites because they beat up with smaller, tighter bubbles which are less prone to breaking when folding into another mixture. 
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    My Favorite Fruit Desserts-Take your Pick

    Modified: Jun 29, 2025 · Published: Jun 30, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the blueberry Pizza sits on a white plate with a lemon slice and the pizza in the background.

    Fruit desserts are some of the most rewarding things you can make. When the fruit is perfectly ripe and in season, it practically does all the work for you. Over the years I've found that the simplest preparations are often the most delicious. From cupcakes to tarts to meringue shells filled with fresh fruit or a fruit pizza, to a brownie and an individual pineapple upside down cake, there is something here for everyone. So let's get to it!

    A slice of the blueberry Pizza sits on a white plate with a lemon slice and the pizza in the background.

    Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust

    Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe

    These Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes deliver strawberry flavor in not one but two ways — fresh pureed strawberries in the batter and intense freeze-dried strawberries whipped into a creamy buttercream frosting. The real fun is the surprise tucked inside, and the tip about skipping the jumbo pan size so you get cake, filling, and frosting in every single bite is exactly the kind of practical advice that makes a recipe worth reading. If you love strawberries, this one is going to be hard to resist. 

    Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe

    View post 

    Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

    If you've never worked with rhubarb before, this is exactly where to start — it's almost impossible to go wrong. Think of it as a strawberry rhubarb pie with no crust to worry about. It goes together in minutes and heralds the beginning of spring in the most delicious way possible. 

    Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

    View post 

    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

    This Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart looks like something you'd order at a fancy restaurant, but I can assure you it's quick to make and that it's genuinely easy to pull off — no baking required, just a little planning ahead. A chocolate graham cracker crust gets layered with a thin ribbon of chocolate raspberry truffle filling, then topped with a vivid crimson raspberry curd and swirls of whipped cream. Make the curd up to a week in advance (or freeze it), and you've got a stunning summer dessert that's done before your guests even arrive. 

    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

    View post 

    Meringue Shells

    These Meringue Shells are the kind of dessert that looks far more impressive than the effort involved — just three ingredients and a low oven, and you end up with featherlight, melt-in-your-mouth cups ready to hold whatever you dream up, from lemon curd to ice cream to fresh fruit. Make them ahead, fill them when you're ready, and watch everyone at the table wonder how you pulled it off. 

    Meringue Shells

    View post 

    Blueberry Lemon Pizza In A Brioche Crust

    This Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust is the kind of dessert that sounds impressive but is genuinely designed to make your life easier — the crust can be made and frozen ahead, the blueberries can be prepped days in advance, and the only thing that actually needs baking is the crust itself. Mascarpone, lemon, and fresh blueberries on a buttery brioche base is already a winning combination, but don't skip the reduced balsamic drizzle — it makes a world of difference. If you love a good Danish or fruited coffeecake, this one is going to feel like a natural fit. 

    Blueberry Lemon Pizza In A Brioche Crust

    View post 

    Easy Almond Raspberry Tart

    This Easy Almond Raspberry Tart is the kind of recipe that makes you look far more accomplished than the effort deserves — and that's exactly the point. The no-roll crust gets pressed straight into the pan, the filling comes together in a food processor, and the whole thing goes into the oven looking like something you'd find at a proper patisserie. The fact that it was a staple at catering events and banquets tells you everything you need to know about how reliably impressive it is. 

    Easy Almond Raspberry Tart

    View post 

    Banana Split Cupcakes

    These Banana Split Cupcakes take everything you love about the classic ice cream treat — pineapple, strawberry, chocolate — and pack it into a single handheld dessert that might actually be better than the original. I use Texas-sized muffin cups specifically so each cupcake can hold a generous pineapple filling, topped with a strawberry buttercream and a drizzle of chocolate, and that kind of thoughtful detail is exactly what separates a good recipe from a great one. If you're looking for something that feels a little festive and fun without being complicated, this one belongs on your list. 

    Banana Split Cupcakes

    View post 

    Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

    These Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes are the kind of individual dessert that makes everyone at the table feel a little special — glistening caramelized fruit over a fluffy, featherlight cake that promises to stay moist for days. Made in eight-ounce ramekins, they flip out into an impressive presentation that looks far more difficult than it actually is. Whether you're serving them at a backyard barbecue or a dinner party, this is one of those recipes that earns you way more credit than you deserve. 

    Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

    View post 

    Rhubarb Cream Tart With Strawberry Sauce

    This Rhubarb Cream Tart with Strawberry Sauce is a genuinely clever no-bake dessert that comes together without ever turning on the oven — the crust is simply pressed vanilla wafers, and the rhubarb filling pairs beautifully with a bright strawberry sauce. I have been making this one since the early days of writing about desserts, which tells you something about how good it is. If you love rhubarb, this elegant tart is the kind of recipe that looks far more impressive than the effort required. 

    Rhubarb Cream Tart With Strawberry Sauce

    View post 

    Strawberry Brownies

    These Strawberry Brownies are the kind of unexpected treat that stops people mid-bite and makes them ask for the recipe. They're chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and layered with real strawberry flavor through a strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze — a combination that sounds a little surprising until you try it. They're also easy to make ahead and travel well, which makes them just as practical as they are pretty. 

    Strawberry Brownies

    View post 

    I trust you'll find something here that will make your summer even better.

    Truly Amazing S'Mores Ice Cream Cake

    Modified: Jun 22, 2025 · Published: Jun 23, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    The S'Mores Ice Cream Cake sits on a gold rimmed cake plate with shards of graham cracker crumbs and chocolate around it,

    I don't take the word amazing lightly, but this S'Mores Ice Cream Cake truly is. Layers of homemade marshmallow cream (it's really, really, easy to make), milk chocolate ganache, a graham cracker crust and vanilla ice cream come together for this very special treat.

    The S'Mores Ice Cream Cake sits on a gold rimmed cake plate with shards of graham cracker crums and chocolate around it,

    It is important that each layer to be frozen before the next is put on. That keeps the layers distinct. The first time I made this I didn't freeze them and the layering didn't show up. They just kind of sank into each other.

    For another great ice cream recipe, check out No Churn Chocolate Pretzel Caramel Ice Cream.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Notes on the Marshmallow Cream

    This is easy and so much better than the bought version. It can be made a week or more ahead and either refrigerated or frozen. I love to have it around for all kinds of toppings.

    The meringue is made using my modern method that combines the egg whites, vanilla extract and all of the sugar in the mixing bowl at once. Then beat it and you're done. No standing around and slowly adding sugar. Using baker's sugar which is a more finely ground granulated sugar really helps here. It is easily made - just see my post, Three Easy Sugar Fixes.

    If it is over beaten and too stiff, it can be easily brought back to a creamy, spreadable version by just adding water very little at a time (about a teaspoon) until a smooth version is obtained. However, it still needs to be firm.

    Milk Chocolate Ganache

    I highly recommend using milk chocolate and not a more robust dark chocolate. The dark chocolate can easily overtake the marshmallow cream and vanilla ice cream. The milk chocolate ganache will look dark when made and it is more in keeping with the original s'mores.

    The Graham Cracker Crust

    Depending upon which brand of graham crackers you use, they can absorb more or less butter. When combining the crumbs and butter, leave a couple of tablespoons of the melted butter out. Mix everything with a fork and then take a small amount between two fingers and press it together. If it sticks together well fine. If not, add more butter.

    If not enough butter is used, the crumbs will crumble when you cut the cake.

    Why this S'mores Ice Cream Cake Works

    All of the classic version components of the beloved s'mores are encapsulated in this cake. There are three layers of graham crackers, two layers of marshmallow cream, two layers of milk chocolate ganache and in the middle a thick layer of vanilla ice cream.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    The ingredients for the graham cracker crust are unsalted butter, graham crackers and powdered sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter

    BACK ROW: Graham crackers, powdered sugar

    Marshmallow Cream

    The ingrdients for the marshmallow cream are granulated sugar, egg whites and cream of tartar

    FRONT ROW: Cream of Tartar

    BACK ROW: Baker's sugar, egg whites

    Milk Chocolate Ganache and Ice Cream

    The ingredients for the milk chocolate ganache and ice cream shows the milk chocolate, heavy cream and vanilla ice cream.

    FRONT ROW: Milk Chocolate, heavy cream

    BACK ROW: Vanilla Ice Cream

    Key Ingredients

    • Different brands of graham crackers absorb butter on a more or less basis. Add all but 2 tablespoons of melted butter, stir then test to see if they stick together by taking a small amount and pressing them together. If they don't add more of the butter.
    • Be sure to use the baker's sugar that is easily made at home.
    • I prefer beating my egg whites cold as opposed to room temperature. In this case it doesn't matter because of the hot syrup.
    • Any good vanilla ice cream will do.
    • I use Trader Joe's Milk Chocolate Pound Plus. it is a Belgian chocolate and is very reasonably priced for a quality product.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Graham Cracker Crust

    It is important that each of the component parts be made before starting. For the best looking ice cream cake, freeze each layer before applying the next one.

    the first collage shows the graham crackers and powdered sugar in the processor bowl, then processed to crumbs, the butter add and then puslsed in.

    Step 1. Break up the graham crackers and place them in the bowl of a processor along with the powdered sugar. Step 2. Process to make fine crumbs. Step 3. Add all but 2 tablespoons of melted butter and pulse to make the crust. Take a small amount of the crumbs and press them together between your fingers. If they stick together that's fine, if not add the remaining butter.

    Marshmallow Cream

    The collage for the marshmallow cream shows the corn srup, sugar and water i a saucepan, brought to a boil the egg whites, all the sugar and vanilla in a mixing bowl and beaten to form marshmallow cream.

    Step 5. Place the corn syrup water, and 1/2 cup sugar in a medium size saucepan. Step. 6. Bring to a rolling boil and wash down the sides with pastry brush dipped in cold water. Step 7. Place the egg whites, all of the sugar and vanilla in a mixing bowl. Starting on low to medium low, beat until it becomes foamy. Raise the speed to medium and finally to high. Beat until the stiff but not overly stiff. Set aside.

    Milk Chocolate Ganache

    This collages shows the Trader Joe milk chocolate block, the chocolate chopped along with the heavy cream, the two in a medium size bowl, heated and stirred smooth,

    Step 9. This is a pound plus of Trader Joe's milk chocolate bar. Step 10. Chop the chocolate finely. Step 11. Place the chocolate and heavy cream in a microwave safe bowl. Microwave on half power for about 2 minutes. Let it sit for several minutes. Step 12. Stir it until it is smooth. If there are still chocolate bits that are not melted, return it to the microwave for 10 seconds or so. Alternatively, Place the bowl over a pan of simmering water. Do not let it touch the bottom of the bowl. When you can see the chocolate beginning to melt stir it until it is smooth. Remove it from over the heat and let it cool to room temperature.

    Assembly

    This collage shows the interior of the pan wrapped in parchment, the graham cracker bottom crust, the edges being attached to the edge of the pan with a spoon and the consistency of the marshmallow cream in a bowl.

    Step 13. Wrap the interior of a 9x5x4" loaf pan with parchment paper in both directions. Spray the interior with a non-stick baking release. I taped mine down to keep them out of the way as I filled the pan. Step 14. Pat the first layer of the crust firmly into the pan. Using a soup spoon, press the edge of the crust firmly against the side of the pan. Freeze it for 20 minutes or until rock hard. Step 16. The consistency of the marshmallow cream should be smooth and spreadable but still firm. If it is too stiff, stir in water no more than a teaspoon at a time until it is.

    This collage shows the marshmallow cream on top of the bottom crust, spread out, the chocolate ganache on top of the marshmallow and the ice cream on top of the ganache,

    Step 17. Add the marshmallow cream on top of the crust. Step 18. Spread it out evenly. Step 19. If the ganache is too thick, microwave it briefly so it can be spread over the marshmallow. Step 20. The ice cream needs to sit at room temperature for 10 to 15 minutes so it will spread evenly. Spread it over the ganache.

    The last collage shows the middle layer of graham cracker crumb, a second layer of marshmallow  cream, then the ganache and finally the last layer of graham cracker crumbs.

    Step 21. Spread out the middle layer of crumbs. Step 22. I forgot to photograph the second layer of marshmallow cream so used the first picture in its place. Step 23. Spread the second layer of ganache over the marshmallow and then the last layer of graham cracker crumbs. Freeze until hard. To release, go around the outside of the pan with a blow drier to warm up the edges. Turn the pan upside down on a serving plate or cake board and pull the pan straight up. Remove the paper and you're ready to go.

    Recipe FAQ's

    Does the S'mores Ice Cream Cake use marshmallows and graham crackers?

    Yes, to both. Marshmallow cream replaces the marshmallows but it is the same thing just in a different form.

    How do I keep the ice cream cake from melting while assembling?

    Each layer needs to be frozen before the next one is put on.

    Can other flavors of ice cream be used?

    Sure. Vanilla is the classic but as long as you have the marshmallow cream, chocolate ganache, and graham crackers whose to say it's not a S'mores?

    Expert Tips

    • Make sure the milk chocolate ganache, the marshmallow cream and the graham cracker crumbs are all ready before you start this.
    • Cover the crumbs tightly when not using so they don't dry out. If the crumbs seem a bit dry between layers, microwave them for about 10 to 12 seconds to loosen the butter back up.
    • For the best look, freeze between adding the layers. It usually takes 20 to 30 minutes to freeze depending upon the freezer.
    The S'Mores Ice Cream Cake sits on a gold rimmed cake plate with shards of graham cracker crumbs and chocolate around it,

    Here's a few more wonderful frozen treats

    • A Nutella Ice Cream Square sits on a w hite plate with more squares behind it and a nutella jar to the side.
      Nutella Ice Cream Squares
    • A slice of the Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie sits on a clear plate over a lattice trivet with the pie in the background and a glass of ice tea nearby .
      Peanut Butter Ice Cream Pie Recipe
    • This Caramel Hot Fudge Sundae sits in a clear glass with a container with a scoop of vanilla ice cream with a cherry on top.
      Caramel Hot Fudge Brownie Sundae
    • Caramel Cone Ice Cream
      Caramel Cone Ice Cream ala Häagen-Dazs®

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    The S'Mores Ice Cream Cake sits on a gold rimmed cake plate with shards of graham cracker crumbs and chocolate around it,

    Truly Amazing S'Mores Ice Cream Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Layers of homemade marshmallow cream (it's really, really, easy to make), milk chocolate ganache, a graham cracker crust and vanilla ice cream come together for this very special treat.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Freezing time between layers + overnight 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
    Course Ice Cream
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 334 kcal

    Equipment

    • Thermometer
    • Mixer
    • 9x5 loaf pan
    • Scale
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • 1 1/3 cups graham cracker crumbs (170 grams)
    • 1/2 cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
    • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (150 grams)

    Marshmallow Ccream

    • 1/3 cup water
    • 1 1/4 cups corn syrup
    • 3/4 cup baker's sugar, divided (150 grams)
    • 4 large egg whites ((130 ounces)
    • 2 tablespoons vanilla

    Milk Chocolate Ganache and Ice Cream

    • 300 grams milk chocolate (10 1/2 ounces)
    • 3/4 cup heavy cream
    • 3 cups vanilla ice cream, purchased

    Instructions
     

    • It is important to have the graham cracker crust, marshmallow cream, and the milk chocolate ganache made before starting. Granulated sugar may be substituted for the baker's sugar but it may take longer to dissolve.

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • Place the graham crackers and powdered sugar in the bowl of a processor. Process until the crumbs are fine. Alternatively, place the graham crackers in a plastic bag and beat them with a rolling pin to make the crumbs. Make sure they are fine. Transfer them to a bowl, add the powdered sugar and continue as below.
    • Pour all but 2 tablespoons of the melted butter over the crumbs and pulse to mix thoroughly. Take a small amount of the crumbs and press them between your fingers. If they stick well, fine. If they don't, add the remaining butter. Cover tightly when not using.

    Marshmallow Cream

    • To easily make baker's sugar, please see Three Easy Sugar Fixes.
    • This the modern way to make meringue. No more slowly adding sugar. We used this at the bakery and it is so much easier. I use egg whites when they are cold.
    • In a medium saucepan, bring the water, corn syrup and 1/2 cup sugar (100 grams), to a hard rolling boil. Wash down the sides of the saucepan with a pastry brush (not plastic) dipped in cold water. Continue boiling until a thermometer reaches 246°F.
    • While the syrup is coming to a boil, immediately place the egg whites, remaining 1/4 cup sugar (50 grams), and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Beat until soft peaks form. If the meringue reaches this point first, lower the speed to low but keep the meringue moving.
    • When the syrup reaches 246°F, with the mixer speed at medium low to medium, slowly pour the syrup into the egg whites. Try to aim for between the edge of the bowl and the beaters so it goes into the whites. Beat until stiff. Set aside.

    Milk Chocolate Ganache

    • Chop the chocolate finely and place in a microwave bowl. Pour the cream over it and microwave at 50% power. Stir until smooth. if some of the chocolate is not melted, return the bowl to the microwave and heat for 15 to 20 seconds more. When it is smooth, set it aside.

    Assembly

    • Freeze each of the layers before adding the next one. It took 20 to 30 minutes in my freezer. However, different freezers may take shorter or longer to freeze. This is important to keep the layers from sinking into each other.
    • Wrap the inside of the 9x5" loaf pan in both directions with parchment paper. Spray the paper with a non-stick baking release. I taped mine down to the outside of the pan because it gets in the way of the layering.
    • There will be 3 layers of the crust. Distribute 120 grams of crumbs evenly over the bottom of the pan. Press them firmly into the bottom. Using a large spoon, seal the edge of the crumbs to the pan by pressing them against the sides of the pan. Freeze. If the crumbs have stiffened too much while waiting, microwave each portion for 10 to 12 seconds to loosen the butter.
    • The marshmallow cream needs to spread smoothly. If the marshmallow cream is too stiff, stir in water a teaspoon at a time until it is. However, it should still be firm.
    • There will be 2 layers of marshmallow cream. You will have left over marshmallow cream. Add 115 grams of marshmallow cream over the frozen crust. Freeze.
    • There will be 2 layers of ganache. If the milk chocolate ganache has stiffened too much, microwave it for 10 to 15 seconds or until it can be easily spread. Using 200 grams or 3/4 cup spread it over the frozen marshmallow cream. Freeze.
    • Remove the ice cream from the freezer and allow it to soften to the point it can be spread. Do not let it become liquid. Spread 3 cups over the ganache. Freeze.
    • If the crumbs have stiffened too much while waiting, microwave each portion for 10 to 12 seconds to loosen the butter. Spread another 120 grams of the graham crackers over the ice cream, patting firmly in place. Freeze.
    • Spread the remainder of the ganache over the ice cream Freeze.
    • Spread 115 grams marshmallow over the ganache. Freeze
    • Spread the remainder of the graham cracker crumbs over the ganache and pat them in firmly. Freeze overnight.
    • To release the ice cream cake, turn it upside down on a cake board or other flat plate. Use a hair blower on high go around the edges and bottom of the pan. Don't just whiz over it but don't linger either or the edges and bottom will melt. Lift the pan off and remove the parchment. Return to the freezer to freeze the sides and bottom. If it doesn't release easily, heat it gently a bit more.
    • Store in the freezer. I was able to cut it directly from the freezer. When you get to the ice cream, You will need to apply more pressure.
    • This serves 10.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________
    Different brands of graham crackers absorb butter on a more or less basis. Add all but 2 tablespoons of melted butter, stir then test to see if they stick together by taking a small amount and pressing them together. If they don't add more of the butter.
    Be sure to use the baker's sugar that is easily made at home.
    I prefer beating my egg whites cold as opposed to room temperature. In this case it doesn't matter because of the hot syrup.
    Any good vanilla ice cream will do. 
    I use Trader Joe's Milk Chocolate Pound Plus. it is a Belgian chocolate and is very reasonably priced for a quality product.
    Make sure the milk chocolate ganache, the marshmallow cream and the graham cracker crumbs are all ready before you start this.
    Cover the crumbs tightly when not using so they don't dry out. If the crumbs seem a bite dry between layers, microwave them for abut 10 to 12 seconds to loosen the butter back up. 
    For the best look, freeze between adding the layers. It usually takes 20 to 30 minutes to freeze depending upon the freezer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 334kcalCarbohydrates: 113gProtein: 28gFat: 319gSaturated Fat: 202gPolyunsaturated Fat: 14gMonounsaturated Fat: 82gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 962mgSodium: 380mgPotassium: 984mgFiber: 2gSugar: 104gVitamin A: 12412IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 611mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    12 Desserts for that Special Father

    Modified: Jun 15, 2026 · Published: Jun 16, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake sits on a marlbe plate with the cake in the vackground along with a napkin.

    Father's Day is when I get to skip the delicate and go straight to the deeply indulgent. We're talking chocolate that means business, salted caramel that oozes, peanut butter in every form imaginable, and yes, a cake made with stout. These are the desserts that dads actually want — bold, rich, and completely unapologetic about it. And there's something for every part of the day.

    A slice of the Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake sits on a marlbe plate with the cake in the vackground along with a napkin.

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake

    After more than 25 years of running a bakery, I know what makes people push back from the table with a smile, and it's never a dainty little tart. Nearly every recipe here can be made ahead, which means you get to enjoy the day too instead of disappearing into the kitchen. Whether you're planning a backyard barbecue or a sit-down Sunday dinner, there's something in this list for every kind of celebration. Pick one, make it with confidence, and I promise it will be the most memorable part of the day.

    Banana Split Cupcakes

    Banana Split Cupcakes take everything you love about that classic ice cream parlor treat and turn it into something you can actually bring to a backyard celebration. A light banana cake filled with pineapple, topped with strawberry buttercream, and finished with a drizzle of chocolate — these hit every note of the original without the melting situation. I made them in Texas muffin cups specifically so they could hold all that filling, and that decision makes all the difference.

    Banana Split Cupcakes

    View post

    Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies

    Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies are exactly what they sound like — and then some. Peanuts show up three ways here, including a peanut sugar coating that adds a crunch you don't usually get in a peanut butter cookie, plus a Reese's-style filling that makes these completely over the top in the best possible way. If you've got a peanut butter lover at your table, these are going to disappear fast. 

    Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies

    View post

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake

    How could you go wrong with a brownie cake layer, peanut butter mousse, and a deep chocolate glaze? This is the ultimate upgrade for any dad who's ever eaten a peanut butter cup and wished it were bigger. It's a make-ahead dream that looks far more extravagant than the effort required. 

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake

    View post

    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe

    These Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls take everything you love about a classic cinnamon roll and add a crunchy cinnamon topping — think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels — that completely transforms them into something new. The dough is a batter-style that goes straight from the fridge to the rolling pin without any of the usual springing back, which makes the whole process far less fussy than you'd expect from a yeasted recipe. They freeze beautifully and hold up for days, so you can get all the work done ahead of time and just enjoy the morning. 

    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe

    View post 

    Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie

    This no-bake pie came to me while making the special Valentine's Day dessert at the restaurant, and it has been a showstopper ever since. The salted caramel layer slowly oozes out when sliced, forming its own sauce right on the plate. It looks like a production but comes together with very little fuss. 

    Sky High Salted Caramel Chocolate Pie

    View post 

    Outback Steakhouse Bread

    This Outback Steakhouse Bread is the kind of recipe that earns its place on a Father's Day table before the main event even arrives. Dark with honey, molasses, whole wheat, and bread flour, it has a depth of flavor that makes it feel like something special — and the soft texture means nobody's stopping at one roll. Everything goes into the mixing bowl at once and you're done in three to four minutes, which is exactly the kind of bread recipe the day calls for. 

    Outback Steakhouse Bread

    View post 

    Coffee Cake Muffins Bakery Style Moist

    These Coffee Cake Muffins Bakery Style are exactly what a relaxed Father's Day morning calls for — no mixer, no fuss, just a bowl, a whisk, and a streusel topping that gets patted right over pockets of melted cinnamon chips. They taste like something pulled from a proper bakery case, which means nobody needs to know how little effort went into them. Make a big batch the night before and let the day start exactly the way it should. 

    Coffee Cake Muffins Bakery Style Moist

    View post 

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    Is it a candy, a bar, or a cookie? Call it what you want — what it is is a peanut lover's favorite, and it can be whipped up in minutes. That salty-sweet combination is exactly what a casual Father's Day celebration calls for. 

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    View post 

    Espresso Fudge Cake

    This Espresso Fudge Cake was the most requested cake we made for restaurant service — we'd turn out 16 of them at a time, and they never lasted long. Four layers of moist chocolate fudge cake filled with a coffee buttercream spiked with brandy sounds fancy, but the whole thing comes together with a stand mixer and very little fuss. Even if coffee isn't your thing, don't let that stop you — I'm not a coffee drinker either, and I could eat that buttercream straight from the bowl. 

    An Espresso Fudge Cake with its beige frosting and a dark chocolate ganache dripping down the sides sits on an ivory cake plate with a server next to it.

    View post 

    Triple Chocolate Cheesecake

    A slice of the Triple Chocolate Cheesecake sits on a lace edged white plate with the cut cheesecake in the background.

    This Triple Chocolate Cheesecake has been earning its place on dessert tables for years, and for good reason — chocolate works its way into the crust, the filling, and the glaze without ever tipping into overwhelming territory. The base is my classic sour cream cheesecake, which means it bakes up impossibly creamy every single time. A food processor is all you need, and the result looks like it came straight out of a serious bakery. 

    View post

    Lemon Meringue Pie

    Lemon Meringue Pie sounds simple until you're staring down a weeping meringue, a watery filling, and a soggy crust — and I've been there. This recipe is the result of serious testing to solve every one of those problems, so you're not left guessing or hoping for the best. If you want a pie that actually holds together and delivers that bright, bold lemon punch, this is the one to make. 

    Lemon Meringue Pie 2

    View post 

    Easy Chocolate Guinness Cake

    Stout and chocolate are one of those combinations that just makes sense, and this cake is proof. It's rich, dark, and intensely flavored in a way that feels like it took far more effort than it actually did. A dollop of Baileys whipped cream alongside it wouldn't hurt one bit. 

    Easy Chocolate Guinness Cake

    View post

    Happy Father's Day to every father. I hope your day is filled with loved ones around you lots of laughter and fun and you enjoy one of the above.

    Mediterranean Orzo Salad

    Modified: Jun 12, 2025 · Published: Jun 12, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 7 Comments

    A close up photo of the Mediterranean Orzo Salad shows the cut up veggies, olives and cheese surrounding the orzo pasta.

    I am so excited to share this Mediterranean Orzo Salad. This was one of the best sellers at my take-out shop. So very easy, it comes together quickly and goes wonderfully with summer menus - or just by itself. It's light, filled with crunchy veggies, calamata olives, a bit of feta cheese and a simple dressing that belies the fact that it is packed with flavor.

    A close up  photo of the Mediterranean Orzo Salad shows the cut up veggies, olives and cheese surrounding the orzo pasta.

    The fact that it should be made ahead is only one of the reasons this should be in your repertoire of salads. The fact that it isn't drowned in dressing or mayonnaise is another reason. Light, refreshing and easy - made just for summer!!! This is ideal for get-togethers or to take to a pot luck supper.

    I can't tell you how much of this we made at the shop. It has the perfect balance of pasta, veggies and dressing. When I taught, it was always one of the most popular recipes.

    If you love this recipe, you will also love 13 Savory Recipes Made For Summer.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What's Orzo?

    Orzo is a rice shaped pasta. My husband has never been a fan of rice. I remember the first time I served this to him. He thought this was the best rice dish he ever had. I'm not sure I ever told him it was pasta!

    This Mediterranean Salad Truly is A Winner

    • It's super easy to make.
    • It needs to be made ahead of time for the flavors to meld.
    • Light and luscious - not weighed down by lots of dressing or mayo.
    • Don't you just love a salad that goes with everything?
    • The ingredients are easily found in grocery stores.
    • Stop reading and start making.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The Mediterranean Orzo ingredients include orzo, sundried tomatoes, feta cheese, red onion, yellow,  red and green peppers, parsley, calamata olives, red wine vinegar, olive oil, black pepper and salt.

    FRONT ROW: Canola oil, black pepper, salt

    SECOND ROW: Parsley, red and green peppers

    THIRD ROW: Red onions, sun dried tomatoes, yellow peppers, red wine vinegar

    BACK ROW: Feta cheese, orzo pasta, calamata olives

    Key Ingredients

    This salad is dependent upon the freshest ingredients to be found. Other than cooking the pasta, the veggies are uncooked and everything is just cut up and tossed together.

    Sun dried tomatoes packed in oil or soft dried are best. If they are very dry, soak in hot water while preparing the remaining ingredients. Squeeze all the water from them before chopping and adding to the other ingredients.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This one and only collage shows the package of orzo past, the past itself, a blow of the cut up ingredients, the salad dressing and the finished pasta.

    Step 1. Barilla is just one of the brands of orzo pasta. As you can see the pasta is rice shaped. Cook it according to the directions on the whatever brand you use. Drain it, rinse it and cool it. Set aside. Step 2. Chop all the ingredients into about 1/4" dice, finely chop the parsley, coarsely chop the calamata olives and sun dried tomatoes. Step 3. Whisk the dressing ingredients together vigorously to form an emulsion. Step 4. Pour the dressing over the chopped ingredients and toss well. Refrigerate at least 6 to 8 hours ahead or up to 4 days. That's it!!!

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can a protein be added to the Mediterranean Orzo Salad?

    Absolutely. Meat, poultry, fish or seafood would be great simply grilled or roasted.

    Should this salad be served warm or cold?

    Room temperature or cold are both fine. There is nothing in this salad that is temperature sensitive. This makes it an excellent choice for picnics, potlucks, summer gatherings, and make-ahead meals because it holds up well without needing to be heated.

    Why is my orzo salad dry after being refrigerated after the first day?

    Vinegar and oil based dressings continue to be absorbed by the orzo as it sits. Simply refresh it by making the dressing again and adding it, in whole or just part of it, to the salad. Reserve the rest of the dressing if the salad is being held longer.

    Expert Tips

    • Cut the veggies small so each bite has some of most of them.
    • Use the freshest produce for the best results.
    • If the salad sits in the fridge after the first day, the dressing may be absorbed. Just make it again and refresh the salad. Don't drown it. Reserve any remaining dressing in case you keep it longer.
    A close up of the orzo salad with all of th e veggies, cheese and olives.

    More summer fare to make life easy

    • The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.
      Smoked Turkey Salad
    • A slice of the French Onion Tart showing the tomatoes and olives in the yeasted crust with a sprig of basil.
      French Onion Tart
    • Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.
      Simple Black Bean Salad
    • Finished Phot
      Goat Cheese Pesto Tart

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A close up photo of the Mediterranean Orzo Salad shows the cut up veggies, olives and cheese surrounding the orzo pasta.

    Mediterranean Orzo Salad

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This was one of the best sellers at my take-out shop. So very easy, it comes together quickly and goes wonderfully with summer menus - or just by itself.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Side Salad
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 264 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 1/2 cups orzo pasta
    • 1/4 cup sun dried tomatoes, preferably in oil
    • 1/2 cup feta cheese
    • 1/3 cup diced red onion
    • 1/3 cup diced yellow pepper
    • 1/3 cup diced red pepper
    • 1/3 cup diced green pepper
    • 3 tablespoons finely chopped parsley
    • 3 tablespoons coarsely chopped calamata olives
    • 3 tablespoons red wine vinegar
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil or canola oil
    • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
    • 3/4 teaspoon salt

    Instructions
     

    • The vegetables should be cut in 1/4" dice.
    • Cook the pasta according to the directions on the package or for about 8 to 10 minutes or until just tender. Drain, rinse and set aside to cool.
    • Combine the chopped veggies, sun dried tomatoes, calamata olives and feta in a large bowl. If the sun dried tomatoes are really dry, soak them in really hot water while the rest of the ingredients are being prepared. Squeeze all of the water out before cutting them and adding them to the salad.
    • Whisk the vinegar, oil, salt and pepper together and pour over the ingredients in the bowl. Chill for 6 to 8 hours.
    • This can be served at room temperature or cold.
    • If the salad seems dry after being refrigerated for a day or two, make the dressing again and pour some or all of it over the salad. Do not drown it. Reserve any leftover dressing in case you need it later.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _______________________________
    Cut the veggies small so each bite has some of most of them. 
    Use the freshest produce for the best results.
    If the salad sits in the fridge after the first day, the dressing may be absorbed. Just make it again and refresh the salad. Don't drown it. Reserve any remaining dressing in case you keep it longer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 264kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 7gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 513mgPotassium: 250mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 603IUVitamin C: 41mgCalcium: 83mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Easy Summer Cakes

    Modified: Jun 8, 2025 · Published: Jun 9, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A Quick and Easy Summer Cake shot from the tp with a wreath of whipped cream holding fresh raspberries.
    A Quick and Easy Summer Cake shot from the tp with a wreath of whipped cream holding fresh raspberries.

    After more than 25 years of owning a bakery, my enthusiasm for summer desserts has never once faded—and believe me, I have made them in every form imaginable. Here is the truth I learned in a professional kitchen: you do not have to sacrifice show-stopping results just because you want something easy. Summer baking, at its best, is about bright citrus, fresh berries, and clever techniques that save you time without cutting a single corner.

    Every cake in this collection has earned its place. Some can be made ahead—a few even freeze beautifully—which is exactly what you want when the weather is warm and your time is short. There is a naturally gluten-free option that looks far more sophisticated than it has any right to, a humble pudding cake straight from my mother's kitchen, and an individual pineapple upside down cakes. Whether you are baking for a backyard gathering or simply craving something cool and refreshing on a Tuesday, I promise there is something here for you. Let's get baking.

    Lemon Strawberry Cake

    This started as a simple lemon cake for my gluten-free son, and it has since become one of my most-reached-for summer recipes. The cake takes minutes in the processor, and the shiny, juicy strawberry filling uses Instant ClearJel in a no-cook technique that will genuinely enlarge your idea about thickeners. I can almost guarantee once you try it, you will use it again and again. 

    Lemon Strawberry Cake

    View post 

    Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

    These Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes are individual portions of pure nostalgia—made in eight-ounce ramekins and flipped out to reveal that gorgeous, glistening caramelized fruit over a genuinely featherlight cake that stays moist for days. The two-step yellow cake method is one I appreciate for exactly the reason you would expect: it delivers a tender, cloud-soft crumb without any fuss. Whether you are serving these at a backyard barbecue or a dinner party, they have the kind of presentation that makes people think you worked far harder than you did. 

    Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes

    View post 

    Lemon Raspberry Pudding Cake

    This recipe comes from my mother, and it is one of those homey-looking desserts that are so often the very best ones. As it bakes, it magically separates into two layers: the lightest cake imaginable on top, and an intense lemon pudding with fresh raspberries on the bottom. You don't cut it—you scoop it out with a big spoon, which feels entirely right for a relaxed summer evening. 

    Lemon Raspberry Pudding Cake

    View post 

    A Quick And Easy Summer Teacake

    This Quick and Easy Summer Teacake is the kind of recipe that looks far more elegant than the effort it requires—topped with jam, whipped cream, and fresh fruit, it would be right at home at a proper afternoon tea service. The secret is my almond paste, which you can make yourself in the food processor in minutes, and it does double duty here: adding rich flavor and keeping the crumb beautifully moist. I love that you can swap in any jam and any fruit you like, which means this one recipe can taste completely different all summer long. 

    A Quick And Easy Summer Teacake

    View post 

    Raspberries and Cream Cake

    This comes straight from the bakery's wedding cake file, where it was a beloved spring and summer favorite for good reason. The white chiffon layers are wonderfully tender, filled with whipped cream, fresh raspberries, and a whipped chocolate ganache in the middle. Make the layers the day ahead, and the finishing work is a breeze—exactly how summer baking should feel. 

    Raspberries and Cream Cake

    View post 

    Citrus Pound Cake

    This sour cream cake is enhanced with generous amounts of orange and lemon zests, making it wonderfully bright and refreshing for the season. It is straightforward and quick to make, yielding a large, moist cake that is soaked from both the top and the bottom to ensure every single slice gets the full benefit. It is the kind of reliable, travel-friendly cake you will want to bring to every summer picnic. 

    Citrus Pound Cake

    View post 

    Lemon Blueberry Cake

    I can't think of a better cake to end a summer barbecue than this cool, light dessert built on a white chiffon base that is airy enough for the heat but sturdy enough to hold an intense lemon curd filling buried with fresh blueberries. It was born from a client request, and once I landed on this combination, I knew it was exactly right. Make it the day before and tuck it in the refrigerator—no last-minute rushing required. 

    Lemon Blueberry Cake

    View post

    Seven just right cakes for summer. There's no reason to leave flavor behind because it's summer and these cakes all attest to that. No fussy frostings for these hot, humid months - just pure flavor and easy to make!

    Orange Is an Underrated Flavor in Baking

    Modified: Jun 3, 2025 · Published: Jun 4, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A slice of the Orange Almond Tea Cake sits on a white plate with 2 strawberries and the rest of the cut cake is behind it.

    If there is one flavor that defined my years at the bakery, it is orange. Chocolate and vanilla take all the credit, but orange is the quiet workhorse behind some of the most memorable desserts I have ever made. It cuts through richness, lifts heavy butter and sugar, and brings an aromatic depth that is impossible to replicate with anything else.

    A slice of Orange Almond Teacake on a plate with strawberries.

    I have used it every way imaginable — soaked into a pistachio loaf cake with a honey syrup, slow-cooked into creamy candied peels, folded into a feather-light chiffon, and even used in a rye bread. What I love most about baking with orange is that it never feels like a compromise. It is not a substitute for something else — it is the thing itself. These twelve recipes represent some of my most trusted and beloved orange bakes, from the simplest afternoon tea cake to a wildly popular orange chiffon cake. Keep a bowl of fresh oranges on your counter. You are going to need them.

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    This is one of the easiest cakes to make, yet it always looks so impressive on a cake stand. I use a hassle-free method for whisking the egg whites and sugar that guarantees a light, airy texture every single time. It’s deeply flavored and perfect when you want a spectacular dessert with a fraction of the calories. 

    Orange Chiffon Cake

    View post 

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    I absolutely love the Greek and Middle Eastern flavors in this velvety loaf cake. I soak the warm cake from top to bottom in a shiny orange-honey syrup so the flavor permeates every single bite. It's practically foolproof and so moist that you won't even miss the icing. 

    Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake

    View post 

    Orange Almond Tea Cake

    Oranges and almonds have a natural affinity for each other, a combination I've relied on since writing my first cookbook. This marvelously moist cake is redolent of almond paste and fresh orange rind, coming together in minutes in either a food processor or mixer. It’s the quintessential afternoon pick-me-up. 

    Orange Almond Tea Cake

    View post 

    Greek Orange Yogurt Cake (Portokalopita)

    What makes this traditional Greek dessert so unusual—and completely addictive—is that it uses dried, crushed phyllo dough instead of flour. I drench the baked cake in a beautiful orange and cinnamon syrup, resulting in a dessert that is incredibly moist without ever crossing into soggy territory. 

    Greek Orange Yogurt Cake (Portokalopita)

    View post 

    Candied Orange Peel

    It took me several tries to get this addictive candied peel just right, but the slow-cooking method I use allows the rind to become almost creamy. I keep a jar of these in my refrigerator at all times to chop into cookies and breads, or I simply dip them in chocolate for an elegant end to a meal. 

    Candied Orange Peel

    View post 

    Rye Raisin Bread With Bakery Style Flavor

    This Rye Raisin Bread With Bakery Style Flavor is proof that orange doesn't always have to be the star — sometimes it's the quiet note that ties everything together. A hint of orange weaves through earthy rye flour, dark beer, and plump raisins, giving this rustic loaf a depth of flavor that tastes like it came straight from an old-world bakery. The method is refreshingly simple, just a wet mixture and a dry mixture combined, and the result is a soft, chewy bread that makes the best ham and cheese sandwich you'll ever eat. 

    Rye Raisin Bread With Bakery Style Flavor

    View post 

    Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread

    This Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread cracked a problem that stumped me for years — how to get a chocolate yeast bread that is actually light and moist instead of dense. The answer turned out to be a sponge, which wakes the yeast up slowly and gives the dough a fighting chance against all that rich chocolate and sugar. The result is a loaf that is deeply flavored, tender, and threaded with raisins and orange in a way that makes the whole kitchen smell extraordinary. 

    Chocolate Orange Raisin Bread Homemade Bread

    View post 

    All American Chocolate Creamsicle Cake

    This Chocolate Creamsicle Cake is a nostalgic showstopper that brings together two of the most beloved flavor combinations — rich dark chocolate and bright, creamy orange — in one stunning layer cake. The whipped cream filling is spiked with orange and vanilla to capture that classic creamsicle flavor, sandwiched between layers of deeply chocolatey cake and finished with a luscious American chocolate buttercream. It's the kind of dessert that disappears fast at any gathering, and once you see how straightforward it is to pull together, it will become one of your most-reached-for recipes too. 

    All American Chocolate Creamsicle Cake

    View post 

    Stuffed Cinnamon French Toast & Orange Sauce

    For a truly memorable brunch, I love taking thick slices of cinnamon bread and filling them with a lightly sweetened orange cream cheese. I serve it warm with the same luscious orange cream sauce I use for my Crepes Suzette, elevating a humble breakfast into an absolute masterpiece. 

    Stuffed Cinnamon French Toast & Orange Sauce

    View post 

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    Cranberries and orange are one of my absolute favorite fall flavor pairings or actually any time using frozen cranberries, and they shine brilliantly in these tender muffins. I use a touch of almond extract alongside fresh orange zest to really make the flavors pop, creating the perfect companion for your morning coffee. 

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    View post 

    Orange Date Bread Pudding

    I developed this recipe when I was asked to make a bread pudding for a restaurant and found the standard versions too boring. By incorporating both fresh orange zest and my homemade candied orange peel alongside sweet Medjool dates, I created a deeply flavorful dessert with wonderful texture. 

    Orange Date Bread Pudding

    View post 

    I trust you'll find a couple of these recipes too tempting to ignore. Enjoy them and thanks for being here.

    A Dozen Chocolate Cake Donuts

    Modified: Jun 2, 2025 · Published: Jun 2, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    Chocolate Cake Donuts are featured with 12 different toppings sit on a marble platter.

    A Dozen Chocolate Cake Donuts celebrates National Donut Day on June 5 this year. Cake Donuts are so easy to make - no yeast, no rolling out and almost no work. These deeply chocolate, soft and moist donuts are finished with 12 different toppings - one or two are sure to please.

    Chocolate Cake Donuts are featured with 12 different toppings sit on a marble platter.

    it looks like I visited my local bakery, doesn't it? Now, I'm not suggesting making one of each of these fillings. But pick out a couple of your favs and make the softest, deepest chocolate donut and finish them as you wish.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Chocolate Donut Recipe

    • Making these donuts if fast and easy.
    • The recipe is a base recipe so it is endlessly adaptable. Adding or subtracting a few ingredients makes it a whole new donut.
    • It uses pantry ingredients for the cake donut.
    • Top it anyway you want - even if it's not on my list
    • For the caramel, use my caramel or substitute Werther soft caramels as the closest you can get to mine.

    Variations

    in addition the the original base recipe for the Chocolate Cake Donuts, the folowing are included:

    • Chocolate Coconut - omit coffee and vanilla and add 1 teaspoon coconut extract to the batter. Add 1/2 teaspoon to the chocolate glaze. Top with shredded, sweetened coconut.
    • Peppermint - omit coffee and vanilla and add 1 teaspoon peppermint extract to the batter. Add 1/2 teaspoon peppermint to the chocolate glaze. Top with Andes pieces or crushed starlight mints.
    • Mexican - Add 2 teaspoons cinnamon to the batter. Top with cinnamon chips. If using Hershey's chop them up a bit so they aren't so large.
    • Turtle - Base recipe, toasted pecans and caramel.
    • Mocha - add 2 teaspoons instant coffee to batter and 1/2 to 1 teaspoon to the glaze.
    • The following all use the Base recipe and are topped with:
      • English Toffee Bits or Brickle - found in the baking aisle
      • Chocolate Strawberry - Freeze dried strawberries are added to the basic powdered sugar glaze.
      • Caramel - Mine or Werther's
      • Hello Dollie - The favorite combo of coconut, butterscotch chips, chocolate chips (mini in this case) and toasted pecans
      • Nonpareils 
      • Peanut Butter Glaze

    Recipe Ingredients

    Chocolate Cake Donuts

    Ingredients for the Chocolate Cake Donuts are:  all-purpose flour, cocoa, baking soda, baking powder, brown sugar, salt, unsalted butter, eggs, vanilla, and sour cream

    FIRST ROW: Salt, instant coffee, baking powder, vanilla, baking soda

    MIDDLE ROW: Brown sugar, unsalted butter, eggs

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, Dutch cocoa, sour cream

    Chocolate Ganache

    The Chocolate Glaze ingredients include unsalted butter, corn syrup, semisweet chocolate, heavy cream.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, corn syrup (or honey or golden syrup)

    BACK ROW:

    Powdered Sugar Glaze

    The ingredients for the powdered sugar glaze are milk, powdered sugar, and chocolate which is optional.

    FRONT ROW: Milk, semisweet chocolate (optional)

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Toppings for the Chocolate Cake Donuts

    Toppings for the donuts include Andes mints, peanut butter chips, coconut, brickle, cinnamon chips, caramels, freeze dried strawberries, pecans, butterscotch chips, nonpareils, mini chocolate chips,  and instant coffee.

    FRONT ROW: Instant Coffee

    SECOND ROW: Toasted pecans, nonpareils, mini chocolate chips

    THIRD ROW: Cinnamon chips, Werther caramels, freeze dried strawberries, butterscotch chips

    BACKROW: Andes Mint chips, peanut butter chips, coconut, English Toffee Bits or brickle

    Note: The peanut butter chips were not used.

    Key Ingredients

    • Espresso Coffee may be substituted at half the amount
    • The pecans must be toasted for the best taste
    • Sprinkles can
    • Werther caramels can be substituted for home caramel
    • Freeze dried strawberries are the main ingredient in the strawberry glaze. Trader Joe's has the best price on these.
    • I used Heath English Toffee Bits but any can be used. These are the most easily found in the grocery store.
    • Andes Mint Chips are also found in the grocery store in the baking aisle.
    • The coconut is the sweetened variety.
    • The peanut butter chips were not used.
    • Dutch cocoa powder is used for it's color and intensity of taste.
    • The semisweet chocolate I prefer is now priced out of my range. I am using the very last of it. My other favorite is Trader Joe's Pound Plus Dark Chocolate. It's a Belgian chocolate and comes in other flavors also. It's priced much better than most quality chocolates.
    • Either Light Brown or Dark Brown sugar can be used.
    • It is important to use heavy cream in the chocolate ganache or it can be too thin.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the Chocolate Bake Donuts shows the flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt in a strainer, the dutch cocoa in a strainer, lumps of the cocoa  and the cocoa strained of lumps.

    Step 1. Sift the flour, baking powder, baking soda the salt in a strainer over a mixing bowl. Step 2. Sift the cocoa over the powdered sugar. Step 3. There will, most likely be lumps left. Step 4. Push them through with the back of a spoon.

    This collages shows the brown sugar being added to the bowl, the melted butter, eggs, vanilla with the coffee dissolved in it and the sour cream in a bowl.

    Step 5. Add the brown sugar to the mixing bowl with the dry ingredients. Step 6. Place the melted butter, eggs, the vanilla with the coffee dissolved in it and the sour cream in a medium size bowl. Step 7. Whisk the wet ingredients together and pour over the dry ingredients. Step 8. Mix on low to bring the ingredients together and then on medium to blend completely.

    The final collages shows the cake batter piped into a cale donut pan amd baled along with the chocolate glaze being made and the powdered sugar glaze in a bowl.

    Step 9. Lightly spray the wells of the pans with a non-stick baking release. Because this is a very thick batter, it is easiest to fit a piping bag with a 1/2" plain tip and pipe the filling 2/3 of the way up so they don't go over the top. Alternatively, used a doubled plastic bag. fill it with the batter, cut the tip off and use that to pipe the batter. Make sure to smooth the tops. I did not do this to mine and some of them rose inconsistently and were a bit lopsided. Step 10. Bake as called for. Cool in the pans and turn out. They may be frozen, without their tops at this point and finished later. Freeze them hard, wrap well in foil. They will last several months. Thaw on a cooling rack to finish. Step 11. After your desired topping has been prepared, make the chocolate glaze. Put all the ingredients in a microwave bowl and heat for about 2 minutes or until the chocolate begins to melt. Stir to blend. Repeat the heating with less time if needed. Step 12. To prepare the powdered sugar glaze, place the powdered sugar and 2/3 of the milk in a bowl and stir together. To make the chocolate powdered sugar glaze instead of the ganache, add the melted chocolate. Dip the donuts using the plain powdered sugar glaze first, then stir in the melted chocolate. In either case do not be too enthusiastic or air bubbles will form that are hard to get out.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why are my chocolate donuts dry?

    There are basically two reasons. They were over baked or the recipe was faulty. These donuts are unbelievably soft and moist because it is balanced.

    What happens if I use natural cocoa instead of Dutch?

    The cupcakes will be lighter in color and the chocolate flavor may be lessened to some degree. However, in reality either is fine.

    What can I use if I don't have sour cream?

    For this recipe, sour cream, buttermilk or plain yogurt all work. Use the same amount for all of them.

    Storage and Freezing

    After the donuts are baked they can be held at room temperature before topping. They can also be frozen with no topping. Freeze them until they are rock hard, wrap well in foil and they will last for several months. To finish, thaw at room temperature on a cooling rack and finish as desired.

    Once they are finished, they will last several days at room temperature lightly covered.

    Expert Tips

    • The most important tip here is not to over bake the donuts. They don't take very long so use a cake tester or your finger to touch them lightly and if they spring back they are done.
    • When filling the wells of the donut pan, be sure to smooth the batter out so it is flat and touches the sides of the pan.
    • If you don't own a donut pan, these work well in a regular size muffin pan. No hole - same donut. There may be 10 or 11 donuts because the muffin pans are a bit bigger.
    Chocolate Cake Donuts are featured with 12 different toppings sit on a marble platter.

    Counterclockwise from the mocha in front, chocolate, English Toffee bits or brickle, coconut, turtle, caramel, strawberry, peanut butter and peppermint. In the middle on the top left is the Mexican and Hello dollie, and below that is the nonpareil.

    More easy quick treats to consider

    • Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.
      Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe
    • Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.
      Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe
    • A single Cheddar Bacon Popover in it's pan sits on a cooling rack.
      Cheddar Bacon Popovers Recipe
    • A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.
      No Bake Chocolate Coconut Tart

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Chocolate Cake Donuts are featured with 12 different toppings sit on a marble platter.

    A Dozen Chocolate Cake Donuts

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A Dozen Chocolate Cake Donuts celebrates National Donut Day on June 5 this year. Cake Donuts are so easy to make - no yeast, no rolling out and almost no work. These deeply chocolate, soft and moist donuts are finished with 12 different toppings - one or two are sure to please.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    finishing 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Dessert, Muffins, Snack

    Equipment

    • 2 6 well donut pan or regular size muffin pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Chocolate Cake Donuts

    • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
    • 1/2 cup Dutch cocoa (45 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1/2 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/2 teaspoon table salt
    • 1/2 cup brown sugar (100 grams)
    • 3/4 cup sour cream (170 grams)
    • 1/4 cup unsalted butter, melted (60 grams or 4 tablespoons)
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon instant coffee*
    • 1/2 teaspoon espresso

    Glazes and Toppings - the amounts given are to finish and top 12 donuts. if choosing more than one, adjust the recipe depending upon how many of each you are finishing.

    Chocolate Ganache

    • 1/4 cup heavy cream
    • 2 tablespoons corn syrup, honey or golden syrup
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter (15 grams)
    • 5 ounces semisweet chocolate (140 grams)

    Powdered Sugar Glaze

    • 2 cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 4 to 6 tablespoons milk
    • 1 1/2 ounces semisweet chocolate, optional

    Peanut Butter Glaze

    • 1/2 cup creamy peanut butter
    • 1 1/2 cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 4 to 6 tablespoons milk

    Strawberry Glaze

    • 1 1/2 cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 1/2 cup freeze dried strawberries (1.2 ounce pkg)
    • 3 to 5 tablespoons milk

    Hello Dollie topping

    • 1/4 cup butterscotch chips
    • 1/4 cup coconut, sweetened
    • 1/4 cup mini or regular size chocolate chips
    • 1/4 cup toasted pecans

    Mocha Glaze

    • Powdered Sugar Glaze above
    • 1 to 2 teaspoons instant coffee
    • 2 teaspoons water

    Caramel

    • My caramel: https://pastrieslikeapro.com/caramel-building-block-pastry/
    • OR
    • 24 to 30 Werther caramels
    • 2 tablespoons heavy cream

    Instructions
     

    Chocolate Cake Donuts

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray 2 6 well donut or muffin pans lightly with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Over a mixing bowl, sift the flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt into the bowl.
    • Sift the cocoa into the bowl on top of the flour. If there are lumps, push them through wit a spoon.
    • Add the brown sugar to the dry ingredients and mix with a paddle attachment to blend.
    • Add the coffee to the vanilla and stir to mix. Set aside. In a separate bowl, combine the eggs, melted butter, sour cream and vanilla/coffee mixture. Whisk to combine and pour over the dry ingredients.
    • Mix on low to combine (it will be very thick). Raise the speed to high and mix until completely combine, scraping down as necessary.
    • Fit a piping bag with a 1/2" plain tip. Pipe the batter 2/3 up the way of the wells. Smooth the top so it touches the edges of the wells and is flat. Alternatively, double a plastic bag, fill it with batter and cut 1/2" off the tip. Use this to pipe the batter into the cups.
    • Bake for 10 to 12 minutes. Check at 10 minutes with a cake tester which should come out clean or touch the center of one of the donuts to see if it springs back. Do not over bake. Cool on racks.

    Topping the Donuts - Have whatever toppings you are using ready before you make the ganache or glazes.

    • Chocolate Ganache - Place all of the ingredient in a microwave proof bowl or in a bowl place over simmering water. Microwave for about 1 to 2 minutes until the chocolate starts to melt. Stir to combine. I needed microwave slightly more to melt everything. Heating over simmering water may take a bit longer. Cool to warm before using.
    • Powdered Sugar Glaze - Sift the powdered sugar into a bowl. Add the milk a bit at a time until a thick glaze is made. If it is too thin, it will just run right off making it difficult to top.
    • Peanut Butter Glaze - Combine the creamy peanut butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and the smallest amount of milk. Stir to combine. Add additional milk to make a thick glaze.
    • Strawberry Glaze - Place the powdered sugar and freeze dried strawberries in the bowl of a of a processor. Process until the strawberries are powdered and the powdered sugar is pink. Stop and scrape down as necessary and process again. Be sure to cover the feed tube with your hand or the plunger as the powdered mixture will go everywhere. Remove from the processor and place in a bowl. Add the milk a bit at a time to make a thick mixture
    • Mocha Glaze - Combine the water and coffee. Let it sit for a few minutes then stir to make sure no crystals are present. Add to the Powdered sugar glaze. If the glaze is too thin, add more powdered sugar a little at a time.
    • Hello Dollie Topping - chop the chips and pecans finely and combine everything with the coconut.

    The following specialty donuts are as follows. They are all dipped in the Chocolate Ganache or the Chocolate Powdered Sugar Glaze as you chose.

    • Base Chocolate Donut - dipped in and left plain.
      Chocolate Coconut - omit coffee and vanilla and add 1 teaspoon coconut extract to the batter. Add 1/2 teaspoon coconut extract to the chocolate glaze. Top with shredded, sweetened coconut.
      Peppermint - omit coffee and vanilla and add 1 teaspoon peppermint extract to the batter. Add 1/2 teaspoon peppermint to the chocolate glaze. Top with Andes pieces or crushed starlight mints.
      Mexican - Add 2 teaspoons cinnamon to the batter. Top with small cinnamon chips. If using Hershey's or another larger chip chop them up a bit so they aren't so large.
      Turtle - Dipped in caramel and topped with finely chopped toasted pecans.
      Mocha - add 2 teaspoons instant coffee to batter and 1/2 to 1 teaspoon to the glaze.
      English Toffee Bits or Brickle - sprinkle on top of the chocolate ganache
      Nonpareils or sprinkles - sprinkle on top of the chocolate ganache

    Assembly Using the Plain Powdered Sugar Glaze

    • Hello Dollie Donut - After dipping, immediately apply the mix to the top of the donut.
    • Strawberry - Dip the donut into the glaze. Allow to dry.
    • Mocha - Dip the donut into the glaze. Allow to dry.
    • Peanut Butter - Dip the donut into the glaze. Allow to dry. An afterthought was to top the glaze with finely chopped honey roasted peanuts.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
     ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _______________________________________________
    • The most important tip here is not to over bake the donuts. They don't take very long so use a cake tester or your finger to touch them lightly and if they spring back they are done.
    • When filling the wells of the donut pan, be sure to smooth the batter out so it is flat and touches the sides of the pan.
    • If you don't own a donut pan, these work well in a regular size muffin pan. No hole - same donut. There may be 10 or 11 donuts because the muffin pans are a bit bigger.
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Red Pepper & Olive Bread Recipe

    Modified: May 24, 2025 · Published: May 26, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    This orange hued bread sits on a white lattice plate with a bottle of calamata olives and roasted red pepper is in the background.

    This deeply flavored Red Pepper Olive Bread Recipe features jarred roasted red peppers and kalamata or green olives. It is perfect for sandwiches, with soup or just as a snack. The roasted red peppers turns this unusual bread a colorful orange while your choice of green or kalamata olives gives this bread a depth of flavor that takes it to another level.

    This orange hued bread sits on a white lattice plate with a bottle of calamata olives and roasted red pepper is in the background.

    A chewy, tightly textured bread, this bread is perfect to add flavor to any sandwich and is especially welcome filled with roasted vegetables and cheese. Due to the red peppers and a bit of oil, this bread keeps well.

    While I show the bread being made in a food processor, it can also be made in a mixer.I include instructions for the mixer below in the Step by Step Instructions.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Texture of Bread

    When making bread and before it is baked there are a number of different textures that will determine the outcome of the baked bread. Does it have tight crumb or open holes? Does it keep well or should it be eaten the day it is made?

    Here are four that are frequently mentioned to help guide you.

    Slack - This is the softest texture and has a high water content. It is very loose and wiggly when moved. It has very open holes when baked. Think ciabatta and sour dough breads. These are usually lean breads meaning they contain little more than water, flour, yeast and salt.

    Sticky - This texture is often found in rich breads. These breads are enriched with eggs, butter, maybe sour cream or milk. They will be sticky when finished mixing and stick to your hands when initially removed from their mixing bowls. They will not clean the sides of the bowl when mixed. Sweet doughs, most especially brioche, are in this category.

    Tacky - These are soft doughs and can be lean or rich doughs. They will clean the sides and bottom of the mixing bowl and while very soft, will barely stick to your hands. Many sweet and savory breads fit into this category.

    Firm - Doughs that are firm are usually lean doughs, will definitely clean the sides and bottom of bowls when mixed and will not stick at all to your hands. They have the shortest shelf life and will stale the fastest. They have a lesser ratio of liquid to flour and are best eaten the same day they are baked. These usually have a very tight crumb.

    Instant Yeast or Active dry?

    The main difference between the two is the size of the granules and the activation of the yeast. Both are dehydrated. The instant yeast has smaller granules and contain more live cells while the active dry yeast has larger granules that require rehydration by soaking in a warm liquid to activate them. The instant also rises faster than the active dry but there is no right or wrong.

    While many recipes recommend adding the instant yeast directly into the dry ingredients with no soaking I have found that to be problematic and prefer to add the yeast to the liquid while preparing the remaining ingredients. I noticed when using the instant yeast that sometimes the yeast showed up as little bumps in the unbaked bread.

    I use the two interchangeably.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Sweet & Hot Red Pepper & Olive Bread include: roasted red peppers, water, yeast, oil, red pepper flakes, bread flour, salt olives, egg white and sesame seeds.

    FRONT ROW: Sesame seeds, salt, red pepper flakes (salt again that should be omitted), olive or canola oil

    MIDDLE ROW: Egg white, instant yeast, Kalamata olives, water

    BACK ROW: Bread flour, roasted red peppers

    Key Ingredients

    • Bread Flour is important to the texture and rising ability of this bread. This flour has a higher protein content (14 to 15%) that works with the yeast for a better textured bread.
    • While I used Kalamata (or calamata) olives here, I have also made it with great results using green pimento stuffed olives.
    • Jarred roasted red peppers are preferred for this recipe. They are softer than fresh red peppers that have been roasted at home. They provide most of the liquid for this recipe.
    • Either olive oil or canola oil can be used.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This dough may need a bit more flour or water before the olives are added. It will depend upon how much liquid was left or taken out of the olives and peppers

    The first collage for the Sweet & Hot Red Pepper & Olive Bread Recipe shows the kalamata olives, dried betweet paper towels, the jarred red peppers on a paper towel an d then dried,

    Step 1. Place the whole kalamata or green olives on a double sheet of paper towels. Step 2. Place two more sheets of paper towels on top and press to dry them out as much as possible. Step 3. Place the jarred red peppers on two more towels and cover with two more paper towels. Step 4. Press as much liquid out as possible.

    This collages shows the yeast in water, oil and red pepper flakes, the red peppers processed to a puree and the yeast mixture added and processed.

    Step 5. Stir the yeast into the water. Step 6. Add the oil and red pepper flakes. Step 7. Puree the red peppers in the processor. Step 8. Add the yeast, oil and pepper flakes and process briefly to mix.

    The collages shows the flour added to the process, the dough being made, the olives added on top and the dough pulsed to cut in the olives.

    Step 8 Add the flour and salt to the processor. Step 10. Process to form a tacky to firm dough. If the dough is really soft, add a bit more flour. If it is too stiff, add a tablespoon of water at a time to correct the consistency. Step 11. Place the whole olives on top of the dough. Step 12. With 4 or 5 quick pulse cut in the olives.

    The last collage shows the dough out of the processor, formed into a ball, risen in a container and the dough shaped into a round bread and rolls.

    Step 13. Lightly flour a work surface and place the dough on it. Step 14. Shape the dough into a round. Step 15. Place it in a container that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Let it rise until doubled. This is a very fast rising dough and should be risen in 1 to 1 1/2 hours. I recommend refrigerating it overnight. Step 16. Shape the dough into a ball or it can be made into rolls. Let it rise a second time just until doubled. Just before baking, make 3 deep slashed across the bread, whisk the egg white until foamy, brush the bread and sprinkle with sesame seeds.

    Mixer Method

    Coarsely chop the olives. Set aside.

    Follow the steps 1 through 8. Fit the mixer with a dough hook if possible. Transfer the liquid to a mixing bowl. Add the flour and beat on low to bring the dough together in a shaggy state. Raise the speed to medium and beat for 3 to 4 minutes. Add a bit more flour if the dough is too loose or more water if it is too firm. It should be tacky to the touch. Add the olives and beat just until they are mixed in. Follow steps 13 to 16.

    To Make Rolls

    To shape the rolls, measure the dough into 85 grams pieces, shape them into a balls by pulling all the edges underneath. Place it on an unfloured work surface, with the smooth side up and cup your hand over the dough. Roll it around under your hand. This is the same method professionals use to make round rolls. However, this bread dough has a mind of its own, so despite your best efforts they may come out less than round.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can Red Pepper and Olive Bread be Frozen?

    Absolutely. Just cool it completely, wrap it well in foil and freeze it for up to 3 months. Thaw it on a cooling rack and refresh it in a 350°F oven for 10 to 15 minutes.

    Why do the red peppers and olives make the bread soggy?

    It is important to place the peppers and olives between paper towels and press out as much liquid as possible to keep from watering down the dough.

    My dough is too wet, how do I fix it?

    Before adding the olives, add a bit more flour until the dough is soft but tacky. Add the olives and mix them in as quickly and gently as possible.

    Expert Tips

    • It is most important to press as much liquid as possible from the olives and red peppers to avoid extra liquid in the dough.
    • If the dough is too wet, add flour a bit at a time to make a soft tacky dough.
    • This is a fast riser - usually an hour to 1 to 1 1 /2 hours
    • Refrigerating the dough overnight makes it easier to shape the next day and also adds more flavor.
    • Bread flour is important to this recipe so it doesn't get weighed down with the peppers and olives.
    • When shaping the dough, don't add flour to the work surface. The dough should be able to be shaped without it. If any help is needed, add a bit of oil to the work surface.
    Sliced bread on a lattice trivvet with a bottle of kalamata olives and roasted red peppers in the background.

    Other Flavorful Breads to Enjoy

    • Balls of Brazilian Cheese Bread sit in a wicker basket in a white napkiin on a blue background.
      Brazilian Cheese Bread Recipe
    • Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.
      Outback Steakhouse Bread
    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Stuffed Italian Bread - Pane Bianco

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.

    This orange hued bread sits on a white lattice plate with a bottle of calamata olives and roasted red pepper is in the background.

    Red Pepper & Olive Bread Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This deeply flavored Red Pepper Olive Bread Recipe features jarred roasted red peppers and kalamata or green olives. It is perfect for sandwiches, with soup or just as a snack.
    4 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 208 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 15 ounce bottled roasted red peppers
    • 3/4 cup kalamata or green olives
    • 2 1/4 teaspoons instant yeast (1 packet)
    • 1/3 cup water
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil or canola oil
    • 3/4 teaspoon hot red pepper flakes
    • 3 1/2 cups bread flour (490 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 egg white
    • sesame seeds as needed

    Instructions
     

    Processor Method

    • Drain the red peppers between double thicknesses of paper towel. Press as much liquid as possible from them. Repeat with the olives keeping them whole if using the food processor or cutting them coarsely if using the mixer. Set aside.
    • Stir the water and yeast together. Add the oil and red pepper flakes. Stir to mix well. Set aside.
    • Puree the red peppers in the bowl of a food processor scraping down as necessary. Measure 1 cup of the puree. If the cup is short, add water to make up the 1 cup.
    • Add the yeast mixture to the processor and process to mix in.
    • Add the flour and salt. Process until it comes together in a ball (or mostly a ball). If it is too wet, add a bit of flour, if too dry to form a ball, add a tablespoon of water at a time to correct the consistency . The dough should be soft and tacky.
    • Remove the bread and tear it into pieces, placing it back in the processor. Place the olives on top and pulse them in briefly. To not over process or the olives won't be noticeable. Not the biggest problem - the flavor will still be there.
    • Spray a container with a non-stick baking release at least 2 to 3 times the size of the dough. Remove the dough and knead it a few ties to shape into a ball. Place in the container at lease 2 or more times as big as the dough. Let it rise until doubled. This is a fast riser and will take abut 1 to 1/2 hours to rise.
    • At this point, I recommend refrigerating it overnight to firm it up for shaping and to enhance the flavor.
    • Line a baking pan with parchment paper. Shape the dough into a round and place it on the paper. Cover it with a tea towel and let it rise until doubled in size. This may take a bit longer as the dough will be cold.
    • Near the end of rising, preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Just before baking, make 3 deep slashed across the bread with a single edge razor or a lame, whisk the egg white until foamy, brush the bread and sprinkle with sesame seeds.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes or until the internal temperature is 190F.

    To Make Rolls

    • To shape the rolls, measure the dough into 85 grams pieces, shape them into balls by pulling all the edges togethr. Place it on an unfloured work surface, with the smooth side up and cup your hand over the dough.
      Roll it around under your hand. This is the same method professionals use to make round rolls. However, this bread dough has a mind of its own, so despite your best efforts they may come out less than round.
    • Just before baking, make a deep slashed across the top of the roll, whisk the egg white until foamy, brush the rolls and sprinkle with sesame seeds.
    • Bake at 350°F for 18 to 20 minutes.

    Mixer Method

    • Follow steps 1 through 4 above.
    • Transfer the red pepper mixture to a mixing bowl Add the flour and salt and beat on low to form a shaggy dough, then raise the speed to medium and beat for 3 to 4 minutes.
    • Sprinkle the coarsely cut olives on top and beat on low to medium just until incorporated.
    • Continue with the instructions from 7 through 12 above.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    It is most important to press as much liquid as possible from the olives and red peppers to avoid extra liquid in the dough.
    If the dough is too wet, add flour a bit at a time to make a soft tacky dough.
    This is a fast riser - usually an hour to 1 to 1 1 /2 hours
    Refrigerating the dough overnight makes it easier to shape the next day and also adds more flavor.
    Bread flour is important to this recipe so it doesn't get weighed down with the peppers and olives.
    When shaping the dough, don't add flour to the work surface. The dough should be able to be shaped without it. If any help is needed, add a bit of oil to the work surface.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 208kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 7gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gSodium: 402mgPotassium: 82mgFiber: 2gSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 86IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 14mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Fresh Strawberry Recipes That Work

    Modified: May 21, 2025 · Published: May 22, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    The (almost) No bake Strawberry Pie is seen in the pie plate with a wreath of whipped cream and fresh strawberries.

    Strawberry season is one of my favorite times of year, and after more than 35 years of baking professionally, I've learned a thing or two about getting the most out of this glorious fruit. The problems I see most often? Runny fillings, soggy crusts, and strawberry flavor that somehow disappears entirely once it hits the oven. Every recipe in this collection is designed to solve exactly those things.

    The (almost) No bake Strawberry Pie is seen in the pie plate with a wreath of whipped cream and fresh strawberries.

    (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

    Some of my favorites here use Instant ClearJel — a game changer if you've never tried it — which keeps fresh strawberries vibrant and flavorful without cooking them down at all. Others lean on freeze-dried strawberries, chocolate ganache, and a few techniques I picked up from years at the bakery that make the whole process easier than you'd expect.

    Whether you're after a stunning do-ahead torte, a nearly effortless no-bake pie, or a jam that takes strawberries somewhere entirely unexpected, there's something here for every skill level. Let's make the most of those gorgeous berries.

    (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

    The only baking required here is about 13 minutes for the crust — everything else comes together without turning on the oven. The secret is Instant ClearJel, which thickens the fresh strawberry filling without cooking, so the flavor stays pure and the color stays brilliant. If you've never used it, I promise it will change the way you think about fruit desserts. 

    (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie

    View post 

    Strawberry Brownies

    These Strawberry Brownies are the kind of unexpected treat that stops people mid-bite — chewy in the center and finished with a strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze that make them look as good as they taste. They're genuinely simple to pull together, travel well, and slice cleanly, which means they're just as at home on a party platter as they are on a Tuesday night. If you're looking for a way to use strawberries that nobody sees coming, this is it. 

    Strawberry Brownies

    View post 

    Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita

    Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita is one of those recipes that sounds fancy but couldn't be simpler — all you need is a blender or processor, a pan, and a fork. The balsamic and black pepper take the strawberry flavor somewhere unexpected, giving it a brightness and depth that a basic Italian ice just doesn't have. If you've never made granita before, this is the perfect place to start. 

    Strawberry Balsamic Black Pepper Granita

    View post 

    Best Of All Strawberry Muffins

    These Best of All Strawberry Muffins use a full pound of fresh strawberries two ways — pureed into the batter for deep, built-in flavor, and folded in as pieces for that sweet-tart burst in every bite. No mixer needed, which makes this one of those recipes I'd hand to a beginner or pull out on a busy morning without a second thought. The processor crumb topping is a smart shortcut that makes the whole thing feel a little extra without any extra fuss. 

    Best Of All Strawberry Muffins

    View post 

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam

    I originally made this at my take-out shop as part of a marinated chicken dish, but the jam is so good it deserves a life of its own. Black pepper and balsamic vinegar take the strawberry flavor out of the ordinary and into a sphere entirely its own. No canning required — just pop it in the refrigerator where it'll keep for months. 

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam

    View post 

    Banana Split Cupcakes

    Banana Split Cupcakes take everything you love about the classic ice cream treat and turn it into something you can hold in one hand — a light banana cake filled with pineapple and finished with a strawberry buttercream and chocolate drizzle. I made these in Texas muffin cups specifically so they could hold all that filling, and that little detail makes a real difference. They're the kind of cupcake that looks like a project but comes together beautifully, and they're sturdy enough to bring to a picnic.

    A Banana Split Cupcake with its strawberry buttercream drizzled with chooolate sits on a white plate .

    View post 

    Strawberry Bread

    This Strawberry Bread is the kind of recipe I love having in my back pocket — one bowl, a whisk, and a few measuring tools, and you're done in minutes. Fresh strawberries go into every bite, so you get real fruit flavor all the way through rather than just a hint of it. It's also a wonderful project to make with kids, which makes it just as practical as it is delicious. 

    Strawberry Bread

    View post

    Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

    Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp is one of those desserts I reach for when I want all the flavor of a strawberry rhubarb pie with almost none of the effort — no crust to roll, no fuss, just fruit and a golden topping that comes together in minutes. If you've never cooked with rhubarb before, this Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp is genuinely the perfect starting point — it's forgiving, straightforward, and the combination of tart rhubarb and sweet strawberry is one of the great flavor pairings of the season. Think of it as your gateway recipe to one of spring's most underrated ingredients. 

    Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp

    View post 

    Lemon Strawberry Cake

    This one started as a simple lemon cake soaked in lemon syrup for my gluten-free son, and it's become one of my most requested recipes. The almond flour cake takes minutes in the processor, and the no-cook strawberry filling — set with Instant ClearJel — is juicy, shiny, and absolutely beautiful. Naturally gluten free, but sophisticated enough for anyone at the table. 

    Lemon Strawberry Cake

    View post 

    My Best Banana Cake Recipe

    My Best Banana Cake Recipe is a lighter take on banana cake — no heavy buttercream in sight — filled with caramelized pineapple and finished with fresh strawberries and whipped cream, which makes it exactly the kind of summer dessert I love to have on hand. The combination of both butter and oil is a small but smart move that keeps the texture tender without sacrificing any of that deep banana flavor. A make-ahead schedule is built right in, so there's no last-minute scramble when you're ready to serve it. 

    My Best Banana Cake Recipe

    View post

    Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe

    These Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes deliver strawberry flavor two ways — pureed fresh strawberries folded right into the batter, and an intense freeze-dried strawberry buttercream that makes every bite taste like the real thing. The "surprise" is a filling tucked inside, and if I were making them again, I'd go with a standard muffin tin instead of jumbo so you can get the cake, filling, and frosting all in one perfect bite. It's a clever little recipe that thinks through the details so you don't have to. 

    Strawberry Surprise Cupcake Recipe

    View post

    Strawberry Buttercream Frosting

    This Strawberry Buttercream Frosting is the one I reach for when I want strawberry flavor that actually tastes like strawberries — not a vague pink sweetness. The trick is freeze-dried strawberries, where a single 1.2-ounce package packs the intensity of a full pound of fresh fruit, all without the juice that would otherwise water down your frosting. Thirty minutes and you have something genuinely extraordinary.
    Strawberry Buttercream Frosting

    With strawberries at their peak, there's no reason not to try a couple of these winning recipes. Every one is doable and everyone is delicious!

    View post

    My All-Time Favorite Lemon Recipes — From My Bakery & Beyond

    Modified: May 17, 2026 · Published: May 19, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Lemon Curd Tarts in rows.

    Lemon is the number two flavor in America, just behind chocolate — and honestly, in my kitchen, it might be number one because it's the brightest of all flavors. After more than 25 years of owning a bakery, I have made lemon desserts in every form imaginable, and my enthusiasm for them has never once faded. Nothing welcomes spring like this bright tart flavor used in all manner of bakery items.

    Lemon Curd Tarts in rows.

    There is something about that bright, sweet-tart flavor that makes every bite feel alive. Whether you are looking for a show-stopping centerpiece cake that will have your guests asking where you got it, a quick and easy bread pudding that comes together in minutes, or a lemon gooey butter cake, this collection has something for everyone.

    I have included recipes that can be made ahead, recipes that are naturally gluten free, and a few that will genuinely surprise you with how simple they are despite their stunning results. These are the lemon recipes I return to again and again — tried, tested, and truly worth your time.

    Triple Lemon Cake - Revised

    This truly special European Style Triple Lemon Cake will have everyone asking where you got it. While elegant and stunning in appearance, it is actually easy to make — the lemon cake, soaking syrup, and topping are simple component parts that can be prepared ahead and assembled when needed. It is a genuine show-stopper. 
    Triple Lemon Cake - Revised
    View post 

    Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding

    This spectacular dessert is based on the Lemon Cheesecake I made at the restaurant, where it was extremely popular and very unusual. The ingredients take a few turns in the processor, are poured over the bread cubes, and into the pan it goes — not much work at all for something this remarkable. Served warm, it is absolutely extraordinary.
    Easy Lemon Cheesecake Bread Pudding
    View post 

    How to Make Lemon Curd

    Lemon curd can only be described as nectar for the gods, and this bakery-tested version makes the grocery store variety completely obsolete. Ready in under 30 minutes, it is firm enough for piping or standing on its own in a tart that cuts to perfection. The uses are only up to your imagination. As a bonus, it can be frozen.
    How to Make Lemon Curd
    View post

    Lemon Sugar Buns

    These enriched European-style yeast buns are flavored with lemon zest and they take just minutes to come together. Let the dough rest overnight in the fridge and it is sooooo easy to roll out with no springing back whatsoever. The Swedish Pearl Sugar on top lends a crunchy finish that stays white and crisp even after baking. 
    Lemon Sugar Buns
    View post 

    Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    This Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce is one of those desserts that looks absolutely stunning — pale yellow sides with deep purple sauce running down them — and tastes every bit as good as it looks. A tart lemon curd folded with whipped cream and meringue over a vanilla wafer crust is already a winner, but that blueberry sauce is something you will find yourself making on repeat for pancakes, waffles, and ice cream long after summer ends. The component parts can all be made ahead and assembled when you are ready, making this a perfect make-ahead showpiece for any warm-weather gathering. This is a no-bake dessert.
    Lemonade Cake With Blueberry Sauce
    View post 

    Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake

    This cake takes a bit of time, but it is so stunning when presented cut that it is worth every single minute. One of the most fascinating aspects of this dessert is that it is not too sweet — it is perfectly balanced so that you remember every bite and want more. An exciting cake that I think will be just as exciting for you. 
    Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake
    View post 

    Split Lemon Layer Cake

    Bright and tangy, this unassuming-looking cake turns into an explosion of flavor in your mouth. What makes it truly unforgettable is the perfect balance of lemon in every single component — the cake, the filling, and the frosting — for the most vibrant flavor imaginable. Each element works together beautifully. 
    Split Lemon Layer Cake
    View post 

    Lemon Strawberry Cake

    This make-ahead, amazingly easy cake is naturally gluten free, which makes it a treat for almost anyone. The cake takes minutes in the processor, is liberally soaked in lemon syrup, and the shiny strawberry filling is a juicy, no-cook recipe that will genuinely enlarge your idea about thickeners. Despite its sophisticated look, it is really doable.

    Lemon Strawberry Cake
    View post 

    Lemon Meringue Cake

    This high-ratio cake is so easy to make that anyone can make it — and it is fast. Undiluted lemonade concentrate is the key ingredient, giving the batter a wallop of flavor that you simply cannot achieve any other way. Layered with lemon curd and fluffy meringue, it is one of my absolute favorites. 
    Lemon Meringue Cake
    View post 

    Lemon Rum Bundt Cake

    This is one of the best pound cakes I have ever eaten — the texture is like velvet on your tongue and the soaking syrup takes it somewhere truly special. Two flours, heavy cream, and no leavening beyond the air beaten into the butter and sugar make for a crumb that is nothing short of extraordinary. Easy to put together and completely unforgettable. 
    Lemon Rum Bundt Cake
    View post 

    Lemon Gooey Butter ake in a Brioche Crust

    This Lemon Gooey Butter Cake in Brioche Crust takes a beloved St. Louis classic and elevates it into something truly extraordinary — the crust is made with my 60 Second Brioche, a method so quick and easy it was featured on the cover of Bon Appetit and used in twelve recipes throughout the article. The rich, gooey lemon filling is paired with a lemon curd that cuts through the sweetness beautifully and makes every bite perfectly balanced. It is indulgent, impressive, and far simpler to pull off than it looks. 
    Lemon Gooey Butter Cake In Brioche Crust
    View post

    Treat your self to one or more to brighten your day!

    Amazing Boston Cream Cupcakes

    Modified: May 15, 2025 · Published: May 15, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    A Boston Cream Cupcake sits o a small blue and white plate with a server on the side and more cupcakes in the background.

    These Boston Cream Cupcakes with a slight twist are the perfect miniature replica of that wonderful Boston Cream Pie (which is actually a cake)! Just imagine a tender yellow cake, stuffed with a creamy homemade pastry cream (the instant pudding just doesn't do the job) and finished with a hot honey ganache or leave the hot out if that's your preference. And yes, I have a pastry cream that freezes - the same one we used at the bakery.

    Don't be put off by the number of collages. This goes fast and every step can be made ahead of time.

    A Boston Cream Cupcake sits o a small blue and white plate with a server on the side and more cupcakes in the background.

    Stressed for time? Aren't we all? Every part of these miniature wonders can be made ahead of time and assembled when needed. How much easier can this get? I know they don't get better.

    A few more filled cupcakes include the Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes, Banana Split Cupcakes and the Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins which are much more of a cupcake!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    These Boston Cream Cupcakes are truly Amazing!

    • Each component part can be made ahead of time and frozen.
    • Yes, the pastry cream can be frozen because it doesn't use cornstarch which loses it ability to thicken when thawed.
    • While I prefer jumbo size cupcakes, the regular size works just as well and you get twice as many.
    • Each of the parts takes 20 to 25 minutes to make (not counting the baking time) so they can be fit in whenever.
    • Last but not least - these are worth any amount of time - they are that good.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pastry Cream (Creme Patissiere)

    The ingredients for the pastry cream are milk, egg yolks, granulated sugar, flour, unsalted butter and vanilla,

    FRONT ROW: All-purpose flour, unsalted butter and vanilla extract

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, egg yolks and milk

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    Ingredients for the Yellow Buttermilk Cake include egg yolks, buttermilk, vanilla, cake flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, baking soda, salt and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, baking soda, vanilla extract, baking powder

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, egg yolks

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, cake flour, buttermilk

    Hot Honey Ganache

    Hot  honey ganache ingredients include honey, chocolate, heavy cream, butter and cayenne pepper.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, cayenne pepper

    BACK ROW: Honey, semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

    Key Ingredients

    • Egg yolks are used not only for taste but also for their ability to thicken.
    • The butter must be very soft (about 74° to 76°F but not runny for this recipee to work.
    • All-purpose flour is used as an additional thickening agent. Cornstarch breaks down if frozen and can become watery if held in the fridge.
    • Buttermilk adds tenderness to the cake and helps keep it moist.
    • Cake flour with its lower protein count, keeps the cake tender and light.
    • Both baking soda and baking powder are used as leavening agents. The baking soda neutralizes the acid in the buttermilk aiding the baking powder in helping the cake to rise.
    • The vanilla - here I use pure Tahitian Vanilla for its unmatched taste. It can be found in various places on the web. For the bakery, I bought it from Olive Nation as they had the best price. See below for more information on this vanilla.
    • My chocolate of choice has always been Callebaut #811 Chocolate Callets but I have switched to Trader Joe's pound plus. It is a superb semisweet chocolate made in Belgium which is known for their chocolates. The price difference per pound is huge due in large part to the tariffs. Pictured above is the Callebaut.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Why Tahitian Vanilla?

    I am a huge fan of tahitian vanilla - but only for certain recipes. While Madagascar Bourbon vanilla is the most used pure vanilla, tahitian vanilla is preferred by pastry chefs for its floral, fruity, sweet etheral and delicate flavor.

    As such it is best used when vanilla is the upfront flavor such as pastry cream, butter cookies, whipped cream and creme brulees. While many say it is best used for cold desserts, I used it at the bakery for all of those listed above. There was a noticeable difference in taste when other vanillas were used and despite its high cost, we always went back to it.

    It can be found in various places on the web. For the bakery, I bought it from Olive Nation as they had the best price. Neilson Massey is fine but they are always more expensive in all of their products. This is one of the most expensive and sought-after types of vanilla, due to their unique flavor profile and rarity. It is also produced in smaller batches.

    About This Pastry Cream

    This is a variation of my normal pastry cream that is set with flour and gelatin. This insured that the pastry cream would hold an edge if piped and could sit for a bit at room temperature when catered without softening and druping. This combination also ensures that the pastry cream can be frozen and thawed without breaking down as cornstarch does.

    For this pastry cream, I wanted something softer to fill the cupcakes so I omitted the gelatin and added butter. This pastry cream can also be frozen.

    Most pastry cream recipes call for straining the pastry cream after it is cooked. It is far easier to strain it before cooking it.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Pastry Cream

    This collage for pastry cream shows the sugar and egg yolks in a bowl, whisked together, the flour added and everything combined.

    Step 1. Place the egg yolks and sugar in a bowl. Step 2. Whisk together until combined. Step 3. Add the flour. Step 4. Whisk together.

    This collage shows the milk being added, whisked in, strained over the saucepan and the residue in the strainer.

    Step 5. Add the hot milk. Step 6. Whisk the ingredients so they are completely combined. Step 7. Place a strainer over the pot this will be cooked in. Step 8. Pour the mixture through the strainer to catch all the little lumps that would ruin your pastry cream.

    The last pastry cream collage shows the mixture transferred to a saucepan, brought to a boil, butte added and the pastry cream finished.

    Step 9. The strained pastry cream in a saucepan. Step 10. Stirring constantly, bring the pastry cream to a boil and boil for 1 minute to thicken it. Step 11. Remove the pan from the heat and add the butter. Step 12. Whisk in the butter, pour the cream into a storage container, cover the top directly with plastic wrap and let it cool to near room temperature. Refrigerate up to 3 days or freeze for several months. Thaw in the cooler to use.

    Cake

    The first collage for the cake shows the egg yolks, buttermilk and vanilla in a small bowl, whisked together, the flour, baking powder and baking soda in a mixing bowl and then mixed.

    Step 13. Place the egg yolks, 1/4 cup of buttermilk and vanilla in a small bowl. Step 14. Whisk together. Step 15. Place the cake flour, sugar, baking powder and baking soda in the bowl of a mixer. Step 16. Mix briefly to combine.

    The butter and remaining buttermilk are added to the dry ingredients in the mixing bowl, the batter is brought together, 1/3 ov the egg mixture is added and beaten in.

    Step 17. Add the very soft butter and remaining buttermilk to the dry ingredients. Step 18. Mix on low to medium to moisten the ingredients. Then raise to medium and beat for 2 minutes. Scrape down. Step 19. Add 1/3 of the egg mixture, beating for 30 seconds on medium after each addition.

    The final collage for the cake show the last of the egg mixture in, and the final batter, the  cupcakes filled and baked.

    Step 21. This is the last third of the egg mixture added. Step 22. Beat for 30 seconds to complete the batter. Step 23. Fill the cupcake papers 3/4 full. A number 6 disher/scooper works well here. There will be 7 or 8 cupcakes. Step 23. Bake as directed. Cool on a rack. Use immediately or freeze for several months, wrapping well in foil.

    Assembly

    This collage shows the pastry cream being whisked, the top cut from the cupcake, the insert with the pointed end and the pointed end being cut offg, the cupcakes filled.

    Step 25. Whisk the pastry cream to loosen it. Do not over whisk. It should still be stiff. Step 26. Remove the papers from the cupcakes. Brush off all of the crumbs on the sides and bottom. I did this with my hand. Make a hole for the pastry cream by cutting the top at an angle to hold the filling. Step 27. Remove the insert and cut the pointed edge off so it is about 1/4" deep. I should have cut almost to the bottom but not through it and taken more of the cake out so more pastry cream could be piped or spoon in. Step 28. Fill the cupcakes to within 1/4 inch deep and replace the top. Freeze the cupcakes at this point while preparing the ganache. It is easiest to dip the cupcakes if they are partially frozen so the top stays in place. 15 to 20 minutes usually does the job.

    Hot Honey Ganache

    The last collages shows the hot honey ganache ingredients in a saucepan heated to  steaming the chocolate submerged, a cupcake turned upside down and the finished chocolate topped cupcakes.

    You will be making more ganache than is needed in order to be able to dip the seven or 8 cupcakes. The remainder is excellent when warmed and thinned slightly with more cream as a sauce for ice cream, pound cake or anything needing a chocolate sauce.

    Step 28. Place the ingredients in a saucepan.Heat just until steamy hot but not boiling. Step 30. Submerge the chocolate under the hot mixture and let it sit for about 4 to 5 minutes. Step 31. Stir or whisk gently to avoid air bubbles until smooth. Let the ganache sit for about 5 minutes. Remove the cupcakes from the freezer and brush off all the crumbs again to keep the ganache crumb free. Then dip each cupcake, upside down, into the ganache. Step 32. Place it on a parchment paper to set up.

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Do Boston Cream Cupcakes need to be refrigerated?

    Yes. Because they contain pastry cream filling. Boston Cream Cupcakes should always be refrigerated after assembling. Let them sit at room temperature for about 15 minutes before serving for the best flavor and texture.

    Can Boston Cream Cupcakes be made ahead of time?

    Yes — and they’re often even better the next day. The pastry cream has time to set and the cupcake becomes extra moist. Store them covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days for the best texture and flavor.

    What chocolate works best for the ganache topping?

    Semi-sweet chocolate is the classic choice because it balances the sweetness of the pastry cream and cake. Dark chocolate creates a more elegant flavor.

    Storage and Freezing

    The cupcakes must be refrigerated after being made. They can sit out for 15 or 20 minutes prior to serving to take the chill off.

    All of the component parts for this recipe can be frozen separately. The pastry cream should be thawed in the fridge while the cupcakes and ganache can be thawed at room temperature.

    Additionally, the entire cupcakes can be frozen, well wrapped and thawed in the fridge.

    Expert Tips

    • The pastry cream should come to a boil and cook for 1 full minute to ensure it's thickness when done.
    • Either whole or 2% milk may be used. Whole milk makes a slightly thicker pastry cream and is more luxurious.
    • It is important to put the liquid mixture through a strainer to catch the hard, white chalazae which is two strands of protein that anchors the yolk in the middle of the egg. When cooked they are hard. Straining the liquid mixture before it is cooked is not only important it is easier than the old fashioned method of straining it after it is cooked and thickened.
    • Once the sugar and egg yolks are combined in a bowl, whisk them immediately or a chemical reaction takes place causing the sugar to absorb the moisture out of the raw egg yolks, causing them to dehydrate, congeal, and form hard, irreversible lumps which is irreversible. As soon as they are combined, add the milk.
    • Use the mixing times given when making the cake batter. It is important to the texture of the baked cake.
    • When cutting the center out of the cupcakes, go close to the bottom but not through it. Make the hole large enough to hold a generous amount of filling. Fill to within 1/4" of the top.
    • The very top of the cupcake that has been cut out should be cut to 1/4" and replaced over the pastry cream.
    • It is easiest to dip the cupcakes if they are frozen for 20 to 25 minutes so the top stays in place when they are dipped into the ganache.
    • For the best looking cupcakes, remove the paper cups and brush off all of the crumbs. I just used my hand to go around the edges and bottom. This is key to keep the crumbs from contaminating the ganache.
    • Refrigerate the completed cupcakes after dipping them or freeze them for longer storage. Freeze until hard, then wrap in plastic wrap and foil where they will last a couple of months. Thaw in the fridge.
    • There will be ganache left over. It is the nature of the beast that it takes a lot to be able to dip them. Great uses for the leftover ganache is to heat it briefly if cold, add a bit more cream and you have the greatest chocolate sauce ever to use on ice cream, cake or anywhere you want.
    Boston Cream Cupcakes sit on a plate edged with flowers and leaves.

    More Tasty pick up treats

    • French Beignets with coffee
      Irresistible French Beignets - A Weekend Treat
    • Apple Fritters with Speculass Spice
      Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice
    • Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
      Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
    • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
      A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A Boston Cream Cupcake sits o a small blue and white plate with a server on the side and more cupcakes in the background.

    Amazing Boston Cream Cupcakes

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Boston Cream Cupcakes with a slight twist are the perfect miniature replica of that wonderful Boston Cream Pie (which is actually a cake)! And yes, I have a pastry cream that freezes - the same one we used at the bakery.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 hours hrs
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
    Course Cupcakes
    Cuisine American
    Servings 7 cupcakes
    Calories 1053 kcal

    Equipment

    • Jumbo or regular cupcake pans
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pastry Cream

    • 1 1/3 cup milk, hot
    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 1/2 cup granulated sugar
    • 1/4 cup all-purpose flour
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 teaspoon Tahitian vanilla or other pure vanilla

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 2/3 cup buttermilk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • 2 1/4 cups cake flour (225 grams)
    • 1 1/4 cup granulated sugar (225 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 3/4 cup unsalted butter, softened (170 grams)

    Hot Honey Ganache

    • 1/2 cup heavy cream
    • 1/4 cup honey
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1/4 teaspoon cayenne pepper, optional
    • 10 ounces semisweet chocolate (280 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Pastry Cream

    • This must be made at least a day ahead or several days ahead. It can also be frozen and thawed in the fridge overnight.
    • Whisk the egg yolks and sugar together in a non-reactive bowl. Whisk in the flour.
    • Add the hot milk making sure they are completely combined.
    • Pour the mixture through a strainer over a medium size saucepan. Place over medium heat and, stirring constantly, bring to a boil. Boil for 1 minute, stirring constantly to avoid lumps.
    • Remove from the heat and add the butter and vanilla, whisking them into the hot pastry cream. Pour into a storage container, cover with plastic wrap and bring to near room temperature. Refrigerate immediately.

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    • The butter must be very soft but not runny for this recipe. A temperature of 74°F to 76°F is ideal.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line 7 to 8 jumbo muffin cups with paper liners or 14 to 16 regular size muffin cups. Set aside.
    • Whisk the yolks, 1/4 of the buttermilk and the vanilla in a small bowl. Set aside.
    • In the bowl of a mixer, place the cake flour, sugar, baking powder and baking soda. Mix to combine.
    • Add the butter and the remaining buttermilk. Mix on low to moisten the ingredients, then raise the speed to medium and beat for 2 minutes. Scrape down.
    • Add the egg yolk mixture in thirds, beating 30 seconds after each addition. Scrap down between additions.
    • Fill the muffin cups 3/4 full. Bake the jumbo cups for 20 to 22 minutes. Bake the regular size for 15 to 18 minutes. The cupcakes will be golden brown, spring back when lightly touched or when a tester comes out clean. Cool for about 10 minutes or until they can be safely handled. Remove them to cooling racks to cool completely.
    • if not using immediately, freeze until hard and wrap well in foil where they will keep for a couple of months. Thaw on cooling racks.

    Assembly

    • Hollow out the cupcakes by cutting almost to the bottom being careful not to go through the bottom. Hold the knife at an angle while cutting. Remove the cake that has been cut out, keeping the top intact. Trim the top to 1/4" deep.
    • Remove the pastry cream from the fridge and whisk it smooth it out. Do not over whisk as you want this to remain firm but smooth. Place it in a pastry bag fit with a 1/2" plain tip and fill the cupcakes to within 1/4" from the top. Place the trimmed top on top, pressing down to even it with the top of the cupcake.
    • Remove the cupcakes from their liners and brush off all the crumbs on the side and bottom. I just used my hand to go around the outside edges several times. This will keep crumbs from contaminating the ganache when they are dipped.
    • Place them in the freezer while you make the ganache.

    Hot Honey Ganache

    • Combine all of the ingredients except the chocolate in a small saucepan and heat until steamy hot but do not let it boil. Remove it from the heat and add the chocolate.
    • Let it sit for 4 or 5 minutes, then stir or whisk very gently until completely combined. Do not be too enthusiastic if using a whisk or you risk getting air bubbles in the ganache.
    • For the easiest way to dip the cupcakes, make sure the top is frozen in place. Go around the cupcakes again to make sure there are no crumbs.
    • Pick up a cupcake and dip it into the ganache upside down. Place it on parchment paper to set.
    • Store in the refrigerator until serving. Pull them out 15 to 20 minutes prior to serving to take chill off. Keep any remaining in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest. 
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ________________________________________________
    The pastry cream should come to a boil and cook for 1 full minute to ensure it's thickness when done.
    Either whole or 2% milk may be used. Whole milk makes a slightly thicker pastry cream and is more luxurious.
    It is important to put the liquid mixture through a strainer to catch the hard, white chalazae which is two strands of protein that anchors the yolk in the middle of the egg. When cooked they are hard. Straining the liquid mixture before it is cooked is not only important it is easier than the old fashioned method of straining it after it is cooked and thickened.
    Once the sugar and egg yolks are combined in a bowl, whisk them immediately or a chemical reaction takes place causing the sugar to absorb the moisture out of the raw egg yolks, causing them to dehydrate, congeal, and form hard, irreversible lumps which is irreversible. As soon as they are combined, add the milk. 
    Use the mixing times given when making the cake batter. It is important to the texture of the baked cake. 
    When cutting the center out of the cupcakes, go close to the bottom but not through it. While you do not want to hollow out the cupcake, make the hole large enough add filling up to 1/4" from the top. 
    The very top of the cupcake that has been cut out should be cut to 1/4" and replaced over the pastry cream.
    It is easiest to dip the cupcakes if they are frozen for 20 to 25 minutes so the top stays in place when they are dipped into the ganache.
    For the best looking cupcakes, remove the paper cups and brush off all of the crumbs. I just used my hand to go around the edges and bottom. This is key to keep the crumbs from contaminating the ganache.
    Refrigerate the completed cupcakes after dipping them or freeze them for longer storage. Freeze until hard, then wrap in plastic wrap and foil where they will last a couple of months. Thaw in the fridge. 
    There will be ganache left over. It is the nature of the beast that it takes a lot to be able to dip them. Great uses for the leftover ganache is to heat it briefly if cold, add a bit more cream and you have the greatest chocolate sauce ever to use on ice cream, cake or anywhere you want. 
    If your honey granulates and isn't liquid, microwave it for about 5 seconds to liquify it again. Alternatively, it can be placed over hot water.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8cupcakesCalories: 1053kcalCarbohydrates: 118gProtein: 14gFat: 59gSaturated Fat: 35gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 17gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 318mgSodium: 449mgPotassium: 433mgFiber: 4gSugar: 79gVitamin A: 1602IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 195mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    The Only Muffin Recipes You'll Ever Need — All From a Bowl and a Whisk!

    Modified: May 11, 2025 · Published: May 12, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A split double strawberry muffin showing its pink interior next to a streusel-topped muffin on a white scalloped plate with a fresh strawberry.

    After more than 25 years of owning a professional bakery, I can tell you with complete confidence that truly spectacular muffins don't require fancy equipment or complicated techniques. A bowl, a whisk, a few measuring utensils — that's really all it takes. What matters most is the recipe itself, and over the years I've developed and refined a collection I'm genuinely proud of. Whether you're after something bursting with fresh fruit, swirled with jam, loaded with chocolate, or crowned with a crunchy streusel, there is something here for every muffin craving imaginable.

    Several of these come together in literal minutes, many freeze beautifully, and more than a few are perfect projects to make with young ones. From the Olympic-inspired Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins to the irresistible Brown Sugar Almond Crumb on the Blueberry Crumb Muffins, every recipe in this roundup has earned its place. These are the muffins I make again and again — and once you try them, I think you'll understand why.

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    If you're looking for soft, tender cinnamon coffee cake muffins that taste like they came straight from a bakery case, there's no need to look any further. A streusel topping is mixed with a fork and set aside, then the batter comes together with nothing more than a bowl and a whisk. Pockets of melted cinnamon chips throughout make these taste just like a coffee cake — only easier. 

    Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)

    View post 

    Blueberry Crumb Muffins

    Tender, cake-like muffins loaded with blueberries and finished with a Brown Sugar Almond Crumb that makes them absolutely irresistible. I prefer wild blueberries when I can find them — smaller, more intense in flavor, and worth snatching up on sight. This is easily one of the best and most straightforward muffins you'll ever make. 

    Blueberry Crumb Muffins

    View post 

    Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

    This is my riff on the Olympic chocolate muffin that took Paris by storm during the Paris Games — translated from grams into volume and interpreted in my own way. The cakey part of the muffin is outstanding and comes together in literally minutes with no mixer needed. And that truffle filling right in the middle? It makes this one of the most exciting recipes in my entire muffin repertoire. 

    Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins

    View post 

    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

    Super easy, super fast, and honestly one of the best muffins I make — the key is lots of apples and a crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love. The topping alone is worth the entire muffin. Even better, it freezes beautifully and comes out of the freezer just as crisp and crunchy as when it left the oven. 

    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe

    View post 

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    Cranberries team up beautifully with other fruits, and nowhere better than in these vibrant muffins brightened with orange zest. One of my most favorite things about fall is cranberries arriving around the middle of October, and this is a perfect recipe to put them to use. A touch of almond extract alongside the vanilla rounds out the flavor in the most lovely way. Frozen cranberries can be found year around in the freezer cases of grocery stores - so there's no need to wait until the fall!

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    View post 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    Two bowls, a whisk, a rubber spatula — combine the dry ingredients in one, the liquid in another, mix them together, plop them in the cups, and into the oven they go. A few minutes later you have hot pumpkin muffins with pecan streusel that are perfect for breakfast, brunch, or any time of day. They freeze well too. What more can you ask of a muffin? 

    Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    View post 

    Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

    You don't have to be a kid to love peanut butter and jelly — no matter your age, this satisfies that craving every single time. It's important to use jam rather than jelly here, as jelly has a tendency to run out in the heat of the oven while the thicker jams stay put. Any flavor of jam works, and the whole thing comes together in no time with ingredients you likely already have on hand. 

    Peanut Butter & Jam Muffins

    View post 

    Best of All Strawberry Muffins

    Fresh strawberries are used two ways here — pureed into the batter to intensify the flavor and cut into pieces for bursts of sweet, tart fruit throughout. A full pound of the ripest, most flavorful strawberries you can find goes into every batch. No mixer needed, which makes this a great recipe to make with children and one of the easiest in my bowl-and-a-whisk collection.

    Best of All Strawberry Muffins

    View post

    So get out a bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils and you'll have the best muffins that are oh so easy to make!

    7 Quick Wins for Mother's Day

    Modified: May 5, 2026 · Published: May 7, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A stack of Simple Samoa cookie Bars.

    Mothers are special and these recipes are sure to please. If you're really pressed for time, take a look at the new category for No Bake Recipes.

    A stack of Simple Samoa cookie Bars.
    Strawberry Cake - A little Slice of Heaven
    This Strawberry Cake features the easiest, best white cake you'll ever make teamed with an easy to make American buttercream that actually tastes like a strawberry party in your mouth. Whip up a cloud of cream and you're almost done. Of course, I include make ahead steps for your convenience.
    Check out this recipe
    Slices of Strawberry Cake on a marble plate.
    Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins
    This easy muffing comes together quickly with No mixer needed and it comes together in literally minutes. A very special treat for a chocolate lover.
    Check out this recipe
    A stack of Simple Samoa cookie Bars.
    Simple Samoa Cookie Bars
    These Samoa Cookie Bars are the essence of minimum work for maximum flavor. A melt in your mouth shortbread crust topped with homemade caramel (you can do it, it's foolproof) chock full of toasted coconut with the bottoms dipped in chocolate. Just like the Girl Scout cookie version but in a much simpler form.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake
    This Apple Cinnamon Coffee Cake is the perfect cake for crumb lovers. The ratio of crumbs to cake is almost equal and that's my type of coffee cake. A river of cinnamon apples runs through a sour cream coffee cake that stays softly delicious for days under a cake cover.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Coconut Tart
    The only way to adequately describe this Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust. You'll especially like the no bake aspect of making this.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.
    A lice of the Chocolate Strawberry Pie sits on a white and green plate with an orange runner behind it,
    Chocolate Strawberry Pie
    If you love chocolate covered strawberries (and who doesn't) this Chocolate Strawberry Pie is for you. Gorgeous looking and delicious, it's a snap to make.
    Check out this recipe
    Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
    The shortbread cookies are a snap to make in any shapes you like and this post shows you a variety of easy but gorgeous ways of decorating them without a piping bag.
    Check out this recipe
    A variety of ways to decorate shortbread cookies.

    Happy Mother's Day to all the mothers and grandmothers who celebrate their special day.

    Strawberry Crumb Tart Recipe

    Modified: May 5, 2025 · Published: May 5, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A slice of the Strawberry Crumb Tart on an antique plate with a fork and the tart in the background.

    What could be more inviting than this Strawberry Crumb Tart? Fresh strawberries on top of Nutella along with an unusual shaping technique that requires no tart pan. It's quickly mixed in the processor with an easy assembly. While it's best eaten freshly made, I'll show you how to manage the assembly ahead of time.

    A slice of the Strawberry Crumb Tart on an antique plate with a fork and the tart in the background.

    Fresh strawberries on top of Nutella ensure a combination that's hard to beat. The technique of assembling this is easy and quick.

    Be sure to check out these other strawberry recipes. Strawberry Bread, Strawberry Cake - A little taste of Heaven, (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie, Chocolate Strawberry Pie, and Strawberry Surprise Cupcakes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    Crumb Topping

    Ingredients for the Crumb Topping are unsalted butter, granulated sugar, brown sugar, cake flour and almond extract,

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted Butter, almond extract

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, brown sugar and granulated sugar

    Pastry Dough

    Ingredients for the pastry dough are yeast,  all-purpose flour, unsalted butter, sour cream granulated sugar, egg yolk. vanilla extract and water

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla extract, granulated sugar, instant yeast, water

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, egg yolk, sour cream

    Assembly

    For the assembly the ingredients used are fresh strawberries, nutella, an egg, and powdered sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Strawberries, an egg

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, Nutella

    Be sure to see the recipe card below foar the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Crumb Topping

    for the crumb topping the flour is in the processor, the butter is added, the crumbs are made.

    Step 1. Place the flour, granulated and brown sugar in the processor bowl. Pulse to mix. Step 2. Cut the cold butter into pieces. Place the butter over the dry ingredients. Step 3.  Pulse the processor until the crumbs form. Do not over process or a paste will form. Step 4. Transfer to a bowl and refrigerate until needed.

    Pastry Dough

    For the pastry dough the flour is added to t he processor and processed to mix, the cold butter is cubed and added, the remainder of the ingredients are added and processed to form the dough.

    Step 5. Place the flour in the processor bowl and pulse to mix. Step 6. Add the cold cubed butter and process until indistinguishable. Step 7. Combine the water, vanilla and yeast, stir to mix. Add this along with the remainder of the ingredients. Step 8. Process until a ball forms.

    The dough is shaped into a ball, rolled out, and a 10" circle is cut out.

    Step 9. Shape the dough into a flat round. Refrigerate if too chill or overnight. Step 10. Roll the dough slightly bigger than 10". Step 11. Place a 10" cake round, plate or lid on top. Step 12. Cut out the 10" round. Place on parchment paper, transfer to a half sheet and chill while assembling the ingredients for the tart.

    Assembly

    Whole Strawberries are cut in half, a Bowl is placed in the center of the pastry, Nutella is spread to within 1/4" of the edge of the pstry and the strawberry halvescover it,

    Step 13. Select 8 to 10 strawberries of the same size. Step 14. Trim the tops and cut them in half. Step 15. Place a 5 to 6" bowl in the center of the pastry round. Spread the Nutella to within 1/4' of the edge. It is easiest to do this with the back of a spoon. Step 16. Place the strawberry halves on top of the Nutella with the sides touching.

    This collage shows the edge being crimped, the center of the dough and turned over the strawberries.

    Step 17. To crimp the edges use your index finger and just push the dough in. Step 18. Remove the bowl and cut the center of the exposed dough into eighths. This is easily done with a pizza cutter. Step 19. Turn the dough triangles over the strawberries. Step 20. Complete the tart.

    The final collages shows the egg beaten, the trt egg washed, the crumbs added and the baked tart powdered sugared.

    Step 21. Beat an egg until no white is showing. Step 22. Egg wash the top of the pastry, including the egg. This will hold the crumbs on. Step 23. Press the crumbs onto the tart and bake as directed. Step 24. After the tart is cooled, dust it lightly with powdered sugar.

    Make Ahead Instructions

    Prepare the tart through Step 15. Remove the bowl and cover with plastic wrap. Refrigerate or freeze overnight or up to several days. When ready to finish, remove it from the fridge or freezer. If using from the fridge, finish the tart as above placing the bowl back on the pastry before adding the strawberries. If removing from the freezer, allow to thaw but keep it cold.

    This Tart should be eaten the same day it is made.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Can frozen strawberries be used for the Strawberry Crumb Tart?

    No, only firm but ripe, fresh strawberries should be used. They will soften in the oven but the frozen ones will be limp, soft and moist before going into the oven and will become soggy ruining the tart.

    What makes this Strawberry Crumb Tart different?

    There is no tart pan needed to make this tart. It is made on the sheet pan on which it is baked.

    Why do the strawberries need to be the same size?

    To fill the tart shell equally around and prevent smaller ones from baking faster and exuding too much juice. There is no thickening in this tart

    Expert Tips

    • Cold is the key with the pastry. If it warms up too much it will be harder to transfer to the parchment paper.
    • The strawberries should be about 2" long after trimming to cover the Nutella and keep their shape after baking.
    • After egg washing the completed tart, make sure to press the crumbs in place so they don't fall off during baking. The egg wash will act as a glue.
    • Use more or less crumbs as desired. Store the remainder in the freezer to use on muffins, quick breads, other tarts or coffee cakes.
    • The almond extract can be changed to vanilla according to your preference.
    • Don't over bake the tart. The pastry should just start to color.
    • Despite the fact there is yeast in the dough, it never rises before using.
    A slice of the Strawberry Crumb Tart on an antique plate with a fork and the tart in the background.

    A few more strawberry offerings

    • Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.
      Strawberry Brownies
    • Slices of the Strawberry Cake sit on a marble plate with fresh strawberries.
      Strawberry Cake - A Little Slice of Heaven
    • A lone Banana Split Cupcake with its vibrant pink strawberry buttercream and drizzled with chocolate sits on a pink rimmed plate.
      Banana Split Cupcakes
    • A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.
      Viennese Whirl Cookies

    If you love this recipe or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here.

    A slice of the Strawberry Crumb Tart on an antique plate with a fork and the tart in the background.

    Strawberry Crumb Tart Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    What could be more inviting than this Strawberry Crumb Tart? Fresh strawberries on top of Nutella along with an unusual shaping technique that requires no tart pan. It's quickly mixed in the processor with an easy assembly.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Chilling dough 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 48 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 355 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor
    • 1/2 sheet pan
    • Small bowl with 5 1/2 to 6" top diameter
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Crumb Topping

    • 1/4 cup unsalted butter, cold (58 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons brown sugar (35 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar (35 hgrams)
    • 2/3 cup cake flour (75 grams)
    • 1/2 teaspoon almond extract

    Pastry Dough

    • 2 teaspoons warm water
    • 3/4 teaspoon instant yeast
    • 1/2 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1/4 cup unsalted butter, cold (58 grams)
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour (140 grams)
    • 1/4 cup sour cream (58 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar (40 grams)
    • 1 large egg yolk

    Assembly

    • 10 2 1/2" strawberries *
    • 1/3 to 1/2 cup Nutella
    • 1 large egg
    • powdered sugar as needed
    • *The strawberries need to be the same size. They should be ripe but firm and not overly ripe.

    Instructions
     

    Crumb Topping

    • The butter needs to be cold. Cut it into small cubes.
    • Place the cake flour, granulated and brown sugars in the bowl of a processor. Process to mix completely.
    • Add the butter and almond extract. Pulse to form crumbs. Do not over process or it will become a paste. Refrigerate until needed. This can be made a few days ahead and kept covered in the fridge.

    Pastry Dough - Despite the fact that this dough has yeast in it, it is never put to rise.

    • The butter needs to be refrigerator cold. Cut in small cubes. Keep cold.
    • Combine the water, yeast, and vanilla in a tiny bowl. Stir together and set aside.
    • Place the flour in the processor and pulse to mix.
    • Add the cold butter and process until the butter is indistinguishable.
    • Add the remaining ingredients including the yeast mixture and process until a ball forms. Refrigerate for several hours until cold and firm.
    • The pastry dough can be made a day or two ahead, wrapped and refrigerated.

    Assembly - This should be assembled the day it is served. See below for making it ahead.

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Remove the dough from the fridge. If it is hard, let it sit for a few minutes until you can roll it. Do not let it get soft - it should remain cold.
    • Roll the dough into a 10 1/2" or 11" round. Center a 10" cake board, plate turned upside down or a lid on the dough. Cut out the 10" round. Transfer to the parchment lined half sheet pan. Place in the fridge while you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
    • Rinse and dry the strawberries. Cut the tops off and then cut them in half top to bottom.
    • If the following instructions are a bit confusing, please refer to the photos where it will become very clear.
    • Remove the pastry base from the fridge. Place a 5 1/2" to 6" bowl in the center of the pastry. Spread Nutella on the exposed dough to within 1/4" of the edge of the circle.
    • Place the strawberries touching each other with the pointed ends touching the bowl extending to the edge of the Nutella so the entire base is covered.
    • Crimp the edge of the pastry using your index finger and just pushing it in to meet the Nutella.
    • Carefully, remove the bowl and cut the exposed pastry into 8 wedges. This is easiest done with a pizza cutter. Cut it in half, then fourths and finally eights.
    • Pick up one wedge at a time and cover the strawberries with it. Continue around until all 8 wedges are over strawberries.
    • Beat the egg with a fork until there is no white showing. Brush the pastry and tops of the strawberries with the egg. This will hold the crumbs in place.
    • Cover the tart with a much or little of the crumbs as desired, pressing them onto the egg wash.
    • Bake for 18 to 22 minutes or until the pastry is very lightly browned..
    • To serve, cut between the pastry wedges for one serving.
    • To Make Ahead: The crumbs and dough can both be made ahead and refrigerated or frozen. If frozen, thaw overnight in the fridge. Prepare through spreading the Nutella on the pastry. Remove the bowl, cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight or freeze for several days. If frozen, thaw in the fridge overnight. Replace the bowl on the pastry. Continue as above in the instructions.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________________
    Cold is the key with the pastry. If it warms up too much it will be harder to transfer to the parchment paper.
    The strawberries should be about 2" long after trimming the tops to cover the Nutella and keep their shape after baking.
    After egg washing the completed tart, make sure to press the crumbs in place so they don't fall off during baking. The egg wash will act as a glue. 
    If there are crumbs left over, store the remainder in the freezer to use on muffins, quick breads, other tarts or coffee cakes.
    The almond extract can be changed to vanilla according to your preference. 
    Don't over bake the tart. . The pastry should just start to color.
    Despite the fact there is yeast in the dough, it never rises before using.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servingsCalories: 355kcalCarbohydrates: 43gProtein: 6gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 81mgSodium: 22mgPotassium: 142mgFiber: 2gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 466IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 41mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Split Lemon Layer Cake

    Modified: Apr 29, 2026 · Published: Apr 29, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 16 Comments

    The Lemon Layer Cake is on a clear plate with a vase in the background and a serving utensil.

    Bright and tangy, this unassuming looking Split Lemon Layer Cake turns into an explosion of flavor in your mouth. Each bite tastes of fresh lemon, balanced by a delicate sweetness that's completely achievable right in your own kitchen.

    The Lemon Layer Cake is on a clear plate with a vase in the background and a serving utensil.

    What makes this lemon cake truly unforgettable is its perfect balance of lemon in every component - the cake, the filling and the frosting for the most vibrant flavor. From the easily made high ratio cake layers to the luscious lemon filling and amazing lemon frosting, each works together beautifully. Whether you’re baking for a spring gathering, a special celebration, or simply craving something bright and refreshing, this recipe walks you step-by-step to lemon cake perfection.

    If you love bold lemon desserts, you’ll also want to try: Triple Lemon Cake, Lemon Meringue Pie (with a perfect mernigue that doesn't weep or pull away), Lemon Meringue Cake, Blueberry Lemon Poke Cake, or the Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce. Another impressive cake is the Pecan Upside Down Cake. And you must try my Traditional German Chocolate Cake recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a High Ratio Cake?

    High ratio cakes are the quickest and easiest way to make a butter cake. They require the sugar to be equal to or exceed the amount of flour by weight not by volume. Not every cake can be mixed this way.

    Basically, part of the wet ingredients are held out and mixed together. The remaining ingredients are added to the mixing bowl. After about a 2 ½ minute mix the wet ingredients are added in thirds, mixed for 30 seconds each and that's it. Into the pans it goes. It just doesn't get any easier, faster or better.

    What Makes This an Amazing Lemon Buttercream?

    While it consists of only three ingredients, it is the lemon filling along with powdered sugar and a little butter that really makes this unique. I wanted a frosting that would truly taste of lemon - not just a hint of it which ruled out lemon juice. And I don't like zest in the frosting because it won't be smooth. By holding out part of the filling and adding it to the buttercream it ticked off all the boxes and is truly is amazing!

    Useful Tools for Filling and Finishing This Cake

    These are tools I used to fill, decorate and finish this cake. The offset spatulas are essential to finish a cake smoothly. They come in different sizes. The two metal pancake turners make transferring baked goods easy by placing them on opposite sides and lifting. This is the same way we did it at the bakery. These utensils are not mandatory but they sure do help when filling and finishing cakes or pastries.

    The pizza cutter makes quick work of dividing sheet cakes into layers and the ruler assist not only in measuring but giving the pizza cutter something to lean agains. The final tool is my very old and trusty decorating comb or sometimes called a decorating triangle. It has three edges with different sizes of combs. It is an easy way to add decoration to the sides or top of a cake.

    All of these are available at kitchen shops or online.

    Equipment for filling and finishing a cake include a pizza cutter, small and large offset spatulas, a straight metal spatula, two pancake turners and a ruller.

    Left to Right: Pizza cutter, small and large offset spatulas, straight metal spatula, two metal pancake turners (it is best to use solid turners with no cutouts for the cake to get stuck in), an 18" metal ruler that can be washed and in front a decorating comb or triangle.

    Why This Recipe Works

    • Every component is lemon flavored reinforcing each other.
    • Both the cake and filling can be made ahead and assembled when needed
    • The cake is a high ratio cake that is not only easy but guarantees a soft, tender cake by carefully controlling the mixing.
    • The professional looking finish is easy to achieve.
    • The balance between sweet and tangy keeps one from overwhelming the other.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Lemon Filling

    The ingredients for the Lemon filling are: water, granulated sugar, cornstarch, salt, unsalted butter, lemon juice and lemon zest.

    FRONT ROW: Lemon zest, unsalted butter, salt

    MIDDLE ROW: Egg yolks, cornstarch

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, lemon juice

    Lemon Sour Cream Cake

    Cake ingredients are: egg yolks, sour cream, cake flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, unsalted butter, vanilla and lemon zest

    FRONT ROW: Egg yolks, baking powder, lemon zest, vanilla extract

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter, sour cream

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, granulated sugar

    Lemon Frosting

    The three ingredients for the frosting are powdered sugar, lemon filling and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar and lemon filling.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Lemon Filling

    The collage for the lemon filling for the Lemon Layer Cake shows all of the ingredients in a saucee pan, whisked together, finished cooking and covered with plastic wrap in a bowl,

    Step 1. Place all of the ingredients in a medium size saucepan. Step 2. Whisk together. Step 3. Stirring constantly, bring the ingredients to a boil. Boil for 1 minute. Step 4. Transfer to a storage container, cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate. This can be made two days ahead.

    Lemon Sour Cream Cake

    This collages shows the  liquid ingredinets in a bowl, whisked together, the dry ingredients in a bowl and the butter and sour cream added.

    Step 5. Place the egg yolks, vanilla and 14 cup sour cream in a small bowl. Step 6. Whisk together. Step 7. Combine the flour, sugar, baking powder, and lemon zest in the bowl of a mixer. Beat together for 30 seconds to blend. Step 8. Add the butter and remaining sour cream. Mix on low speed until the dry ingredients are moistened. Increase to medium speed and beat for 1 1/2 minutes.

    This collages shows the cake mixed and the first addition of the liquid, the finished batter, it dolloped on a baking sheet and spread out evenly.

    Step 9. Gradually add the egg mixture in thirds, beating 30 seconds each time on medium. Step 10. Add the last of the egg mixture and beat for 30 seconds. Step 11. Dollop the batter on a parchment lined half sheet pan. Step 12. Spread out evenly, and bake as directed. The layers can be frozen hard, wrapped well in foil and stored for up to 3 months in the freezer.

    This collage shows the ruler and pizza cutter  to cut the cake in the background, the ruler on the cake, the cake cut vertically and then horizontally ito 4 pieces.

    Step 13. The easiest way to cut the cake is to use a ruler and a pizza cutter. The pizza cutter gives a smooth cut. Trim the cake on the short ends to make a 16" cake layer. Step 14. The ruler marks 4" from the side. Step 15. Cut a line straight up vertically. Step 16. Turn the cake horizontally and cut the long strip in half making 2 4" x 8" layers. Cut the remaining cake into 4- 4" x 8" layers.

    This collage for the Lemon Layer Cake shows one of the layers torn to pieces in a bowl with the remaining 5 layers intact, the torn layer in a food processor and processed to crumbs and the lemon filling being whisked smooth.

    Step 17. Tear one layer into pieces, keeping the other 5 intact. Step 18. Place the torn layer in the processor. Step 19. Process with pulses to make crumbs. Spread them out on a baking sheet to dry slightly while preparing the rest of the cake. Step 20. Whisk the filling to smooth it out briefly. Do not over whisk as it may loosen it too much.

    This collage shows the filling on a cake layer spread to within 1/4" of the edges, the top layer being added, the ingredients for the frosting in a mixing bowl, and mixed.

    Step 21. Spread 1/3 cup filling over each of 4 layers to within 1/4" of the edge. The filling will spread to the edges when the next layer is added. Step 22. Place the fifth layer on top with no filling. Step 23. Place the powdered sugar, very soft butter and the remainder of the lemon filling in the bowl of a mixer fitted with the paddle attachment. Step 24. Beat the ingredients on low until they come together, then raise it to medium and finally high. Continue beating until very light and increased in volume. It took me about 5 minutes after the ingredients came together. If it isn't sufficiently beaten the powder sugar will remain grainy.

    The last collage shows the cake frosted, the top finished with a decorating triangle, crumbs on th e side of the cake and channeling the bottom.

    Step 25. Cover the sides of the cake and top with the Lemon Frosting. Step 26. Use a decorating comb or sometimes called a triangle to swirl the top of the cake. Step 27. Cover the sides with the lemon cake crumbs. This is easiest to do by holding the cake on a cake board or other flat plate in your left hand and picking up the crumbs in your right hand pressing them into the frosting from the bottom to the top. Step 28. This is a professional tip make it easier to move the cake from the work board to the final presentation plate. It is called chanelling. Place a straight metal spatula under the bottom edge of the cake and remove about 1/8" of the frosting. Then go under the cake to make sure it will release cleanly when you move it. Make sure you are keeping the spatula pressed on the board and not on the cake. I use two pancake turners placed on either end of the cake to lift it up and place it on its final plate.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why does my lemon cake taste bland?

    The strongest lemon flavor comes from lemon zest. If your cake is bland add more lemon zest. Two to three tablespoons is a good ratio for a 2 layer cake.

    What makes cakes moist?

    A balanced recipe that includes buttermilk, sour cream and/or oil ensures a cake with lasting moisture.

    Can the cake layers be made ahead?

    Absolutely. Bake them, cool, freeze until hard, then wrap well in foil and freeze for up to 3 months. To use, unwrap them, place them on a cooling rack and allow them to come to room temperature.

    Expert Tips

    • Be sure to follow the times given when mixing the cake ingredients. This ensures they won't be over beaten which would toughen them.
    • Don't stint on the zest. That's what gives the cake its flavor.
    • Freeze the layers until they are firm before filling and frosting. This makes it so much easier and faster as they won't tear or slide around.
    • Make sure the butter for the cake and the frosting is very soft but not runny. If the butter is too hard, the frosting may not whip up with much volume and it will be dense.
    • This cake uses an American buttercream which uses powdered sugar. As such, it requires a lot of beating to increase the volume, lighten it and make sure the powdered sugar dissolves so the frosting isn't grainy. If it is under beaten, the frosting will be dense and possibly grainy.
    The Lemon Layer Cake is on a clear plate with a vase in the background and a serving utensil.

    If You Loved this Recipe, be sure to check these out!

    • The Triple Lemon Cake consisting of a yellow crumb coated single layer cake finished with white meringue in the middle
      Triple Lemon Cake - Revised
    • very-lemon-butter-crisps.jpeg
      Very Lemon Butter Crisps
    • Finished Photo
      Lemon Meringue Pie That Never Weeps
    • Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.
      Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    The Lemon Layer Cake is on a clear plate with a vase in the background and a serving utensil.

    Lemon Layer Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Bright and tangy, this Lemon Layer Cake with its amazing frosting is the kind of dessert that instantly lifts your mood with lemon in the cake. filling and frosting.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 3 hours hrs
    Total Time 3 hours hrs
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 820 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1/2 sheet pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Lemon Filling

    • 4 large egg yolks
    • 1 1/4 cups water
    • 1 1/4 cups granulated sugar (250 grams)
    • 1/3 cup cornstarch (45 grams)
    • 2/3 cup lemon juice (from all 3 large lemons)
    • 1/2 teaspoon table salt
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter (45 grams)
    • 1 tablespoons lemon zest (from 1 large lemon)

    Lemon Sour Cream Cake

    • 3 large egg yolks
    • 1 cup sour cream (225 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 cups sifted cake flour* (300 grams)
    • 1 1/2 cups granulated sugar (300 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon + 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 2 tablespoons lemon zest (from 2 large lemons)
    • 3/4 cup unsalted butter, softened (170 grams or 1 12 sticks)
    • *If measuring by volume it is important to sift the cake flour until overflowing in a dry measuring cup and then sweeping it off with the back of a knife.

    Amazing Lemon Buttercream

    • 1 pound powdered sugar
    • 1 cup lemon fillng
    • 1/4 cup butter, softened* (60 grams or 4 tablespoons)
    • *It is important to have the butter very soft but not runny.

    Instructions
     

    Lemon Filling

    • Whisk everything together in a medium size sauce pan.
    • Stirring constantly, bring to a boil and boil for 1 minute.
    • Transfer to a storage container, cover the top of the filling with plastic wrap and let come to room temperature. Store in the fridge for 2 days. or at least overnight to firm up.

    Lemon Sour Cream Cake

    • It is always best to weigh the ingredients but if you don't have a scale (why don't you) sift the flour until over flowing in the cup measure and then sweep it off with the back of a knife. That should get you close.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment paper and spray the paper only. Try not to spray the sides. If you do, wipe them with a paper towel. Set aside.
    • In a small bowl, whisk together the egg yolks, 1/4 cup sour cream and vanilla.
    • In the bowl of a mixer, combine the dry ingredients and mix on low for 30 seconds to blend. Add the softened butter and remaining 3/4 cup sour cream. Mix on low until moistened. Then increase the speed to medium and beat for 1 1/2 minutes.
    • Add the egg mixture in three additions, beating on medium 30 seconds each time, scraping down as necessary.
    • Dollop the batter in the half sheet pan. Using and offset spatula, spread it out evenly.
    • Bake for 20 to 22 minutes until a tester comes out clean. It will be a medium golden brown. It will be golden brown. Place on a cooling rack and cool cold.
    • At this point, it can be frozen in its pan well wrapped.

    Amazing Lemon Buttercream

    • Add all the ingredients to a mixing bow. Beat on low to bring together. Raise the speed to medium and beat until smooth. Raise it again to high and beat for 5 or more minutes until light and smooth with no grittiness from the powdered sugar.

    Assembly

    • The cutting insructions will be made easier if you look at the pictures.
    • The easiest way to cut the cake is to use a ruler and a pizza cutter. The pizza cutter gives a smooth cut.
    • Place the cake vertically in front of you, Cut a 4":piece off the the long side of the cake. Set this aside.
    • Turn the cake so it is horizontally in front of you. Cut four 4"x 8"" layers. You will now have six 4"x8" layers.
    • Take one layer and break it up in pieces. Add it to the processor. Process to make crumbs. Spread them out on a baking sheet to dry slightly while preparing te rest of the cake.
    • Whisk the filling slightly to smooth it out. Do not over whisk or you can thin it too much.
    • Spread 1/3 cup filling on each of 4 layers to within 1/4 inch of the edges. The filling will spread to the edges when the next layer is added.
    • Place the fifth layer on top with no filling.
    • Cover the sides of the cake and top with the Lemon Frosting. Use a decorating comb or sometimes called a triangle to swirl the top of the cake. 
    • Cover the sides with the lemon cake crumbs. This is easiest to do by holding the cake on a cake board or other flat plate in your left hand and picking up the crumbs in your right hand pressing them into the frosting from the bottom to the top.
    • This is a professional tip make it easier to move the cake from the work board to the final presentation plate.  It is called chanelling. Place a straight metal spatula under the bottom edge of the cake and remove about 1/8" of the frosting. Then go under the cake to make sure it will release cleanly when you move it. Make sure you are keeping the spatula pressed on the board and not on the cake. 
    •  I use two pancake turners placed on either end of the cake to lift it up and place it on its final plate.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _______________________________________________
    It will take 3 large lemons for the filling and the cake. 
    Be sure to follow the times given when mixing the cake ingredients. This ensures they won't be over beaten which would toughen them.
    Don't stint on the zest. That's what gives the cake its flavor.
    Freeze the layers until they are firm before filling and frosting. This makes it so much easier and faster as they won't tear or slide around.
    Make sure the butter for the cake and the frosting is very soft but not runny. If the butter is too hard, the frosting may not whip up with much volume and it will be dense. 
    This cake uses an American buttercream which uses powdered sugar. As such, it requires a lot of beating to increase the volume, lighten it and make sure the powdered sugar dissolves so the frosting isn't grainy. If it is under beaten, the frosting will be dense and possibly grainy. 
    The cake layers can be made and frozen up to 3 months well wrapped.
    The Lemon Filling can be made and refrigerated up to 5 days. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 820kcalCarbohydrates: 134gProtein: 7gFat: 30gSaturated Fat: 17gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 200mgSodium: 381mgPotassium: 92mgFiber: 1gSugar: 100gVitamin A: 989IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 171mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Strawberry Rhubarb Galette

    Modified: Apr 23, 2026 · Published: Apr 16, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A slice of the Strawberry Rhubarb Galtette sits on a white plate with a fork on the plate.

    It's Rhubarb season again and this Strawberry Rhubarb Galette is a perfect way to highlight these long, red, tart stalks. To make it easier, the filling is placed in the middle of a pastry crust and the sides of the crust are brought up around it. There is no top crust or crimping.

    A slice of the Strawberry Rhubarb Galtette sits on a white plate with a fork on the plate.

    The tart sweet filling is only partially enclosed for this recipe. To bring out the flavor of the rhubarb, I reduced the sugar so the galette retains its tangy taste. It's easy to make and even easier to eat.

    While the folded crust can look a bit intimidating, it is actually vey easy to do. Just follow the photos below for the perfect galette. For a complete understanding of making the pie crust, see my American Pie Crust Tutorial.

    If you love fruit forward desserts, don't miss these: Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp, Rhubarb Cream Tart, Strawberry Brownies (these are not to be missed), Strawberry Cake, My Best Banana Cake Recipe (with strawberries), (GF) Lemon Strawberry Cake, Chocolate Strawberry Pie, and Strawberry Bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll love this recipe

    The filling stays jammy, not runny
    Strawberries and rhubarb release a lot of liquid, but this recipe controls it from the start with two thickeners and a short maceration step to make sure the juices bake into a glossy, sliceable filling instead of pooling in the center.

    The crust bakes up crisp and flaky—never soggy
    The crust is balanced for flavor, crispness and flakiness. The thickeners set the filling so it can't soak into the crust making it soggy.

    The sweet-tart flavor is perfectly balanced
    Rhubarb brings brightness and tang, while strawberries round it out with natural sweetness. The sugar level is tuned so neither overpowers the other—resulting in a more complex, bakery-quality flavor.

    It’s intentionally rustic (and forgiving)
    Unlike pie, a galette doesn’t require perfect crimping or shaping. That means less stress, faster prep, and a beautiful, free-form dessert that still looks impressive.

    What is a galette?

    A galette is a flat, round French pastry where a pastry crust is pleated around a fruit filling. I have modified mine to make it a French-Anglo pastry by using my pie crust because I think it is easier to roll out and pleat. Although a galette is usually free form baked straight on a baking sheet, I found that placing the crust in a pie plate makes it easier to construct and hold its shape. Galettes can hold sweet or savory fillings.

    New to working with Rhubarb?

    Grown in the northern states such as Michigan, Washington and parts of California, rhubarb is best grown in areas where the ground freezes during the winter. It's in season from April to June. It can also be found frequently in the freezer section of grocery stores.

    Is it a fruit or a vegetable?

    While thought of as a fruit and looking like red celery with large leaves, it's actually a vegetable that is used like a fruit in pies, cakes, crisps, and quick breads. Rhubarb is very tart and astringent and is often paired with sweeter fruits to tame it.

    Discard the leaves

    Most important is the fact that the leaves contain oxalic acid which is poisonous and should be discarded. Most grocery stores cut the tops off before selling them.

    While typically seen as red, the color of the stalk is not a sign of how ripe it is. It can be red, green or pink. Medium length stalks are usually less stringy than the longer ones.

    Storing the rhubarb

    To store rhubarb, immediately cut the leaves off and discard if they are still attached. Wrap the stalks tightly in foil and refrigerate up to several days before using. It can also be washed, cut and frozen, well wrapped, for several months in the freezer.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Strawberry Rhubarb Filling

    The ingredients for the filling are strawberries, rhubarb, granulated sugar, minute tapioca, flour, butter, and sanding sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Sanding sugar, unsalted butter, all-purpose flour, minute tapioca

    MIDDLE ROW: Strawberries, granulated sugar, egg

    BACK ROW: Rhubarb

    Pie Crust ingredients include, cake flour, all purpose four, unsalted butter, shortening, salt, egg and water.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, egg, lemon juice

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter, shortening

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, ice water, all-purpose flour

    Key Ingredients

    • Minute tapioca is used as part of the thicken for the filling. Do not use regular tapioca. Be sure to see my post Thickeners as used in Baking and Pastry.
    • Cake flour is important to the final flaky outcome of the crust while remaining tender.
    • Shortening is used in the crust to increase the flakiness.
    • Egg is used to crisp the crust.
    • Lemon juice is a tenderizer.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    You may notice when demonstrating how to pleat the crust there is a different filling in the crust. Because I now take my own pictures, it is impossible for me to recreate this so I borrowed the photos from the Cranapple Pie with a Pleated Crust.

    This collages shows the pie crust being made with the dry ingredients in the processor, the butter cut in and the shorteng added to the processor.

    Step 1. Combine the flours in the bowl of a processor and pulse several times. Step 2. Step 2. Add the frozen butter. Step 3. Pulse a few times to break it up in large clumps. Step 4. Add the frozen shortening.

    This collages shows the egg being beaten, added to the processor, the crust processed and poured out of the processor and pushed together.

    Step 5. Beat the egg to until completely combined. Combine the egg, lemon juice and water. Step 2. Pour it in a circle over the processor contents. Step 7. Pulse until large clumps of dough form. Do not over process. Step 8. Pour it out onto a work surface and push it together.  Note: One of my long time readers came up with an alternative way to add the liquid that worked better for her. After cutting in the butter and shortening, she removed everything to a large bowl. Then added the liquids and stirred them in by hand to prevent the butter and shortening from being cut into too small of pieces.

    The dough is rolled out, draped in a pie plate, filled with the strawberries and rhubarb and the first fold is made with the overhang.

    Step 9. Shape the dough into a round. Wrap it in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight or freeze. If it is frozen, thaw in the fridge overnight. Step 10. Combine the sugar, tapioca and flour and mix well. Step 11. Add it to the bowl in which the cut strawberries and rhubarb are placed. Step 12. Stir all together and let it sit while the crust is rolled out.

    The crust is rolled out and, plate, the filling is added and the dough is brought up over  the filling.

    Step 13. Roll the dough into a 15" circle and trim to 14". Step 14. Drape it into a 9" pie place leaving an even overhang around the rim of the pie plate. Step 15. Add the filling to the crust. Step 16. Bring the pastry over the filling.

    This collage shows the pleating of the crust continuing and the egg wash made for the finish.

    Step 17. Continue bringing up the crust and pleating it as you go. Step 18. Press the pleat in place lightly. Step 19. Make the final pleat. Step 20. Beat an egg with a fork until completely combined and no white is showing.

    The final collage shows the galette being brushed with the egg, the sanding sugar sprinkled on, the galette place on a foil lined rimmed sheet pan and baked.

    Step 21. Brush the pleats with the beaten egg. Step 22. Sprinkle with the sanding sugar if using. Step 23. For safety, place the galette on a foil lined, rimmed baking sheet to make it easier to move it in and out of the oven. Step 24. Bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQ's

    Does the rhubarb need to be peeled before baking?

    Despite its being stringy, it does not have to be peeled. The skin softens perfectly when baked and it adds the traditional tartness to the finished galette.

    Why does rhubarb pair so perfectly with strawberries?

    It’s all about balance. Rhubarb is intensely tart, while strawberries bring natural sweetness. Together, they create that classic sweet-tart flavor that tastes brighter and more complex than either fruit alone.

    Why is my strawberry rhubarb galette watery in the center?

    Strawberries and rhubarb release a lot of juice as they bake. If your galette turns soupy, it usually needs a better thickener balance and a short rest after baking so the juices can set into a jammy filling.

    Expert Tips

    • The filling should be made before the crust is rolled out so the tapioca can soften and everything can blend together.
    • Keep the dough chilled. This is important to keep it flaky. If it begins to soften when rolling out, fold it gently and return it to the fridge. After it the galette is filled freeze it for 15 to 20 minutes to get the dough cold again.
    • Let the pastry rest after coming from the oven so the filling can set completely. It will be loose coming from the oven but will thicken up.
    • Make sure the butter and shortening are frozen rock hard before processing. There should be pea size pieces of them in the flour.
    • The pastry should remain cold while working with it so the butter does not become incorporated into the flour or it won't be flaky. The butter and shortening have melt to create the steam necessary to form the thin, light layers.
    • See the photos to help with the pleating of the crust.
    A slice of the Strawberry Rhubarb Galtette sits on a white plate with a fork on the plate.

    These might be better than pie!

    • Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.
      Strawberry Brownies
    • A potion of Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp sits in a white bowl on a hellow gingham plate with the white pan in the backgournd.
      Simple Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp
    • A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.
      My Best Banana Cake Recipe
    • Cupcakes are finished with a swirl of Strawberry Buttercream.
      Strawberry Buttercream Frosting

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A slice of the Strawberry Rhubarb Galtette sits on a white plate with a fork on the plate.

    Strawberry Rhubarb Galette

    Helen S. Fletcher
    It's Rhubarb season again and this Strawberry Rhubarb Galette is a perfect way to highlight these long, red, tart stalks. To make it easier, the filling is placed in the middle of a pastry crust and the sides of the crust are brought up around it. There is no top crust or crimping.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 357 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9" Pie plate
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pie Crust

    • 9 tablespoons unsalted butter (130 grams)
    • 1/4 cup shortening (60 grams)
    • 2 1/4 cup cake flour (280 grams)
    • 1/2 cup all-purpose flour (70 grams)
    • 1 1/2 tablespoon table salt
    • 3 tablespoons beaten egg
    • 1 1/2 teaspoons lemon juice
    • 7 to 9 tablespoons ice water

    Strawberry Rhubarb Filling

    • 3 cups strawberries, coarsely cut (about 380 grams)
    • 3 cups rhubarb, cut in 1/2" slices (about 380 grams)
    • 3/4 to 1 cup granulated sugar (150 to 200 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons minute tapioca
    • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter, (30 grams), optional
    • 1 egg well beaten
    • Sanding sugar, optional

    Instructions
     

    Pie Crust

    • Cut the butter in half lengthwise and then cross cut. Freeze them until rock hard.
    • Measure out the shortening in 4 tablespoons and freeze until also rock hard.
    • Combine the cake all-purpose flours and salt in th ebowl of a food processor. Pulse several times to mix well.
    • Place the frozen butter over the flours. Pluse severaltimes to cut the butter into large chunks.
    • Add the frozen shortening and repeat the pulsing until the butter and shortening are the size of large peas. Do not over process. Use short bursts.
    • Combine the egg, lemon juice and 7 tablespoons of water. Pour it over the contents of the processor. Pulse until it forms clumps. Take a bit of the dough and press it between your fingers. If it holds together and doesn't feel dry youre done. If not, add more water a tablespoon at a time.
    • Pour it onto a lightly floured work surface. Push the clumps togwether to form a cohesive mass.
    • Knead it 4 or 5 times to bring it together into a smooth dough. Shape it into a 1" round. Wrap it in plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight. It can also be frozen ate this point well wrapped. Thaw in the fridge and continue.
    • Preheat the oven to 375°F or 350°F if using a glass pie plate.
    • Roll the crust into a 15" circle. Trim to a 14" round.
    • Place the crust in the pie plate letting the excess dough overhang the edge of the pan evenly.
    • Fill the plate with the strawberry rhubarb filling.
    • Describing the pleating process is a bit difficult in words. However, there are pictures in the Step by Step Section that are very helful.
    • To start pleating, take a section of the overhang and bring it up over the filling.
    • Continue in this manner, folding the dough in pleats as you go around. Place on a foil lined half sheet pan to make it safer to move in and out of the oven.
    • Beat the egg until the yolk and white are completely mixed. Brush the crust with the egg.
    • Sprinkle with the sanding sugar if using.
    • Bake for about 1 hour and 15 to 20 minutes or until the crust is browned and the filling is bubbly. Tent the top if it is browning too quickly.
    • Allow to sit until warm or room temperature. Cut and enjoy!

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ____________________________________________________
    Minute tapioca is used as part of the perfect thickener for the filling. Do not use regular tapioca. Be sure to see my post Thickeners as used in Baking and Pastry. 
    Cake flour is important to the final  flaky outcome of the crust while remaining tender. 
    The filling should be made before the crust is rolled out so the tapioca can soften and everything can blend together.
    Keep the dough chilled. This is important to keep it flaky. If it begins to soften when rolling out, fold it gently and return it to the fridge. After the galette is filled, freeze it for 15 to 20 minutes to get the dough cold again. 
    Let the pastry rest after coming from the oven so the filling can set completely. It will be loose coming from the oven but will thicken up.
    Make sure the butter and shortening are frozen rock hard before processing. There should be pea size pieces of them in the flour.
    The pastry should remain cold while working with it so the butter does not become incorporated into the flour or it won't be flaky. The butter and shortening have to melt to create the steam necessary to form the thin, light layers. 
    See the photos in the Step by Step Instructions to help with the pleating of the crust.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servingsCalories: 357kcalCarbohydrates: 37gProtein: 3gFat: 23gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 62mgSodium: 1322mgPotassium: 240mgFiber: 2gSugar: 22gVitamin A: 564IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 59mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Best Banana Streusel Muffin Recipe

    Modified: Apr 8, 2026 · Published: Apr 9, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A Banana Streusel Muffin on aplate with others behind it.

    Ok! So I'm bragging but these really easy to make Banana Streusel Muffins are sure to become a favorite. A simple to make pecan and brown sugar streusel top a banana muffin for an anytime treat.

    A Banana Streusel Muffin on aplate with others behind it.

    A few pantry ingredients go together quickly to make this muffin which can be frozen for a treat with no effort. While I made these six in the larger muffin cups, they can also be made in the regular size pan for 12 muffins.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Want to Make These Banana Muffins

    • They're super easy to make.
    • Pantry ingredients are all that are needed.
    • The muffins are loaded with flavor and texture.
    • They can be frozen for later.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pecan Streusel

    The ingredients for the pecan streusel include pecan, all-purpose flour, unsalted butter, brown suar and cinnamon.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, brown sugar, cinnamon

    BACK ROW: Pecans, all-purpose flour

    Banana Streusel Muffins

    Ingredients for the muffins are all-purpose flour, baking powder, salt, bananas, unsalted butter, granulated sugar, egg and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, vanilla, baking powder, egg

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted Butter

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, bananas

    Vanilla Drizzle

    Ingredients for the vanilla drizzle are powdered sugar, butter, vanilla and milk.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, milk

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Pecan Streusel

    The first collages shows the dry ingredients for the streusel in the processor, processed, the butter added and the crumbs formed.

    Step 1.Place the flour, brown sugar, pecans, and cinnamon in the bowl of a food processor. Step 2. Process until the nuts are finely ground. Step 3. Transfer to a bowl and add the melted butter.

    Banana Streusel Muffins

    The seocnd collages shows the flour, salt and baking powder in a bowl to be mixed, the bananas in a processor, the egg, melted butter and vanilla in a bowl and the liquid mixed wth the pureed banana.

    Step 5. Combine the flour, sugar, baking powder and salt. Whisk together. Set aside. Step 6. Place the bananas in the processor bowl and process until smooth, scraping down as necessary. Transfer to a medium size bowl. Step 7. Combine the melted butter, egg, and vanilla. Step 8. Combine the butter mixture with the pureed bananas. Add the flour mixture, and stir in only until all the flour is moistened. It will be a thick batter.

    The last collage shows the unbaked batter in the paper cups, baked, the powdered sugar, butter and milk in a blow and mixed for the vanilla drizzle.

    Step 9. Divide the batter between the 6 large muffin cups filling the cup about halfway. Top the batter with 1/4 cup of the pecan streusel. Step 10. Bake as directed. Step 11. If using the vanilla drizzle, melt the butter and combine the powdered sugar, butter, vanilla and milk in a medium size bow. Step 12. Stir together until it is smooth. If it is too thick add milk by the teaspoonful until it is thin enough to drizzle, if too thin, add a bit more powdered sugar.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why does my streusel sink into the muffins?

    Make the streusel first. After it is made be sure to chill it while preparing the rest of the recipe. This is especially important if the butter has been melted. Chilling the crumbs keeps their shape and helps keep them from sinking into the batter.

    Can the bananas be too ripe?

    Yes the can. The skin should be speckled with brown but should not be black. Overly ripe bananas can be more watery which can throw the proportion of the ingredients off.

    Should muffins be eaten warm?

    For the best flavor, let the muffins come to room temperature so all of the flavors blend.

    Storage and Freezing

    These muffins hold well for several days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze them. Thaw at room temperature and freshen in a 350°F oven for 10 to 15 minutes for the large muffins 8 to 10 minutes for the small ones.. Cool completely to serve.

    Expert Tips

    • When combining the wet and dry ingredients, don't over mix. Just mix gently until all of the flour is incorporated.
    • If there is time, chill the muffins overnight without the streusel. Add the streusel just before baking. This helps the muffins crown better.
    • Brown sugar can be substituted for the granulated if desired for a deeper taste.
    • Serve them plain, dusted with powdered sugar or drizzled with the vanilla drizzle.
    A plate of Banana Streusel Muffins plain, dusted with powdered sugar and drizzled with vanilla drizzle.

    Looking for more quick treats?

    • Strawberry Muffins
      Best of All Strawberry Muffins
    • A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.
      Coffee Cake Muffins (Bakery-Style & Moist)
    • Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.
      A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix
    • Pumpkin Muffins on a cooling rack with a blue and yellow cloth and yellow smiley face tea cup,,
      Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A Banana Streusel Muffin on aplate with others behind it.

    Best Banana Streusel Muffin Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Ok! So I'm bragging but these really easy to make Banana Streusel Muffins are sure to become a favorite. A simple to make pecan and brown sugar streusel top a banana muffin for an anytime treat.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 27 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 7 minutes mins
    Course Muffins
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 598 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pecan Streusel

    • 1/2 cup all-purpose flour (70 grams)
    • 1/3 cup brown sugar, packed (65 grams)
    • 1/2 cups pecans (60 grams)
    • 3/4 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 3 to 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (42 to 55 grams)

    Banana Streusel Muffins

    • 1 1/4 cups all-purpose flour (175 grams)
    • 2/3 cup granulated or brown sugar (packed) (130 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1/4 teaspoon salt
    • 3/4 cup bananas, ripe (about 2 bananas)
    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter, melted (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Vanilla Drizzle

    • 1 cup powdered sugar (130 grams0
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter (15 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons milk, approximately
    • 1/2 teaspoon vanilla

    Instructions
     

    Pecan Streusel

    • Place the flour, brown sugar, pecans and cinnamon in the bowl of a processor. Process until the pecans are finely cut in. Transfer to a medium size bowl.
    • Add the melted butter and mix with a fork until crumbs form starting with 3 tablespoons of melted butter. Add the remainder if it is dry. Refrigerate while making the rest of the recipe.

    Banana Streusel Muffins

    • It is best to use paper liners for these muffins as the streusell can fall off it turning the muffin tins upside down to release them.
    • Preheat the oven to 375F. Fill 6 large or 12 regular size muffin wells with paper liners or spray with non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Whisk together the flour, sugar, baking powder and salt in a large bowl.
    • Place the bananas in the processor bowl (no need to clean it) and process until smooth, scraping down as needed. Transfer to a medium size bowl.
    • Whisk the banana puree, melted butter, egg and vanilla together.
    • Pour the liquid over the flour mixture and mix gently only until all of the flour is incorporated. The batter will be thick.
    • Divide between the muffin wells about 1/2 way up.
    • Top with 1/4 cup of the streusel for the large muffins or 2 tabelspoons for the regular size.
    • Bake the large muffins for 25 to 28 minutes and the regular size for 15 ot 18 minutes or until a tester comes out clean. Don't over bake them.
    • Cool 10 to 15 minutes and lift the muffins out of the pan using the edge of the paper liners. Cool completely before serving or freezing.
    • Vanilla Drizzle
    • Combine all of the ingredients in a medium size bowl, stirring briskly until it is smooth. If too thick, thin with a teaspoon more milk as needed. If too thin, add a bit more powdered sugar.
    • When cool, leave plain, dust with powdered sugar, or drizzle with the vanilla drizzle.
    • These can be held for 2 days at room temperature or frozen (without the drizzle), well wrapped for 2 months.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ___________________________________________________
    When combining the wet and dry ingredients, don't over mix. Just mix gently until all of the flour is incorporated.
    If there is time, chill the muffins overnight without the streusel. Add the streusel just before baking. This helps the muffins crown better.
    Brown sugar can be substituted for the granulated if desired for a deeper taste.
    Serve them plain, dusted with powdered sugar or drizzled with the vanilla drizzle.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 598kcalCarbohydrates: 90gProtein: 6gFat: 25gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 78mgSodium: 189mgPotassium: 217mgFiber: 3gSugar: 58gVitamin A: 620IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 81mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    A Last Minute Easter Roundup

    Modified: Mar 29, 2026 · Published: Mar 29, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    The finished Coconut Cream Cake sits on a gray plate with a flower vase in the background ready to be cut.

    Has anyone else lost track of time and realized Easter is a week away? For someone who prides themselves in their ability to be organized, I sure dropped the ball on this one. So, here's a few ideas to help you along.

    Below is the Coconut Cream Cake that was such a hit at the bakery. It truly is special and perfect for Easter.

    The finished Coconut Cream Cake sits on a gray plate with a flower vase in the background ready to be cut.

    Breads

    Breakfast Stromboli
    Eggs, sausage, red peppers and cheese rolled up in a tasty bread ready to bake for breakfast or brunch.
    Check out this recipe
    Eggs, sausage, red peppers and cheese rolled up in a tasty bread ready to bake for breakfast or brunch,
    A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.
    Cream Biscuits
    The easiest biscuits make can be frozen baked or unbaked for a warm accompaniment to start the morning.
    Check out this recipe
    Heavenly French Toast
    Make the shortbread and compote days ahead and you almost ready for a breakfast or brunch treat you will long remember.
    Check out this recipe
    Slices of French Toast make with cornbread with blueberry compote.

    Sweet Breads

    My Easter Bread
    Easter Bread is usually somewhat sweet filled with dried fruit of your choice and baked in a tall mold. This Easter Bread is easy to make and goes together quickly. It can be frozen but add the glaze when thawed.
    Check out this recipe
    Easter Bread sits on a peach rimmed plate with a green plant in the background.
    Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe
    These really are the Best Cinnamon Crunch Rolls Recipe. Why? Because I've added a Cinnamon Crunch topping (think Cinnamon Crunch Bagels) which takes this way over the top! Combining these two makes a completely new and different roll that's easy to make. These are perfect for an Easter Brunch.
    Check out this recipe
    Lemon Sugar Buns
    If you're looking for simple, this is it. 60 Second Brioche Dough topped with Swedish Sugar is a super taste treat that doesn't take a lot of work.
    Check out this recipe
    A single Lemon Sugar Bun sits on a white laced edged plate with a platter of more buns in the background.
    A Swedish Cardamom Knot sits on a blue and white plate
    Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls
    These Swedish Cardamom Yeast Rolls have so much going for them.  Known as Kardemummabullar, the dough is easy to make in the processor or mixer and interestingly has no eggs.  It is wonderfully soft and really easy to roll out.  Any yeast dough is best eaten the day it is made but these are great even the next day.
    Check out this recipe

    Muffins

    Coffee Cake Muffins
    f you’re looking for soft, tender cinnamon coffee cake muffins, that taste like they came from a bakery case theres no need to look any further. These easy to make from-scratch muffins use only a bowl, a whisk and a few measuring utensils to get the job done with big flavors and a really simple, reliable technique.
    Check out this recipe
    A whole coffee cake muffin sits on a wite plate with a colored mug on the plate and more muffins in the background.
    Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins
    This super Crunchy Topped Apple Muffin Recipe is not only super easy and fast but one of the best muffins around. The key to these wonders is lots of apples and a really crunchy sugar topping that isn't exactly a crumb but a close cousin you're sure to love.
    Check out this recipe
    Double Chocolate Muffins
    The cakey part of the muffin is outstanding and so, so easy to make. No mixer is needed and it comes together in literally minutes. The truffle filling is equally easy and what looks like a very professional bakery item is yours in minutes.
    Check out this recipe

    Cookies

    A variety of ways to decorate shortbread cookies.
    Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies
    A variety of finishes make these shortbread cookies even more addictive.
    Check out this recipe
    Orange Almond Madeleines - A Petit Four
    Unlike Prousts' dry sponge madeleines, these small cakes are redolent of almond paste and orange rind making them deliciously moiset.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Dipped Sweet and Salty Butter Cookies
    Easy to make butter cookies are dipped in chocolate and finished with a mix of sugar and salt.
    Check out this recipe

    Cakes

    Orange Chiffon Cake
    After a special Easter Feast, a simple but intense Orange Chiffon cake served wit macerated strawberries or assorted fruit can be the perfect end to a great meal
    Check out this recipe
    Coconut Cream Cake - The Perfect Easter Desseret
    You won't want to miss this tender, flavorful Coconut Cream Cake with its white chiffon layers filled to the brim with a coconut laden pastry cream and finished with whipped cream and coconut.
    Check out this recipe
    The finished Coconut Cream Cake sits on a gray plate with a flower vase in the background ready to be cut.
    Carrot Cake Cheesecake consists of 2layers carrot cake and 1layer of cheesecake finished with cream cheese frosting.
    Carrot Cake Cheesecake
    Two layers of carrot cake enclose a layer of cheesecake finished with cream cheese frosting is a combo made in heaven.
    Check out this recipe

    Pies

    (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie
    An easy vanilla wafer crust is filled to the brim with fresh strawberries set with instant clear jel for the freshest strawberry pie you'll make.
    Check out this recipe
    Lemon Meringue Pie
    Lemon Meringue Pie
    While Lemon Meringue pies can be be intimidating this recipe shows you how to make the perfect pie - no loose fillings or weepy meringue - just everything you need for success.
    Check out this recipe
    Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference
    This is a Coconut Cream Pie with a difference.  It has a great crust, lightened pastry cream filled with toasted coconut but instead of oodles of whipped cream topping, I have switched it to a meringue which I think allows the filling, which is the star of the dish, to stand out.
    Check out this recipe
    A meringue topped coconut cream pie in a glass pie pan with plates and forks beside it.

    Tarts

    A slice of the Chocolate Coconut Tart sits on a lace edged white plate with a red napkin and a fork behind it.
    No Bake Chocolate Coconut Tart
    The only way to adequately describe this Chocolate Coconut Tart is to think Mounds Bars. This unusual tart comprises a sublime mixture of cream of coconut, white chocolate, a touch of sour cream and a lot of coconut in a chocolate crust. You'll especially like the no bake aspect of making this.
    Check out this recipe
    Easy Almond Raspberry Tart
    his Almond Raspberry Tart is a marvelously easy tart I want to share with you. The no-roll crust is made in minutes and is pressed into the pan.  Simply wipe out the processor give the filling ingredients a couple spins in the bowl and pour into the parbaked shell.
    Check out this recipe
    Macacamia and Coconut Tart
    A simple graham cracker crust is filled with a white chocolate truffle mixture that includes toasted macadamia nuts, toasted coconut, a bit of cream of coconut and a whisper of dark rum.
    Check out this recipe

    Savory Tarts

    Tourte Milianese
    This Torte Milanse a spectacular tour de force. And, as with most spectaculars, it requires a bit of preparation to get it finished.  But when it’s done and you cut into it, the striking layers of green, red, pink and white are dramatic.
    While impressive, it isn’t difficult but time has to be set aside for sure.
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of Tourte Milanese sits on a plate exposing its dramatic yellow, green, red and pink layers.
    Brie and Bacon Tart
    Brie and Bacon Tart
    Caramelized onions, crispy bacon and creamy brie cheese all enclosed in a buttery crust. How could this be anything amazing?
    Check out this recipe
    Torta Rustica - A Savory Italian Pastry
    Torta Rustica means rustic torte in Italian and while rustic it is loaded with flavor from spinach, onions, red peppers and provolone cheese all enclosed in an easy buttery crust
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of the Torta Rustica displaying the multiple layers of the filling.

    I wish you a happy holiday and trust you will find something to tempt you.

    Pecan Upside Down Cake

    Modified: Mar 24, 2025 · Published: Mar 23, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    A slice of the pecan upside down cake sits on a white plate with a lace edge which sits o ntop of another orangish pate.

    Love sticky buns? You're sure to love this easy to make Pecan Upside Down Cake just as much or more. This straightforward, easy and uncomplicated recipe goes together in minutes. The cake is a high ratio cake (think reverse creaming) and is the easiest one to make. A generous topping of pecans bound in caramel over a tender cinnamon cake makes this one of those recipes you'll reach for over and over for a quick treat.

    A slice of the pecan upside down cake sits on a white plate with a lace edge which sits o ntop of another orangish pate.

    The buttermilk cake is unbelievable on its own both for its amazing taste and how easily it goes together. While I have added cinnamon and nutmeg to the batter, it can be omitted and it becomes the best yellow cake ever. It's incredibly soft, moist and lasts for days at room temperature.

    Other cakes your sure to love include: the Orange Pistachio Loaf Cake, Spirited Marble Cake, Apple Spice Bundt Cake, Orange Almond Teacake, Pina Colada Cake, and the Espresso Fudge Cake. Another pecan favorite is my Caramel Pecan Cheesecake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a High Ratio Cake?

    A high ratio cake requires the sugar to be the same weight or exceed the weight of the flour. This type of cake is also referred to as reverse creaming. The volumes will be different which is why weight is specified.

    It is the easiest of all cakes to make yielding a tender, moist cake. The only other caveat is the butter must be very soft - around 75°F so it blends in completely and quickly.

    Why You'll Love This Pecan Upside Down Cake

    • It's amazingly easy to make.
    • There are no complicated ingredients, equipment or instructions.
    • In a word, the cake is easy to make.
    • The cake can be stored at room temperature for several days if covered.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pecan Topping

    The ingredients for the pecan layer are pecans, brown sugar, butter, golden syrup and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Golden Syrup (honey or clear corn syrup can be used), vanilla

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Pecans, brown sugar

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    The ingredients for the yellow buttermilk cake are ett ylks, buttermilk, vanilla cake flor, granulated sugar, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Baking soda, vanilla, baking powder, cinnamon

    SECOND ROW: Unsalted butter

    THIRD ROW: Nutmeg, egg yolks, salt

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, granulated sugar, buttermilk

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Topping

    This collage for the pecan topping shows the ingredients in a saucepan, brought to a boil, the chppped pecans added and then stirred in,

    Step 1. If the pecans are halves or in large pieces, chop them so make them smaller. For an easy way to do this see my post, Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way. Combine the butter, golden syrup (or honey or corn syrup) and vanilla in a medium size saucepan. Step 2. Bring to a simmer. Wash the sides of the pan down with a pastry brush and cold water. Bring to boil. Step 3. Immediately remove the pan from the heat and add the chopped pecans. Step 4. Stir to evenly distribute them.

    This collages shows the pecan topping in the cake pan, the yolks, buttermilk and vanilla in a bowl, then mixed and the dry ingredients in a mixing bowl.

    Step 5. Spray a 9" round cake pan well with a non-stick baking spray. Pour the pecan topping into the prepared cake pan and even it out. Set aside. Step 6. Place the yolks, 1/4 of the buttermilk and vanilla in a bowl. Step 7. Whisk to combine. Step 8. In a mixing bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, baking powder, salt, cinnamon and nutmeg.

    This collages shows the dry ingredients, the butter and the remaining buttermilk in the mixing owl, then, part of the egg mixture added and the completed batter.

    Step 9. Add the softened butter and the remainder of the buttermilk to the bowl. Step 10. Beat for 2 minutes to mix well. Step 11. Add 1/3 of the egg yolk mixture and mix for 30 seconds on medium. Step 12. Repeat two more times to finish the batter.

    The batter is poured over the pecan topping, evened out, baked and released with the pecans on top.

    Step 13. Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil and place the cake pan in it. Pour the batter into the pan over the pecan layer. Step 14. Smooth out the batter. Step 15. Bake as called for. If it cracks slightly that's fine. It will be on the bottom. This can happen if the pecan layer liquifies, which it will, and pushes the batter up. Step 16. After removing from the oven, let it rest for 10 to 15 minutes and then turn it out onto a serving plate or cake board. Do not wait too long or the pecan layer will set up and stick to the pan. Also, be careful as the pan and pecan layer will be very hot.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    What type of pan works best for the pecan upside down cake?

    A heavy, light-colored metal pan works best because it promotes even caramelization without burning. Avoid dark pans or glass dishes, which can cause the topping to overcook.

    Why was my pecan topping grainy?

    Because the sugar was not completely dissolved. Recipes that include an invert sugar such as golden syrup, corn syrup, or honey aid in obtaining a smooth caramel. Washing down the sides of the pan after the ingredients come to a boil also helps ensure no sugar crystals are stuck to the side. These can cause a graining texture also. It only takes one grain of undissolved sugar to granulate the entire batch.

    What one ingredient can give this cake a deeper taste.

    Using brown sugar instead of granulated sugar intensifies the caramel coating the pecans.

    Expert Tips

    • Let the pecan topping mixture just come to a boil. Do not let it boil any longer.
    • Follow the times given for beating the batter for the best results.
    • The cinnamon and nutmeg are optional. If omitted it becomes a yellow cake.
    • If the nuts are large or halves, chop them smaller.
    • Be sure to wait 10 to 15 minutes to release the cake but no longer or the caramel will cool too much and separate from the cake.
    • Wash the sides of the pan down with a pastry brush dipped in cold water.
    • A temperature of about 75° to 77°F works well for the softened butter..
    • Either golden syrup, corn syrup or honey will work well with the pecans. Of the three, honey is my least favorite as it can burn easily.
    • The cake isn't yellow because I added optional spices to it.
    A slice of the pecan upside down cake sits on a white plate with a lace edge which sits o ntop of another orangish pate.

    Other Cakes You're Sure to Love

    • A slice of chocolate cake, peanut butter mousse glazed in chocolate on a marble plate
      Chocolate Peanut Butter Mousse Cake
    • A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.
      My Best Banana Cake Recipe
    • The Triple Lemon Cake consisting of a yellow crumb coated single layer cake finished with white meringue in the middle
      Triple Lemon Cake - Revised
    • Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
      Hazelnut Gianduja Cake
    A slice of the pecan upside down cake sits on a white plate with a lace edge which sits o ntop of another orangish pate.

    Pecan Upside Down Cake

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Love sticky buns? You're sure to love this easy to make Pecan Upside Down Cake just as much or more. This straightforward, easy and uncomplicated recipe goes together in minutes.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Cake
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 482 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x2" round cake pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pecan Topping

    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • 1/4 cup golden syrup, corn syrup or honey
    • 1/2 cup dark or light brown sugar (100 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanlla
    • 1 cup pecan pieces (150 grams)

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    • 4 large egg yolks (68 grams)
    • 2/3 cup buttermilk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 1/2 cups cake flour (200 grams)
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1/2 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/4 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon, optional
    • 1/2 teaspoon nutmeg, optional
    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)

    Instructions
     

    Pecan Topping

    • Spray the bottom and sides of a 9x2 or 9x3 inch round cake pan with a solid bottom with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • In a medium size saucepan , combine the butter, the syrup, brown sugar and vanilla. Just as it begins to come to a simmer wash the sides of the pan down with a pastry brush dipped in cold water. As soon as it just comes to a boil remove it from the heat.
    • Stir in the pecans. Pour into the prepare pan and set aside.

    Yellow Buttermilk Cake

    • The butter must be very soft, but not unny in anyway, A emperatue of about 75°F is ideal.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Whisk the yolks, 1/4 of the buttermilk and vanilla in a small bowl. Set aside.
    • In a mixing bowl, combine the dry ingredients and mix briefly to blend. Add the butter and the remaiing buttermilk. Mix on low until the ingredients are moistened, then raise to medium and beat for 2 minutes, Scrape down.
    • Add the egg yolk mixture in thirds, beating 30 secnds after each addition. Scrape down between additions.
    • The batter will be thick. Transfer it to the cake pan with the pecans and spread it out evenly.
    • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes or until deeply browned and a tester comes out clean. If the top is browning to much, tent it with foil.
    • Let the cake rest in in its pan for 10 to 15 minutes. Then carefully invert it onto a serving plate or cake board.
    • After cooling completely, the covered cake can be store for several days, at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _________________________________________________
    Let the pecan topping mixture just come to a boil. Do not let it boil any longer.
    Follow the times given for beating the batter for the best results. 
    The cinnamon and nutmeg are optional. If omitted it becomes a yellow cake. 
    If the nuts are large or halves, chop them smaller. 
    Be sure to wait 10 to 15 minutes to release the cake but no longer or it the caramel will cool too much and separate from the cake. 
    Wash the sides of the pan down with a pastry brush dipped in cold water. 
    A temperature of about 75° to 77°F works well. 
    Either golden syrup, corn syrup or honey will work well with the pecans. Of the three, honey is my least favorite as it can burn easily. 
    The cake isn't yellow because I added optional spices to it. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10servingsCalories: 482kcalCarbohydrates: 54gProtein: 5gFat: 28gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 124mgSodium: 224mgPotassium: 112mgFiber: 2gSugar: 39gVitamin A: 698IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 101mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    Modified: May 1, 2026 · Published: Mar 10, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 5 Comments

    A Salted Peanut Chew in the foreground with others in the background.

    This really simple recipe for Salted Peanut Chews came about because I was purging my files. It's an olde but goody. I've given an alternative to the home made marshmallow (but it sooooo easy and good!) to a couple of variations to suit your taste. These can be whipped up in minutes for a treat everyone is sure to love!

    A Salted Peanut Chew in the foreground with others in the background.

    Is it a candy, a bar or a cookie? Call it what you want - what it is is a peanut lovers favorite.

    For a few more like treats you have to try the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars, Hermit Bars with Lemon Glaze, Simple Samoa Cookie Bars, Spritz Bars - Easier than the Cookies or Homemade Pretzel Bites

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    A Tip to an Easier Way to Make Meringue

    The rule for combining egg whites and sugar to make a meringue has been steadfastly to beat the whites to the soft peak stage and then slowly, very slowly add the sugar a tablespoon or so at a time. Wait until it is dissolved in the whites and do it over and over again. NO MORE!!

    But there's a new game in town and it is the one we used at the bakery. Simply combine the egg whites, the sugar called for and the vanilla. Beat on medium to mix and as it starts to build volume raise the speed of the mixer.

    No more standing dribbling sugar in. If add a syrup to the meringue and the meringue becomes too stiff before the syrup is ready, just turn the speed down to low but do not turn the mixer off or the whites can granulate.

    This works on any recipe calling for a light, medium or heavy meringue. Then just proceed as the recipe calls for.

    Variations

    • 12 ounces of semisweet chocolate can be substituted for the peanut butter for a chocolate version.
    • Other nuts can be subbed for the peanuts. Pecans, walnuts, cashews, pistachios would all work. Other peanuts such as honey roasted may be substituted also. Lightly sprinkle sea salt over the nut layer or omit.
    • 3 cups of mini marshmallows (170 grams) can be used instead of making the marshmallow.
    • To make these even more decadent, top the peanut layer with a layer of chocolate ganache. Heat 1 cup heavy cream until steamy hot, but do not boil. Remove from the heat and submerge 7 ounces (200 grams) of semisweet chocolate under the hot cream. Let it sit for a few minutes and then stir or very gently whisk together until smooth. Remove the cooled, uncut Salted Peanut Butter Chews from the pan and pour the ganache over the peanut topping. Refrigerate briefly to set up. Cut as described or desired.
    • For an in depth look at making marshmallow, please see my post on Hazelnut Crunch Bars.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Salted Peanut Chews

    Ingredients for the Salted Peanut chews are all-purpose flour, brown sugar, baking powder, salt, baking soda, butter, vanilla, and egg yolks,

    FRONT ROW: Baking soda, vanilla, baking powder

    SECOND ROW: Egg yolks, unsalted butter, salte

    BACK ROW: all-purpose flour, brown sugar

    Marshmallow

    Ingredients for the Marshmallow are unflavored gelatin, water, egg whites,
vanilla, granulated sugar, and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Gelatin, vanilla

    MIDDLE ROW: Water, corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Egg whites, granulated sugar, water

    Peanut Topping

    The ingredients for the topping include rice krispies, corn syrup, peanut butter, salted peanuts, vanilla and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla, unsalted butter

    MIDDLE ROW: Peanut Butter, peanuts

    BACK ROW: Rice Krispies, corn syrup

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredient & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collages shows the ingredients for the base  (butter, brown sugar, baking powder and soda, salt, butter vanilla and egg yolks) in the bowl of a mixer, the crumbs mixed and in the pan, patted down then covered with marshmallow.

    Step 1. Line a 9x13" pan with parchment paper and set aside. Place the unsalted butter, brown sugar, egg yolks, baking powder, baking soda, salt and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Beat on low until crumbs form. Pour into the prepared pan. Step 3. Press the crumbs firmly and evenly on the bottom of the pan. Bake for 12 to 15 minutes until lightly browned. Step 4. Cover the base with the homemade marshmallow (see recipe below). Alternatively, spread 3 cups (170 grams) mini marshmallows over the bottom base and return to the oven for 1 to 2 minutes until they are puffy. Cool while preparing the top.

    This collages shows the corn syrup, butter, vanilla, and peanut butter in a large saucepan.

    Step 5. Place the peanut butter, corn syrup, butter and vanilla in a large saucepan. Step 6. Place over low heat and stir constantly until the butter melts and everything is smooth.Step 7. Add the peanuts and rice krispies, stirring well to coat everything evenly. Step 8. Immediately, while it is warm, spread it evenly over the marshmallow. Let it cool to room temperature.

    Marshmallow

    Tis collages shows the gelatin in the water blooming, the egg whites, vanilla and sugar in the mixing bowl, the sugar, corn syrup and water in a saucepan then boiling and the sides being washed down with water to remove any sugar crystals.

    Step 9. Stir the gelatin into the water and set it aside. Step 10. Place the egg whites, sugar as called for and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 11. Add the water, corn syrup and sugar to a medium size saucepan. Step 12. Bring the mixture to a hard boil and wash the sides down with a pastry brush dipped in cold water. Boil to 240°F.

    This collages sows the egg whites ready to have the syrup added, the hot syrup being poured between the beater and the bowl, the marshmallow almost done and completely mixed.

    Step 13. Marshmallow beaten and ready to receive the syrup. Step 14. When pouring the hot syrup in, try to keep it between the whisk and the bowl. Step 15 . Beat the mixture until it is very stiff. Step 16. Liquefy the gelatin by microwaving it for a few seconds in the microwave. Pour it over the marshmallow and beat it until incorporated and the marshmallow is very stiff. Use it immediately.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    When were Peanut Chews first made?

    A Romanian immigrant, David Goldenberg, had a small candy store in Philadelphia. Originally, he made them as a high-energy, high-protein ration for the U.S.troops in World War 1. They were later sold at retail in 1921. Goldenberg's Peanut Chews were first introduced by the Goldenberg Candy Company in 1917.

    Are Salted Peanut Chews the same thing?

    No, these are a homemade treat with a base layer, marshmallow and a peanut and rice krispie topping. The original Peanut Chew has no marshmallow.

    Is it hard to make marshmallow?

    Not at all. It's basically an Italian Meringue with gelatin added. A candy thermometer that reads to 240°F , a saucepan to make the syrup and a mixer for the egg whites and sugar are all that are needed.

    A Salted Peanut Chew in the foreground with others in the background.

    Looking for More?

    • Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.
      Spice Bars
    • Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.
      Strawberry Brownies
    • A Millionaires Shortbread bar sits on a white plate with a fork and a tray of bars behind it.
      Updating Millionaire's Shortbread
    • Lightening Fast Brownies
      Quick Macadamia & White Chocolate Brownies

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    A Salted Peanut Chew in the foreground with others in the background.

    Simple Salted Peanut Chews

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This really simple recipe for Salted Peanut Chews came about because i was purging my files. It's an olde but a goody.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Cookies/Bars
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24 servings
    Calories 315 kcal

    Equipment

    • Thermometer that goes to 240°F.
    • 9x13 inch baking pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Salted Peanut Chews Base

    • 1 1/2 cups all-purpose flour (210grams)
    • 2/3 cup brown sugar, firmly packed (135 grams)
    • 1/2 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1/4 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1/2 cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams or 8 tablespoons
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 egg yolks (save the whites)

    Marshmallow - See note below if using mini marshmallows.

    • 1 tablespoon unflavored gelatin
    • 1/4 cup cold water
    • 3 large egg whites (100 grams)
    • 1 cup granulated sugar, divided (200 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 1/2 cup water
    • 2 tablespoons corn syrup
    • OR
    • 3 cups mini marshmallows (200 grams)

    Topping for Salted Peanut Chews

    • 2/3 cup corn syrup, honey or golden syrup
    • 1/4 cup unsalted butter (58 grams or 4 tablespoons)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • 1 cup peanut butter (240 grams)
    • 2 cups salted peanuts (225 grams)
    • 2 cups rice krispies (60 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Salted Peanut Chews Base

    • Line the bottom of a 9x13" baking pan with parchment. Spray the parchment and sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release. Set aside. Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • In the bowl of a mixer, combine all of the ingredients for the base. Mix on low combine. Raise the speed to medium and mix until crumbs form. When a small amount is pressed together, it should not crumble. Pour into the prepared pan, even them out and press them firmly into the bottom of the pan. Bake for 12 to 14 minutes until lightly colored.
    • NOTE: Alternatively, If using the mini marshmallows sprinkle them evenly over the base and put them back in the oven for 1 or 2 minutes until puffy. Cool them while preparing the filling.

    Marshmallow

    • Sprinkle the gelatin over the 1/4 cup cold water. Stir to moisten all of it. Set aside.
    • Add the egg whites, vanilla and 1/4 cup granulated sugar (50 grams) to the bowl of a mixer. Beat to stiff peaks. If the meringue is done before the syrup is ready, lower the speed of the mixer but keep the meringue moving. Do not turn the the mixer off.
    • As soon as the egg whites start beating, combine the 1/2 cup water, the remaining sugar and corn syrup in a small saucepan. Bring to a rolling boil and wash down the sides of the pan with a pastry brush dipped in water to make sure no sugar crystals remain undissolved. Boil to 240°F.
    • As soon as the syrup comes to temperature, slowly pour it into the mixer. Try to pour it between the bowl and the whisk so it goes into the egg whites and not onto the whisk or the bowl.
    • Liquify the gelatin for a few seconds in the microwve and pour it over the egg whites. Beet until the marshmallow is cold and stiff.
    • Immediately spread it evenly over the cooled base. Set aside.

    Topping

    • In a large saucepan heat the corn syrup, butter, vanilla and peanut butter juset until the mixture is smooth.
    • Remove from the heat and stir in the nuts and cereal. Immediately spread over the marshmallow. Refrigerate to set up.
    • To cut, turn the bars out of the pan. Remove the parchment. Turn them right side up. Cut 6 across and 4 down or as desired.
    • The Salted Peanut Chews can be kept for days at room temperature.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    ____________________________________________________
    12 ounces of semisweet chocolate can be substituted for the peanut butter for a chocolate version.
    Other nuts can be subbed for the peanuts. Pecans, walnuts, cashews, pistachios would all work. Other peanuts such as honey roasted may be substituted also. Lightly sprinkle sea salt over the nut layer or omit. 
    ­­­3 cups of mini marshmallows (170 grams) can be used instead of making the marshmallow.
    To make these even more decadent, top the peanut layer with a layer of chocolate ganache. Heat 1 cup heavy cream until steamy hot, but do not boil. Remove from the heat and submerge 7 ounces (200 grams) of semisweet chocolate under the hot cream. Let it sit for a few minutes and then stir or very gently whisk together until smooth. Remove the cooled, uncut Salted Peanut Butter Chews from the pan and pour the ganache over the peanut topping. Refrigerate briefly to set up. Cut as described or desired.
    For an in depth look at making marshmallow, please see my post on Hazelnut Crunch Bars.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 24servingsCalories: 315kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 8gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 16mgSodium: 197mgPotassium: 184mgFiber: 2gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 334IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 33mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Rye Raisin Bread With Bakery-Style Flavor

    Modified: Feb 16, 2025 · Published: Feb 17, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Slices of the Rye Raisin Bread sits on a cutting board with the whole behind it surrounded by a plaid towel and knife.

    Imagine a Rye Raisin Bread chock full of flavor from the earthy rye flour with beer, raisins and a hint of orange that requires only a wet mixture and a dry mixture combined to achieve. No complicated steps, no long waits, just a bread that feels both rustic and refined. If you love old world breads with character and history, this is the kind of recipe you’ll come back to again and again.

    Slices of the Rye Raisin Bread sits on a cutting board with the whole behind it surrounded by a plaid towel and knife.

    What makes this rye raisin bread especially rewarding is how approachable the process is, even if you don’t bake with rye often. This old-world–style loaf delivers that bakery-quality experience at home, with balanced rye flavor, a soft interior, and just enough chew to make every slice memorable. And I can tell you it makes the best ham and cheese sandwich you'll ever eat - toasted or not!

    If you love bread baking as much as I do here are a few more for you: Stuffed Italian Bread - Pane Bianco, Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread, Stuffed Focaccia, No Knead Sicilian Olive Bread and Red Pepper & Olive Bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why use beer in yeast bread?

    Using beer in bread baking has always facilitated me - and I don't even drink beer. When used for bread, it leaves no hint of it's liquid flavor but the barley, hops and other ingredients add to the character of the dough, especially rye dough. While I prefer a dark beer (Porter's in this case), any beer can be used but the taste will change slightly. The beer is heated in this recipe to release the alcohol so it's perfectly safe for those who don't drink it or for children.

    While there is no definitive record of when yeast began to be used in bread baking, it is commonly thought to have occurred in Egypt. The Egyptians loved their beer and one story has it that a bakery was located next to it. With all of the yeast floating around, some of it ended up in the bread mixture and yeasted bread was born.

    Why you'll love this recipe

    • The old world flavor is one you will not find in a grocery store ore even modern bread bakeries.
    • Eat it by itself, with a meal, stew or soup, or for the best sandwich you'll ever eat.
    • It's so easy to make. Wet goes into dry, mix, shape, bake.
    • It has a good shelf life and doesn't stale easily.

    Recipe Ingredients

    ingredients for the Rye Raisin Bread are beer, yeast,  molasses,  vegetable oil, orange zest, bread flour, rye flour, brown sugar, salt, raisins.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, instant yeast, molasses, vegetable oil

    MIDDLE ROW: Orange zest, raisins, brown sugar

    BACK ROW: Bread Flour, beer, rye flour

    Important Ingredients

    • Soaking the raisins in really hot or boiling water softens them making and yields more flavor. It is important to squeeze all the water out of them before adding to the bread dough.
    • Light or brown sugar can be used.
    • Bread flour is important for it's ability to lift the dough higher, especially when using rye flour which has little to no rising ability on it's own.
    • Rye flour comes in colors - light, medium or dark and then pumpernickel, the darkest of all. I used medium. But either the light or dark would also work.
    • The use of beer in this recipe is one of the main flavor ingredients. Water can be used but it won't taste the same. Burning the alcohol off as required in the recipe makes just an ingredient.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    This collage shows the raisins soaking in hot water, the beer heating, the yeast added to the cooling beer and the molasses and oil added.

    Step 1. Pour very hot or boiling water over the raisins and let them sit while the rest of the recipe is prepped. Step 2. Heat the beer to a boil for 1 minute. Remove from the heat and leet cool until lukewarm. Step 3. Stir in the yeast and let it sit for a couple of minutes. Step 4. Add the molasses and oil. Set aside

    In this collages the brown sugar, orange zest and  salt are added to the bread and rye flours in the food processor., the liquid is poured i, mixed and the raisins have been added.

    Step 5. Place the bread, rye flours and salt in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix then add the brown sugar and orange zest. Pulse to mix in. Step 6. Pour the liquid ingredients in. Step 7. Process until the dough comes together but does not form a ball. Step 8. Squeeze all the water you can from the raisins and add them to the processor.

    This collage shows the bread finished in the processor, cut in  half, two ropes of dough formed and the end sealed.

    Step 9. Process with pulses to mix the raisins into the dough. Do not over process, some uncut raisins are fine. Turn the dough out. It will be a bit sticky. Without adding flour, knead it a few times to bring it together and smooth it out. Let it rise until doubled At this point the dough can be formed or it can be refrigerated overnight. Step 10. When ready to shape it, cut it in half Step 11. Roll each piece into a 16" rope and twist them together. Step 12. Brush a bit of water on the very top and pinch them together.

    The dough is twisted together , laced in a loaf pan, risen ad baked.

    Step 13. Twist the two ropes together tightly, brush the ends at the bottom with a bit of water and pinch them together then tuck the bottom and top ends underneath. Step 14. Place the rye raisin bread into a pan sprayed with a non-stick baking release. Step 15. Shortly before the bread has doubled in the pan, preheat the oven and Step 16. Bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    Why does rye bread sometimes turn out dense?

    Different flours absorb hydration differently. If there is not enough liquid in the recipe the bread can become heavy, dense and/or dry.

    Is Rye Flour gluten free?

    No, rye flour does contain gluten but at a much lower rate that wheat flour. If someone is celiac free they should not eat rye products.

    Should raisins always be soaked before adding to bread?

    I always soak mine to ensure they are moist and contribute to the taste and softness of the dough. If the recipe calls for water, I use the raisin water in place of regular water.

    Expert Tips

    • Because this bread uses rye flour it is slower to rise than one made with just bread flour. As such it is to your advantage to use a proofer. Just put it in a container sprayed with a non-stick baking release cover it with a tea towel and put it in the oven with the light on. After about 30 or 40 minutes, check the temperature of the oven so that it doesn't exceed about 85°F. If it does, prop the door open with a wooden spoon. If you don't have a light in your oven, put the covered dough in, turn the temperature to 350°F for 1 minute. Turn it off and don't open the door for about an hour.
    • The dough will be sticky coming from the processor. Do not use additional flour. Use a bench scraper to pick it up from the table and turn it over and continue kneading until it is soft and comes together. A little sticky is fine.
    • If there is not enough tension to roll out the ropes without them springing back, put a few drops of water in the palm of your hands. Wipe them quickly together. They should just be damp. Starting at the middle of the rope, roll it out in both directions, stretching it as you go. You do not want a lot of water, just enough to set up tension on the work surface and your hands. So not flour the surface.
    • Because I once made a loaf of bread where the instant yeast did not dissolve and I had little bumps of yeast on the surface, I make it a habit to add the yeast to a liquid just to moisten it. It doesn't need to dissolve.
    Bottom picture of the bread on a wooden board with a napkin and knife the background.

    Hungry for More?

    • This photo shows a variety of round pizza crusts and a flatbread crust with a tomato and sauteed veggies in the background.
      Homemade Pizza Dough
    • Different ways to shape the Outback Steakhouse Bread are shown.
      Outback Steakhouse Bread
    • Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.
      Buttermilk Flatbreads
    • Finished Baguettes
      Wine and Cheese Baguettes- A Favorite bread

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Slices of the Rye Raisin Bread sits on a cutting board with the whole behind it surrounded by a plaid towel and knife.

    Rye Raisin Bread With Bakery-Style Flavor

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Imagine a Rye Raisin Bread chock full of flavor from the earthy rye flour with beer, raisins and a hint of orange that requires only a wet mixture and a dry mixture combined to achieve. No complicated steps, no long waits, just a bread that feels both rustic and refined.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Rising & Shaping time 3 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 162 kcal

    Equipment

    • 1 9x5 loaf pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 2/3 cup dark raisins
    • 1 1/8 cups dark beer (1 cup + 2 Tablespoons)
    • 2 1/4 teaspoons instant yeast (1 packet)
    • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil
    • 2 tablespoons molasses
    • 2 teaspoons orange zest (from 1 large orange)
    • 2 cups bread flour (280 grams)
    • 1 cup +3 tablespoons rye flour (140 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar (packed)
    • 1 1/2 teaspoons salt

    Instructions
     

    • Soak the raisins in very hot or boiling water. Set them aside while prepping the rest of the ingredients.
    • Place the beer in small saucepan and bring to a boil for 1 minute. Remove from the heat and allow to cool to room temperature.
    • In the meantime put the bread and rye flours as well as the salt in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix. Add the brown sugar and orange zest. Pulse again several times.
    • Add the yeast, oil and molasses to the beer, stirring well. Let it sit for a minute or two. Pour it over the dry ingredients in the processor and process to bring the dough together.
    • Squeeze as much water from the raisins as you can and add them to the processor. Pulse several times to cut them in. Do not over process. Some whole raisins are fine.
    • The dough may be slightly sticky. If it is, just knead it 5 or 10 times to make a smooth ball. Spray a container at least twice its size with a non-stick baking spray and place the dough in it. Turn it over so both sides are oiled. Cover with plastic wrap, and put a lid on the container or cover with a tea towel.
    • Because this bread uses rye flour it rises more slowly than one made with just bread flour. As such it is to your advantage to use a proofer. Just put it in a container sprayed with a non-stick baking release cover it with a tea towel and put it in the oven with the light on. After about 30 or 40 minutes, check the temperature of the oven so that it doesn't exceed about 85°F. If it does, prop the door open with a wooden spoon. If you don't have a light in your oven, put the covered dough in, turn the temperature to 350°F for 1 minute. Turn it off and don't open the door for about an hour. Let the dough double in size before using or holding overnight in the fridge.
    • Spray a 9x5 inch loaf pan with a non-stick baking spray, Set aside,
    • To shape the dough, deflate it and divide it in half (about 420 grams each). Roll each piece into a 16" rope and place them side by side. If there is not enough tension to roll out the ropes without them springing back, put a few drops of water in the palm of your hands. Wipe them quickly together. They should just be damp. Starting at the middle of the rope, roll it out in both directions, stretching it as you go. You do not want a lot of water, just enough to set up tension on the work surface and your hands. So do not flour the surface. Rewet your hands as needed.
    • Place the ropes side by side. Twist them together. Dab a bit of water on the very top and bottom pieces and pinch them together tucking them underneath.Place the twist into the prepared pan and let it rise until about doubled. Use the proofer again if desired.
    • Shortly before the bread is completely risen, heat the oven to 350°F. If you are proofing it in the oven, be sure to take the bread out of the oven when it is preheating.
    • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes until the bread is deeply browned and hollow sounding when tapped. Leave it in the pan for about 5 minutes and turn it out onto a rack to cool completely
    • The wrapped bread wlll stay good for several days or it can be frozen for several months.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post above.  If you have questions, look at the photos or read the header of the article.  Many of them will be answered there. 
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  For my recipes, I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. Others may use different weights so use whatever they suggest.
    Unless otherwise noted, salt refers to table salt.
    ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­Nutrition information provided is an estimate and will vary based on cooking methods and brands of ingredients used.
    _____________________________________________________
    The dough will be sticky coming from the processor. Do not use additional flour. Use a bench scraper to pick it up from the table and turn it over and continue kneading until it is soft and comes together. A little sticky is fine.
    If there is not enough tension to roll out the ropes without them springing back, put a few drops of water in the palm of your hands. Wipe them quickly together. They should just be damp. Starting at the middle of the rope, roll it out in both directions, stretching it as you go. You do not want a lot of water, just enough to set up tension on the work surface and your hands. So do not flour the surface. 
    Because I once made a loaf of bread where the instant yeast did not dissolve and I had little bumps of yeast on the surface, I make it a habit to add the yeast to a liquid just to moisten it. It doesn't need to dissolve.
    Soaking the raisins in really hot or boiling water softens them making and yields more flavor. It is important to squeeze all the water out of them before adding to the bread dough.
    Light or brown sugar can be used.
    Bread flour is important for it's ability to lift the dough higher, especially when using rye flour which has little to no rising ability on it's own.
    Rye flour comes in colors - light, medium or dark and then pumpernickel, the darkest of all. I used medium. But either the light or dark would also work.
    The use of beer in this recipe is one of the main flavor ingredients. Water can be used but it won't taste the same. Burning the alcohol off as required in the recipe makes just an ingredient.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 162kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 4gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gSodium: 297mgPotassium: 176mgFiber: 2gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 17mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Valentine’s Desserts Everyone Is Baking

    Modified: Feb 10, 2025 · Published: Feb 10, 2026 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.

    Valentine’s Day brings out the craving for something a little sweeter—and these desserts deliver without overcomplicating things. This Valentine’s roundup pulls together tried-and-true favorites that feel festive, comforting, and completely achievable at home. They’re the kind of recipes people bookmark now and bake year after year even when it's not Valentine's Day. There are cookies, cakes, tarts, candy and more. One is sure to be your favorite!

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.

    Cookies

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies
    These heart shaped Tropical Shortbread Cookies are the perfect way to say "I Love You" on Valentines day. While cut out cookies can be a challenge, my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique makes is so much easier.  
    No flour all over, no trying to scrape the cookie off the counter, just perfect cut out cookies every time without the drama. The cookies don't spread and they cut out cleanly with sharp edges.
    Check out this recipe
    Tropical Shortbreads half dipped in chocolate on a lattice platter in front of a purple background.
    Multi colored Painted Cookies on a lace plate
    Painted Cookies
    An easy way to finish a cookie with an explosion of color that is easy to make. The cookie recipe is included and is a joy as it doesn't spread when baked and keeps it's sharpe edges and shape.
    Check out this recipe
    French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    Just in time for Valentine's day comes these special French Macarons with the same chocolate raspberry truffle filling we sold at the bakery. This deeply chocolate, deeply raspberry filling is sandwiched between two pink macaroons.
    Check out this recipe
    A plate of pink French macarons filled with chocolate and raspberry sit on a white plate.
    Red and White glazed heart shaped Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies on a white plate with blue edges.
    Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies
    These Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookies are a European cookie that are a cinch to make using the food processor. They are a delightfully chewy cookie equally fantastic plain or glazed. A few ingredients, a quick turn in the processor and the dough is ready to be rolled and cut into shapes. These are a natural for Valentines Day, although they could be cut into any shape. Naturally gluten free, the cookies use almond flour.
    Check out this recipe
    Strawberry Brownies
    Looking for a Valentine's a brownie? These Strawberry Brownies deliver in every way. If you love brownies that are a bit different and unexpected, you've come to the right place. They’re chewy in the middle, lightly crisp on the edges, and packed with real strawberry flavor- thanks to the strawberry buttercream and chocolate glaze - making them ideal for this special day.
    Check out this recipe
    Multiple Strawberry Brownies sit on a white background.

    Cakes

    A slice of theUltimate Chocolate Fudge Cake sits in a pool of creme anglaise.
    Updated GF Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake
    This Ultimate Chocolate Fudge Cake is ultra-smooth and has a deep, intense chocolate taste without being bitter or overwhelming. Serve it alone, with a caramel sauce or for a special treat serve it with the strawberry sauce for the Lemon Strawberry Cake. Nothing could say Valentine's day better or easier.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte
    This Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte is a showy torte that is actually reallly easy to accomplish. It's like the best chocolate covered strawberry you ever ate!  A simple French cake, the Reine de Saba, is filled with fresh strawberries and topped with a chocolate mousse and glaze.
    Check out this recipe
    The Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte sits on a gold platter.
    A slice of the Raspberry MascarponeTarte Tropezienne sits on a lace edged white plate with a teal napkin behind it and a gold rimed saucer.
    Raspberry Mascarpone Tarte Tropezienne
    This is a great dessert anytime, but especially for Valentine's Day. It features my super easy 60 second Brioche as its base and if filled with an exquisite light, creamy mascarpone filling enclosing fresh raspberries with a special crunch from pearl sugar.  Also called Swedish Pearl Sugar, these snow-white nuggets don't melt when baked and are a must-have for this dessert.
    Check out this recipe
    Amaretto Truffle Torte
    This Amaretto Truffle Torte is one of the most intense, decadent tortes you will find. Intensely chocolate and deeply flavored with amaretto and hazelnuts (almonds are fine also), this should be served in small pieces to be savored.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate cake base covered with caramel and hazelnuts topped with amaretto ganache.

    Individual Desserts

    Decadent Gluten Free Turtle Cake
    Gluten Free Turtle Cake with Salted Carame.
    While this is the least perfect cake I have ever made I love it, I kept it because it is so darn delicious. Topped with the caramel no one knows. And boy did people ask for seconds.
    Check out this recipe
    Strawberry Verrines
    A verrine is a layered dessert or appetizer that is served in a small glass.  The glass allows for a beautiful vertical presentation.  Verrines originally came to us from France, but as with all foods we make them ours by the ingredients used.
    Check out this recipe
    A small glass hold the Strawberry Verrine which is a combination of a chocolate mousse and pastry cream filled with strawberries.
    A heart shaped individual chocolate truffle tart filled with fresh raspberries sits on a white plate with blue dots.
    No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts
    If you're looking for an easy, mouthwatering dessert, these individual No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts are perfect with a sophistication that will make everyone think you stopped by the best bakery in town. (Shhh! Don't tell anyone these can be made ahead!)
    Check out this recipe
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse
    Dacquoise with Raspberry Mousse is an amazing combination of three nutted meringue discs filled with a raspberry mousse that is enhanced with mascarpone. Made into individual desserts (who doesn't like their own dessert?) these stunning offerings are easy to make and easier to eat.
    Check out this recipe
    An individual Hazelnut Meringue with a Rasperry filling sits on two plates,

    Pies and Tarts

    Chocolate Strawberry Pie
    Looking for something really fast and really tasty? This is it. A pie crust if filled with fresh strawberries and covered with a decadent chocolate ganache. 30 minutes top. Bake the crust while you hull the strawberries.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart
    This  elegant Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart is actually really easy to make.  While it’s true there is no baking, the raspberry curd does have to be made at least a day or two ahead. But is is a no bake tart after that.
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

    Candy

    A close-up of a stack of salted macadamia rum toffee.
    Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee
    This Salted Macadamia Rum Toffee is simply a matter of adding a few ingredients at a time and taking the mixture to a stated temperature.  Stir in a couple of more ingredients and pour it into a prepared pan. In a matter of minutes, it’s cool and ready to finish.
    Check out this recipe
    Nutella Fudge Hearts
    Nutella Fudge can be made in a flash and is perfect for cutting into cute little hearts for Valentine's day. Not interested in hearts? Cut it into squares. With a little supervision this would be perfect to make with kids. It takes literally minutes to put together.
    Check out this recipe
    Nutella Hazelnut Fudge Hearts on a white plate with yellow rose petals below.
    Macadamia Brittle|Candy|Pastries Like a Pro
    Sweet and Hot Macadamia Brittle
    An easy brittle that doesn't require a candy thermometer, this brittle comes together easily and quickly. Any nut can be used and a touch of heat makes it memorable.
    Check out this recipe
    Better than Reese's Peanut Butter Cups
    And not only better, but really, really easy. Four ingredients for the peanut butter and two for the chocolate. So there's no excuse for not making these Peanut Butter Cups.
    Check out this recipe
    Reese's Peanut Butter Cups

    Thanks for looking and have a great Valentine's day!

    • 1
    • 2
    • 3
    • …
    • 15
    • Next Page »

    Hi, I'm Helen! Being a self-taught baker and owning a bakery for over 25 years, I found many ways to make baking more successful and less intimidating. Even busy people can bake as in many cases, recipes can be done over days. The goal is to make your baking life easier, more enjoyable, with great outcomes on a consistent basis.

    More about me →

    Subscribe to receive our free ebook

    Fall Favorites

    • A slice of the Cinnamon Whiskey Tart sits on a plate with a scoop of ice cream and caramel sauce.
      Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart
    • A slice of the pecan upside down cake sits on a white plate with a lace edge which sits o ntop of another orangish pate.
      Pecan Upside Down Cake
    • Traditional Apple Strudel
    • Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie slice on a plate with the pie plate in the background.
      Cinnamon Bun Apple Pie
    • An individual Gingerbread with Orange Sauce on a white plate with dots.
      Gingerbread with Orange Sauce
    • Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe
      Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways

    Popular Recipes

    • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
      Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
    • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
      Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
      Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
    • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
      Langue de Chat
    • A split double strawberry muffin showing its pink interior next to a streusel-topped muffin on a white scalloped plate with a fresh strawberry.
      The Only Muffin Recipes You'll Ever Need — All From a Bowl and a Whisk!
    • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
      Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

    Available Now

    Available on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Apple Books, as well as other sites and in book stores.
    AUTOGRAPHED COPIES ARE AVAILABLE
    Click here to purchase an autographed copy.

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    About

    • About Helen
    • Privacy Policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and updates

    Contact

    • Contact
    • Press
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • Instagram
    • Threads
    • Bluesky

    COPYRIGHT © 2026 PASTRIES LIKE A PRO

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required